Samsung is working on its next big UI update, One UI 8.5, which will be based on Android 16. The update will debut with the Galaxy S26 series next year. Initially, a beta program was expected to open in November, but recent reports suggest it’s been delayed, possibly because of changes in Galaxy S26 launch plans. Regardless, this isn’t stopping the leaks coming our way. In our latest dose, we’re hearing that Samsung may add presets for the Pro camera controls with One UI 8.5.
Samsung’s One UI 8.5 may introduce presets for Pro camera controls
In the latest One UI 8.5 builds, folks at Android Authority have spotted lines of code that suggest Samsung may introduce presets. With this change, you can switch to a particular preset at any point in time without going through manually changing the controls every time you want to click a photo with Pro mode.
This has apparently been the most requested feature for years from Galaxy users. It now looks like Samsung is finally listening to the feedback. However, it’s unclear how many presets a user can save in total.
Samsung may even let you share the presets
Furthermore, the report notes that Samsung may also let users select specific cameras for the Pro Mode preset. The strings reveal the ability to choose presets for the wide, ultrawide, telephoto, super telephoto, and front cameras. The presets will reportedly let you reserve values for various camera settings, including focus type (manual or autofocus), ISO, Kelvin value, Manual color tune (saturation, contrast, highlights, shadow), Shutter speed, White balance, Focus length, and Exposure.
Not just saving a present, Samsung may even let users share the camera presets with other Galaxy users through the Quick Share app. However, we’ll have to see how it will handle the preset compatibility. This is considering that each Galaxy phone has varying camera specs and features.
Samsung isn’t the first brand to offer camera presets; The source notes that they’re already present on several Android flagships. This means Samsung is finally catching up with the competition.
The soaring demand for artificial intelligence is about to hit your wallet in a place you might not expect: your phone’s RAM. We typically focus on the price of components like the main processor. Every so often we get news about increasingly expensive Snapdragon chips, for example. However, the cost of the RAM memory used in our phones is set to skyrocket, creating a headache for every major manufacturer.
The reason is a heated tech market conflict for raw production capacity between high-performance AI servers and your pocket-sized device.
The AI tax: Why flagship smartphone prices will increase in 2026
The culprit behind this price surge is High Bandwidth Memory (HBM). HBM is the powerful, specialized RAM essential for feeding massive AI models in data centers. Demand for HBM is showing no sign of slowing, and since HBM consumes a large amount of the available silicon, it is swallowing up the wafer capacity needed for conventional server memory (DDR5). Also the memory used in your phone: LPDDR5x.
LPDDR5x is the high-performance, low-power RAM/memory required by modern flagship phones. Because it competes with HBM for the same production resources, this imbalance is causing chaos in the mobile supply chain.
According to a new report from market research firm TrendForce, this structural supply shortage is deepening. TrendForce has dramatically revised its forecast for general DRAM pricing—which includes LPDDR5x—for the end of 2025. Now they expect growth of 18–23%, up from an earlier forecast of 8–13%.
The unexpected market flip
Here is where the memory market takes an unexpected turn. Initially, HBM was far more profitable for suppliers, commanding a price premium four times higher than DDR5. However, as the HBM market becomes more competitive and server demand for standard DDR5 remains robust, that gap is shrinking fast.
TrendForce predicts that by the first quarter of 2026, the profitability of standard DDR5 will actually surpass that of HBM3e. When this happens, manufacturers may shift production resources away from HBM to secure earnings from DDR5. This might eventually stabilize the HBM market. But it means the price pressure on LPDDR5x will remain high well into 2026.
Manufacturers are already sounding the alarm. Lu Weibing, president of Xiaomi, recently noted that the rise in storage costs is “much higher than expected and will continue to increase.”
The consumer pays the price
What do rising memory and storage costs mean for you? Smartphone manufacturers operate on extremely thin margins. This is especially true for flagship devices that also include expensive components like cutting-edge camera sensors and high-end 2nm processors.
When the cost of LPDDR5x memory jumps by nearly 20%, manufacturers have few options other than passing that cost along to the consumer. For anyone planning to upgrade their flagship phone next year, the price tag will likely be significantly higher. It seems the AI revolution will make our future smartphones a little more expensive.
Elon Musk has entered the knowledge arena, launching Grokipedia, a new online encyclopedia powered by his xAI models. As its name suggests, it is a direct competitor to the massively popular Wikipedia. In fact, Musk claims Grokipedia will “purge out the propaganda” found on Wikipedia and exceed its rival “by several orders of magnitude in breadth, depth, and accuracy.”
However, the man who co-founded Wikipedia, Jimmy Wales, disagrees with that statement. Speaking at a recent CNBC summit, Wales dismissed Grokipedia’s threat, arguing that the underlying technology—Large Language Models (LLMs)—simply isn’t capable of producing a reliable encyclopedia.
Wikipedia’s Jimmy Wales is not worried about Elon Musk’s AI-powered Grokipedia
Wales’ skepticism stems from Grokipedia being powered by AI. He is aware of the flaws of LLMs like Grok and ChatGPT, which have a tendency to “make massive errors” and fabricate sources—namely “AI hallucinations.” Wales shared an example where a Wikipedia community member found that a source had used an LLM to generate book citations. This allegedly resulted in the chatbot “very happily mak[ing] up books.”
To test LLMs, Wales often queries obscure topics, such as the identity of his wife (a “not famous but known” figure in British politics). He claims that this search consistently results in a plausible but ultimately wrong answer.
“We know ChatGPT and all the other LLMs are not good enough to write wiki entries,” Wales stated. He emphasizes that the reliance on human verification and community oversight that Wikipedia has developed over decades.
The question of bias and sources
Musk and his allies frequently criticize Wikipedia for alleged “woke bias” and for excluding conservative media as sources. Grokipedia’s own entry on Wikipedia accuses the site of having a “systemic ideological bias.”
Wales strongly defended Wikipedia’s editorial policy. He said the organization’s priority is sourcing neutrality. “We don’t treat random crackpots the same as The New England Journal of Medicine, and that doesn’t make us woke,” Wales said. He also added that responding to criticism by “doubling down on being neutral and being really careful about sources” is essential.
The Wikimedia Foundation still acknowledges that AI poses challenges—notably the decline in human visits and the increased scraping of Wikipedia data to train AI models. However, he considers Wikipedia’s approach to be better and more reliable. “This human-created knowledge is what AI companies rely on to generate content; even Grokipedia needs Wikipedia to exist,” notes the Foundation.
Ultimately, Wales views the biggest threat not as a direct AI replacement. Instead, he sees it as the ability of LLMs to generate plausible fake websites, which could fool the general public.
Car chargers can be an incredibly useful accessory, but even more so if you have multiple devices to charge at once, or multiple people in the car who want to charge devices, and that’s why this deal on the Lisen 4-port car charger is one you should consider. Normally, this charger would cost you $27.99, but right now you can pick it up for $16.14, which is a discount of 42%. You’re saving almost half the regular cost, and that makes this a really good value.
For starters, this is a four-port car charger. You can charge up to four devices simultaneously. If you have kids, you definitely want one of these for longer car rides. This charger also includes two retractable cables, one of which is USB-C and the other is a Lightning cable. This helps cut down on car clutter and lost cables because two of them are built into the charger itself. That means you only need to bring two cables to use for those other ports.
Additionally, this charger supports up to a maximum of 69W, so you can charge devices quickly. This charger also features a 180-degree angled design that you can adjust to meet your needs. That bendable hinge is way more useful than you might think, especially if you have people in the backseat charging, or if you have phones stuck to a dash mount and need to angle the charger upward.
Bluetooth speakers are a versatile piece of tech, and speakers like the JBL Clip 5, which Amazon currently has a deal on, are some of the best options for a Bluetooth speaker because they’re extremely portable. The JBL Clip 5 is perhaps the poster child for portable Bluetooth speakers, because it’s not only compact, but it can be clipped to stuff so you don’t even have to carry it with your hands or put it in a bag. And now, it’s down to just $59.95. Normally, the JBL Clip 5 costs $79.95, so you’re saving about $20 here. Worth noting is that Amazon has this labeled as a limited-time deal. So, you’re going to want to take advantage of the discount while you can.
Aside from its portability, the JBL Clip 5 is also waterproof. Go ahead and take it with you to the pool, the lake, or anywhere there might be some water that can splash around and potentially get the speaker wet. It has up to 12 hours of battery life on a single charge, which means it should have no trouble lasting you an entire day. It might even last several days, depending on how long you use it each time you connect it to something.
The carabiner clip design is really what sets this apart, though. Clipping it to bags is one thing, but this design also makes it possible to hang the speaker from various things around the house. You could easily use this as a shower speaker if you wanted. As a nice little bonus, the JBL Clip 5 comes in several different colors.
If you just picked up a shiny new iPhone 17, you’re probably already thinking about how to keep it safe — and maybe even level up its everyday use. Apple’s latest flagship doesn’t come cheap, and with all that glass, titanium, and MagSafe-ready power, a good case and the right accessories are basically essential. Whether you’re after ultra-slim protection that still shows off the new color options, a rugged MagSafe case that can take a drop, or accessories that make the most of that upgraded Qi2 charging and USB-C port, we’ve got you covered.
In this guide, we’re rounding up the best iPhone 17 cases and accessories you can buy right now — from premium brands like Nomad and TORRAS to budget-friendly favorites that punch above their price. We’ll cover everything from chargers and power banks to screen protectors, mounts, and more, so you can protect, charge, and personalize your iPhone 17 in style.
Best Apple iPhone 17 Case
We believe that the best case for the iPhone 17 is actually the Apple Silicone case. Apple has really updated this case to be quite good. And it does have the camera control button included.
Apple Silicon Case
$37
If you’re looking for a case that matches Apple’s polish and leverages every accessory-advantage in the iPhone 17 ecosystem, the Apple Silicone Case with MagSafe is a strong pick. Designed to fit the iPhone 17’s curves precisely, it gives you that soft-touch finish where premium meets subtlety. On the outside you get a smooth, silky silicone layer; inside there’s a microfiber lining to guard against micro-abrasions and the dreaded pocket lint surprise.
But this isn’t just about looks and feel — the case also incorporates built-in magnets that seamlessly align with the iPhone 17’s MagSafe system for fast, reliable wireless charging and accessory attachment. And for photography lovers, it adds support for Apple’s “Camera Control”-capable feature (via a sapphire crystal + conductive layer) so your manual controls aren’t hindered by the case.
Of course, you’re paying Apple premium pricing here, but what you get is full ecosystem compatibility, a snug fit that preserves the iPhone 17’s minimalist lines, and the confidence of Apple’s rigorous testing to better handle day-to-day knocks and bumps.
Buy from
Best Clear Case
There’s a lot of great, clear cases on the market for the iPhone, but we do believe that what ESR has is the best option right now.
ESR Classic Hybrid
$9.99
If you want full clarity so your iPhone 17’s color and design shine through, yet still demand serious protection, the ESR Classic Hybrid Magnetic Case nails the balance. Its transparent back means you’re not hiding that sleek finish you paid for — unlike some so-called “clear” cases that add opaque patches or heavy frames.
But this isn’t just about style: ESR ramps up the specs with anti-yellowing material on the clear shell, so it won’t turn cloudy over time as many budget transparents do. It supports MagSafe with strong magnets and includes a dedicated cut-out or coverage for the new Camera Control button on iPhone 17, meaning you don’t lose functionality for visibility.
On the protection front you’re looking at “military-grade” drop defence from its reinforced “Air Guard” corners, with raised lips around screen and camera edges to absorb shock and protect the lens module. All told, this case delivers transparent style without sacrificing substance — a smart pick if you want minimal-visual bulk but maximum everyday safeguarding.
Buy from
Best Rugged Case
The iPhone 17 is already pretty strong, but with a good rugged case it can be almost indestructible. Perfect for those who might be a bit tough on their devices.
Spigen Tough Armor T
$24.99
This case is built from the ground up with protection as the priority: UAG’s Monarch Pro features a multi-layer construction including a shock-resistant core, impact-resistant rubber surrounds, a shear plate and reinforced armor frame. That kind of architecture signals you’re getting more than just decent drop protection — you’re getting something designed for real-world abuse.
The raised edges around the screen and the camera module help prevent scratches and lens damage when you set the phone down face-up or back-down. And while “rugged” cases often bulk up too much, the Monarch keeps MagSafe compatibility built in — meaning you don’t have to give up wireless charging or accessory compatibility to have serious protection.
Buy from
Best Photography Case
iPhones are known for being very popular devices for YouTubers, and photographers. So a case that is great for photography like the Peak Design Everyday case is a really good option.
Peak Design Everyday Case
$49.95
If you’re serious about photography with your new iPhone 17, the Peak Design Everyday Case for iPhone 17 is a standout pick. Designed for creators who carry their phone like their mini-camera, it combines slick aesthetics with pro-level functionality. On the surface it’s a slim, protective MagSafe-compatible case with a precise cut for the iPhone 17’sCamera Control button and a tactile finish that feels premium.
But what makes it truly photography-worthy is how it integrates into the wider Peak Design Mobile ecosystem. The case features the SlimLink magnetic system so that accessories adhere cleanly and securely—critical when you’re balancing a phone on a tripod or mounting it in unusual positions. From the official product page: it “brilliantly connects to the entire Peak Design Mobile Ecosystem.”
Pairing this case with the Peak Design Mobile Tripod takes it a step further. The tripod snaps on magnetically via the SlimLink interface, then unfolds into a mini rig you can use to shoot low-angle handhelds, landscape time-lapses, or stable 4K video.
Buy from
Best Leather Case
There are a lot of leather cases available for the iPhone, but it’s hard to find something better than what Nomad offers. Nomad does also offer a lot of styles and colors for the iPhone 17 series.
Nomad Modern Leather Case
$55
If you want a case that screams premium without sacrificing protection, the Nomad Modern Leather Case for iPhone 17 is the one to get. Crafted from full-grain leather sourced from the renowned Danish tannery Ecco, it develops a beautiful patina over time — meaning it actually looks better the more you use it. This isn’t faux leather that flakes or fades; it’s the real deal, with warm tones and a smooth, refined texture that elevates your phone’s aesthetic.
Underneath that elegance is real protection. Nomad built the Modern Leather Case with a 360° TPE bumper that absorbs shocks and keeps your iPhone 17 safe from drops up to 2.4 meters. The raised edges guard your camera and display, while anodized aluminum buttons give it a satisfying, tactile feel.
It’s also fully MagSafe compatible, so you can use it with Apple’s chargers or Nomad’s own line of accessories without missing a beat. And thanks to its slim, precisely engineered design, it slides easily into a pocket or bag while still looking boardroom-ready.
Buy at Nomad Goods
Best iPhone 17 Accessories
We’ve also rounded up some great accessories that you can buy to make the most out of your iPhone 17 experience.
Apple Watch Series 11
$399
The Apple Watch Series 11 is perfect to pair with the iPhone 17 because it has all of the latest features from Apple, and works really well with the iPhone 17. Since it was made specifically for it.
It comes in Space Gray, Silver, Rose Gold, and Jet Black, starting at $399, with options that bring it up over $699.
It does also come in two sizes: 42mm and 46mm. We believe this is the better option for the iPhone 17 over the Apple Watch Ultra 3, because of the cost. And most people buying an iPhone 17 don’t need the adventurous features of Watch Ultra.
Buy from
Apple AirPods Pro 3
$249
If you own the AirPods Pro 3 alongside your new iPhone 17, you’re looking at one of the most seamless audio pairings Apple has ever offered. From deep integration with iOS to killer hardware upgrades, these buds deserve a spot at the top of your buyer’s guide.
Firstly, they pack what Apple calls the “world’s best in-ear Active Noise Cancellation (ANC),” delivering up to 4× more noise reduction than the original AirPods Pro. That means when you’re commuting, working from a café, or trying to focus, the sound isolation is truly elite. On top of that, the acoustic architecture—custom driver, high dynamic range amp, H2-chip—gives you rich sound, wide soundstage, and clean vocals.
For the iPhone‐17 user, the ecosystem perks shine: effortless pairing, automatic device switching, deep integration with the Fitness app (thanks to the new heart-rate sensor built into the AirPods Pro 3) and Live Translation support for on-the-go multilingual conversations. They’re also IP57 rated (dust & sweat resistant) which means they hold up when your day takes a turn into gym time or weather-worse commutes.
Buy from
UGREEN MagFlow 10,000mAh Wireless charger
$69.99
If you’re on the hunt for a top-tier MagSafe charger to pair with your iPhone 17, the UGREEN MagFlow MagSafe Wireless Charger stands out as a serious contender — and here’s why it deserves “best charger” status in your buyers guide.
First off: the magnetic grip. UGREEN built this charger with a strong array of magnets that lock into your iPhone’s MagSafe alignment, making sure the phone snaps on securely and stays in place — no annoying sliding off the pad mid-charge. The precision alignment also boosts charging efficiency because the coil is properly positioned every time.
Then there’s support for the newer charging standard. The MagFlow lineup supports Qi2 or MPP magnetic charging protocols which push wireless charging speeds beyond the old 15 W ceiling to up to 25 W on compatible devices. While your iPhone 17 may or may not hit the full 25 W (depending on Apple’s specification), investing in this now gives future-proofing for accessory compatibility and faster wireless power.
Buy from
Belkin UltraCharge Pro
$129
If you want the best wireless charger for your iPhone 17, the Belkin Boost Charge Pro is the one to get. It’s fully MagSafe-certified, so your phone snaps perfectly into place every time — no guessing or slow misaligned charging. The strong magnetic connection keeps your iPhone secure, whether it’s on your desk, nightstand, or charging at an angle.
Belkin also nails speed and reliability. This charger delivers up to 15W MagSafe power, letting your iPhone 17 charge faster than most generic Qi pads. It’s built with premium materials and a solid, non-slip base, giving it that polished Apple-like look and feel.
You can even grab the 2-in-1 or 3-in-1 Boost Charge Pro versions if you want to charge your AirPods or Apple Watch alongside your iPhone — perfect for keeping everything powered overnight.
Baseus makes quite a few products, and while it makes plenty of chargers and power banks, it also makes things like these Inspire XC1 Open Earbuds, which are now on sale thanks to this deal at Amazon. While Baseus isn’t as recognizable for its audio gear, these earbuds actually have their sound done by Bose, which gives them a significant bump in recognition.
Since these are open earbuds, they don’t come with active noise cancellation, so if you’re looking for a pair of earbuds that have that kind of feature, there are better options. However, if you want something open with a wider sound stage, these are definitely that. The open design lets a little more noise in, so things sound more natural. It also means that you have a better grasp of your surroundings because you have a little bit of ambient noise, giving you more awareness.
In terms of fit, these are pretty comfortable and designed to be worn all day without discomfort. If you tend to wear earbuds for long periods of time, or you’ve wished you could, then you should consider these. Because they might just be the most comfortable pair of earbuds you’ve ever worn. They’ll last for up to 8 hours per charge, too. So you could wear them for most of the workday before you need to charge them. Speaking of charging, these come with the charging case that extends the battery life up to 40 hours.
Motorola will launch its ultra-slim Edge 70 phone globally on November 5th. It’s basically the same phone as the Moto X70 Air, which is available in China. We’ve already seen the design of the phone through some leaked renders. Now, as we inch closer to the announcement, Motorola has listed the Edge 70 on its official Polish and German websites, which show off more images and complete specs.
Motorola Edge 70 images and specs are listed on the official website
The official listing confirms the Motorola Edge 70 will be available in three Pantone colors: Gadget Grey, Lilly Pad, and Bronze Green. We’ve already seen the phone in the latter two colors via leaked renders. It features a unique nylon-textured finish on the back, offering a good grip. The frame is made of aircraft-grade aluminum, while the display gets a Gorilla Glass 7i protection layer. Motorola says the body has passed MIL-STD 810H standards.
The Motorola Edge 70 is just 5.99mm in thickness and is “feather light,” weighing around 159 grams. In comparison, the iPhone Air is 5.6mm thin and weighs 165 grams. There’s an IP68 and IP69 rating for water and dust resistance. It gets Water Touch support, so you can continue using it even if you’re by the pool or out and about on a rainy day.
Snapdragon 7 Gen 4 at the helm
Moving to specs, the Moto Edge 70 will feature the Qualcomm Snapdragon 7 Gen 4 processor. In comparison, the Edge 60 had the MediaTek Dimensity 7300. You get 12GB LPDDR5x RAM and 512GB native storage. It’ll boot Android 16 OS with Motorola’s OS, which is close to stock UI, on top. The software offers a bunch of Moto AI features like Note Assist, Playlist Studio, and Circle to Search.
The Edge 70 features a 6.67-inch 120Hz pOLED display with 100% DCI-P3 color space, 4,500 nits peak brightness, and HDR10+. The panel is Pantone validated for correct colors. You get a dual camera setup on the back, with a 50MP main f/1.8 lens with OIS and a 50MP f/2.0 ultra-wide-angle lens. There’s another 50MP lens on the front for your selfie needs.
Edge 70 will be available in three colors
Though the rest of the hardware sounds quite juicy, the battery department may not be pleasing. It has a moderate 4,800mAh silicon-carbon battery. This seems like a tradeoff for being slim. However, Motorola is promising up to 29 hours of continuous video playback and up to 66 hours of music. You get 68W fast charging and 15W wireless charging.
Connectivity options of the phone include 5G, Bluetooth 5.4, Wi-Fi, NFC, GPS, Glonass, Galileo, and a USB Type-C. You get dual Dolby Atmos stereo speakers. There’s an in-screen fingerprint sensor and ThinkShield facial recognition for authentication. Motorola will share the price and availability details of the Edge 70 on the day of its launch.
Despite being in high demand, compact phones seem to continue to be a niche for device makers. Only a few brands out there cover this segment adequately, and the list is even shorter outside of China. Well, meet the Vivo X200 FE, a pseudo-flagship handset—in the same category as the OnePlus 13R, OnePlus 13s, or Samsung Galaxy S25 FE, among others—that wants to fill this space.
The X200 FE isn’t exactly a budget phone, but it’s not as expensive as other devices that top—or even exceed—the $1,000 price tag. Its price tag places it at a nice spot in the flagship segment. Plus, its compact form factor makes it stand out in an industry populated by “mini tablets.” Add in a massive battery, long life, and remarkable cameras with ZEISS optics and tuning, and overall, you have a pretty attractive—although not perfect—package. Below, we will review all the pros and cons of this handset.
Vivo X200 FE
Rating
starstarstarstarstar_empty
€799
Vivo X200 FE is a solid pseudo-flagship phone that combines pretty good cameras, a huge battery, high performance, and premium design in a compact package.
Pros
Matte-textured glass finish, highly resistant to fingerprints and scratches
Dimensity 9300+ chip performance and efficiency is excellent
A massive battery whose size is surprising in a compact body
Clear, vivid and bright AMOLED display, visible even in sunlight
Battery charges from 20 to 100% in just around 45 minutes
Main and periscope cameras offer great results
Premium glass and metal build with IP68/IP69 rating
Cons
8MP ultra-wide sensor is too out of place in the powerful camera system
No wireless charging
Despite stellar performance, UFS 3.1 storage and USB 2.0 are not up to par for its price range
Extremely slippery design
The manufacturer provided us with a review unit of the Vivo X200 FE. We used it as our primary device for approximately one month before writing this review, which was not sponsored.
The design of the Vivo X200 FE is one of its strengths. With a display measuring just 6.31 inches and a body weighing around 188 grams, this is one of the few premium phones you can truly use with one hand without feeling like you might drop it. This point alone could be a great plus for many. After a long time—years—using phones of at least 6.7 inches, the change felt refreshing. I really thought I would find the screen too small, but I got used to it quickly.
The phone’s frame is crafted from aerospace-grade aluminum. In terms of real-world use, it feels sturdy, durable, and premium. There have been no signs of scratches in the time I have used it. Regarding the overall design, it is simple, clean, and practical. The rear panel features a textured glass finish that does an excellent job of resisting fingerprints and smudges. However, it also makes the phone quite slippery, so you’ll need to be careful if you like to carry it “uncased.”
The overall build quality is solid, with no creases or flex. As you may expect on a high-end “camera-focused” phone, the camera bump is notably raised. That means you’ll notice a lot of wobbles if you try to use the phone’s screen while it is laid on a flat surface—again, if you prefer not to use a case.
Beyond the aesthetics and in-hand feel, the X200 FE comes with an IP68 and IP69 rating. This means it’s fully protected against dust and can even handle high-pressure water jets. I submerged it in water for testing, and everything continued to work correctly. However, you will find that using the wet screen becomes complicated. This is a familiar situation for most phones out there, though.
The display has protection, but probably not the kind you’re used to. There’s a layer of Schott Xensation Core glass, a rarity in a segment dominated by Corning. Anyway, the phone comes with a pre-applied plastic protector that has been pretty resilient so far.
The phone is available in up to four colors: Amber Yellow, Frost Blue (our unit), Luxe Black, and Pink Vibe. It’s noteworthy that the availability of certain colors may be limited to specific markets. That said, Vivo includes a color-matching case. The case seems quite durable and feels nice in the hand. However, the material’s finish also makes it a bit slippery—though less so than the bare phone itself.
As for the ports and buttons, you’ll find the volume and power buttons on the right side, a USB-C port at the bottom, and a stereo speaker setup. Personally, I prefer the volume and power buttons on different sides of the frame, as the placement makes it easier to take screenshots with one hand. Anyway, I got used to having the buttons on one side after a few days.
The USB-C 2.0 standard is a bit of a curious choice at this price point, as it limits data transfer speeds. While this isn’t a dealbreaker for most users, it is something you should know. Surely those who tend to constantly transfer large files between their phone and PC via USB would have preferred a more current, faster standard.
In short, the Vivo X200 FE is designed as a legitimate compact premium phone. It’s good-looking, durable, and reliable. You will not find compromises in this section.
Vivo X200 FE Review: Display
The screen is a key aspect of our smartphones—especially premium ones. Fortunately, the Vivo X200 FE also excels in this section. The phone sports a 6.31-inch 8T LTPO AMOLED panel with a 2640 x 1216p resolution and a smooth 120Hz refresh rate. How does this translate into the real world? A sharp, smooth as butter user experience.
Whether you’re watching a series, a movie, or even a sporting event, the experience with the Vivo X200 FE’s display is truly pleasant. HDR-compatible content takes full advantage of the device’s display, boasting its ability to represent everything from deep blacks to bright highlights without the “black smearing” effect of cheap displays. It’s extremely responsive as well, which is especially notable when playing titles that require rapid reaction times.
The LTPO tech allows the refresh rate to dynamically adjust from 1Hz to 120Hz based on the content. In my experience, this happens perfectly smoothly, without lags or hangs here and there.
Regarding brightness, Vivo claims a peak brightness of 5,000 nits. That said, you won’t get these brightness levels under normal conditions but rather under certain specific situations (such as watching HDR-supported content) and in certain sections of the display. Anyway, I have been able to use this phone without any problem even in bright sunlight. Special mention to the operation of automatic brightness. Even though it may seem like a basic feature, not all phones handle it well. However, the Vivo X200 FE is capable of offering you the ideal levels for practice in every situation. This isn’t a device where you have to constantly adjust the brightness bar, which is just great.
Vivo has also integrated a 2,160Hz PWM dimming that will help your eyes not feel fatigued even during long reading sessions or late-night scrolling. My visual experience with this phone has been quite positive under any lighting conditions.
The screen has a responsive optical fingerprint sensor embedded, which is fast and reliable. I can’t recall a single instance where the fingerprint reader failed.
Overall, the Vivo X200 FE delivers a great viewing experience. It undoubtedly feels like one of the best phone displays you’ll find in this segment.
Vivo X200 FE Review: Performance
Under the hood, the Vivo X200 FE is powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 9300+, a flagship-grade processor from the previous generation. This chip is paired with up to 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM—12GB in our unit—and 512GB of UFS 3.1 storage. While the Dimensity 9300+ is still a powerhouse, the inclusion of UFS 3.1 storage is a bit of a curious choice at this price point, as many rivals have moved to the faster UFS 4.0 standard. This, along with the slower USB 2.0 port, is the only real hardware compromise.
In day-to-day use, the phone feels incredibly fast, fluid, and responsive. Apps open instantly, multitasking is seamless, and there is no hint of lag or stuttering, even with a demanding workload. The performance gap between the Dimensity 9300+ and newer processors is minimal and something most users will never notice.
For gamers, the X200 FE performs really well. The vapor chamber cooling system (3800 mm²) also has a lot to offer. Although it’s not a gaming phone, it has enough raw power to satisfy the vast majority, even considering its compact screen. However, keep in mind that this is a compact handset. Therefore, there’s less inner space available for heat dissipation than in larger devices.
In Call of Duty: Mobile, both “Graphics Quality” and “Frame Rate” are set to “Max” by default, with features like anti-aliasing and real-time shadows turned on. Changing the frame rate to “Ultra” sets the graphics quality to “Medium.” However, every round will be extremely smooth and lag-free with these settings. In Genshin Impact, the game automatically sets the graphics quality to “High,” with most graphics options set to “High” (except for “Shadow Quality,” which is set to “Medium”) and 30fps. You can play it at 45fps by setting “render resolution” to “medium.”
Vivo has put a lot of effort into the gaming aspect of the device. Funtouch offers an “Ultra Gaming” mode that goes far beyond what Android natively includes. It does the typical thing, which is to optimize available hardware resources to get the best possible performance while you play. However, you’ll also find a lot of additional options that aren’t just bloatware but quite useful. These options will be available from a sidebar that you can display by sliding from the left side of the game UI.
These “gaming boosters” are divided into two main sections: “Performance Panel” and “Game Tools.” As the name suggests, the former allows you to intuitively tweak the game’s performance and display the touch sampling rate using a pair of sliders. Game Tools, on the other hand, includes a plethora of options, including mapping actions to motion gestures and screen recording, and enabling 4D vibration feedback for improved haptics. You can even activate “Charge Bypass” to play connected to a power brick without draining your battery.
Vivo X200 FE Review: Benchmarks
In synthetic benchmarks, the X200 FE delivered excellent scores. Due to its compact form factor, it’s not the smartphone that handles heat the best. However, we also can’t say that the device suffers from overheating under high-demand conditions. It’s just a little warmer than other handsets out there.
Geekbench:
Starting with Geekbench 6, the device achieved scores of 2,189 and 7,029 on the single-core and multi-core tests, respectively.
Device
Single-Core
Multi-Core
GPU
Vivo X200 FE
2,189
7,029
14,753
POCO F7 Ultra
2,889
8,326
17,293
Google Pixel 9 Pro
1,961
4,715
6,519
3D Mark’s Wildlife Extreme Stress Test:
We also ran the 3D Mark’s Wildlife Extreme Stress Test on the phone. This is one of the most demanding graphics benchmarks out there. It pushes your phone’s hardware to the limit, to the point where some models are even unable to complete it due to the temperature they reach. So, it’s ideal not only for testing your phone’s GPU but also its thermal control capabilities.
The benchmark consists of running 20 laps of the same graphically demanding test. At the end, the Vivo X200 FE managed to complete the test with a 58.4% stability score. This is perhaps where the smaller form factor becomes noticeable. That said, it will only impact your gaming experience in the most demanding titles and at the highest settings after a certain period of time.
Device
Best Loop
Lowest Loop
Stability
Vivo X200 FE
4,511
2,633
58.4%
POCO F7 Ultra
5,981
4,141
69%
Google Pixel 9 Pro
2,573
2,051
79,7%
Antutu:
We also put the handset to the test in the very popular Antutu benchmark.
Device
Score
Vivo X200 FE
1,958,355
POCO F7 Ultra
2,533,644
Google Pixel 9 Pro
1,148,512
Vivo X200 FE Review: thermals
Regarding thermals during benchmarks, the results were quite acceptable for a powerful compact phone. Below you can see the maximum temperature the device reached during each test.
Benchmark
Temperature
Geekbench
45,3 °C/113.54 °F
3D Mark Extreme Stress Test
48 °C/118.4 °F
Antutu
41,6 °C/106,9 °F
We also tested the Vivo X200 FE’s thermals during 4K/60fps video recording, the most demanding recording setting available.
Device
5 minutes
10 minutes
Vivo X200 FE
34.83 °C/94,7 °F
37.36 °C/99,26 °F
POCO F7 Ultra
34.66 °C/ 94,4 °F
35.16 °C/95,3 °F
Google Pixel 9 Pro
35 °C/95 °F
37.27 °C/99,1 °F
While the storage and USB port choices are a bit underwhelming, the core performance delivered by the Dimensity 9300+, the LPDDR5X RAM, and the 12-core Immortalis-G720 GPU is really good.
Vivo X200 FE Review: Battery Life and Charging
One of the most surprising and impressive aspects of the Vivo X200 FE is its battery. Despite its slim and compact form factor, the phone is powered by a massive 6,500mAh silicon-anode cell. This is a capacity you would typically find in a much larger, more expensive device, and it is one of the biggest batteries available in a smartphone today.
This massive battery delivers exceptional endurance. In our tests, the phone comfortably lasted a full day and a half with moderate to heavy usage, and even the most demanding users should be able to get through a full day with charge to spare. More specifically, we are talking about easily achieving 10+ hours of on-screen time if you use Wi-Fi most of the day or around 8:30+ hours with heavy use of mobile data.
Charging the phone is equally impressive, thanks to 90W fast charging support. With a compatible charger, you can fully charge the phone from 20 to 100% in just around 45 minutes, according to the company. In our tests, the phone charged from 1% to 100% in just over 55 minutes. That said, the device doesn’t include a charger in the box in Europe, so that’s something you should check. However, the handset supports both USB-PD and PPS charging protocols, so you can exploit its charging capabilities with non-proprietary adapters. I also tested it with a third-party 65W USB-PD charging brick, and it worked perfectly.
Below you can find the results of the Vivo X200 FE in our battery endurance test compared to other devices.
Device
Battery life
Charging
Vivo X200 FE
23:57:17
0:55:17
POCO F7 Ultra
21:30:12
0:28:20
Google Pixel 9 Pro
21:54:40
1:18:30
One of the advantages of these huge batteries is that you can limit their charge to extend their lifespan. Since you don’t need 100% capacity for your daily use, you can charge it up to 90%, for example. In fact, Funtouch 15 offers an option that allows you to do just that on this device.
Vivo X200 FE Review: Software
The Vivo X200 FE comes out of the box running Funtouch 15, which is based on Android 15. Vivo promises four years of Android updates, so it should receive even Android 19 in the future. This particular model is set to get monthly security updates as well. During our tests, the phone received four updates to improve camera quality and add a security patch. The device is set to get Android 16 in November along with the other, more expensive Vivo X200 models, by the way.
The software experience is a mixed bag of clean design and useful features. At first glance, the interface looks quite streamlined and practical.
However, looking at the colorful “Material” design language of the Pixel phones, the countless customization possibilities of One UI, or even riskier bets like Apple’s Liquid Glass, Vivo’s UI may be starting to feel a little “outdated.” On the good side, the OS is as stable as it can be, offering a well-optimized, smooth/snappy experience. Gone are those times when custom skins from Chinese Android brands negatively impacted performance or introduced more problems than solutions.
The software also offers some AI features that are actually useful. There’s an AI writing assistant integrated into the Notes app, a live call translation feature, and an AI Transcript Assist that can summarize spoken conversations. Vivo also includes its DocMaster tool, which simplifies file conversion and editing. You’ll also find Google’s Gemini integration, bringing features like Circle to Search and on-screen content translation.
Vivo integrates its own Gallery app, which, as you might imagine, also offers AI-powered features. There’s an “AI Photo Enhance” option that restores—or boosts—the quality of your photos. However, I must say that, at least currently, the result is a mixed bag. Often, it helps improve the photo, but in other cases, the AI processing leaves notably artificial results—especially in portraits. On the other hand, the AI-powered eraser works quite well and even lets you remove unwanted reflections from glass in pictures. Vivo’s Gallery app also offers an option to quickly generate PDF files with the images you want.
While the OS is pretty good, there are a few things here and there that could be better. Vivo includes its widget section within the app drawer, which can be a bit disruptive for users expecting a clean app list, for instance. Customization fans will also find their options somewhat limited. For starters, the launcher doesn’t support third-party icon packs, which is a bummer.
There’s also no option to remove the bottom app dock, leaving a large, empty space between the dock icons and the rest of the home screen. While you can solve these problems by downloading a launcher, it would be great to have these options natively. Hopefully, Vivo can address these couple of things in the upcoming updates.
Either way, the OS still supports Android’s theming feature. So, you can apply a uniform color tone to most of your app icons and key UI items. You can also change the icon shape (square, circular, or “squircle”). Sadly, there are apps whose icons don’t support the theme feature, which is a bummer if those apps include some of your favorites. There is also an option to hide the name labels of the app icons on your home screen for an even more minimalist look.
If privacy options are important to you, Funtouch 15 will likely satisfy you. You can encrypt access to your apps using a PIN or biometrics. If you prefer, there’s also an option to directly hide the app from the drawer and home screen. You can also check when apps have accessed your location, camera, and microphone in chronological order.
Vivo X200 FE Review: Camera
The Vivo X200 FE is a camera-focused phone, which its rear bump makes clear. You won’t find huge 1-inch sensors here, but the overall package makes for a remarkable content creation experience. There are three sensors, the main one being a 50MP Sony IMX921 with an f/1.88 aperture and a 1/1.56″ size. It’s not the most powerful sensor available out there, but it’s capable of delivering really good results full of detail.
However, you might be even more interested in the 50MP periscope Sony IMX882 sensor with support for 3x optical zoom. This is almost the same periscope lens as the vanilla Vivo X200, with the difference that the company opted for an M-style prism on the FE model. What’s the difference? Well, this format allows for a slimmer phone design, but it also means losing the lens’s macro capabilities. That’s right, you won’t find a dedicated “Macro” mode on this phone. So, keep that in mind if it’s important to you.
Both lenses boast OIS and ZEISS optics, which, in theory, should improve light transmission and reduce the lens flare effect. That said, both the main and telephoto sensors offer excellent performance. Special mention to the almost-instant shutter speed, something that even some premium flagship phones struggle to achieve.
Main camera samples:
Starting with the main lens, the results are generally good in all lighting conditions. Photos are detailed and vivid, without the dreaded “washed-out textures” effect that other brands suffer from due to overly aggressive image processing. HDR management is another strong point of the Vivo X200 FE, showing a good balance of lights and shadows.
When night falls, the main sensor continues to perform quite competently. However, at this point it becomes more noticeable that we’re not dealing with a proper flagship. You’ll primarily notice significantly worse light control, although the level of detail is still acceptable—there is no “oil paint” effect typical of mid-rangers. Just be careful in scenes with many artificial light sources.
3x telephoto samples:
Regarding the periscope sensor, it offers excellent image quality. The best thing is that, unlike some other similar solutions, there’s no “foggy effect” in the photo. Vivo has been offering some of the best camera phones available for years, so they have a lot of experience with image processing, and you’ll notice that here. The camera app offers four preset zoom levels: 0.6x, 1x, 2x, 3x, and 10x. However, if you long-press the zoom selector, you can use a carousel to fine-tune the zoom levels up to 100x. Although, as you might imagine, the images at the maximum digital zoom level will be barely usable in most cases.
Below you’ll find samples taken with the 3x telephoto periscope lens.
If you are interested in even higher zoom levels, 10x zoom results are better or worse depending on the scene. There are cases where the “AI reconstruction” is more evident than in others. In my experience, the device is capable of delivering “almost optical” quality up to 5x zoom. Beyond that, the AI’s participation in photo reconstruction will be much more evident.
Regarding nighttime performance, the 3x telephoto sensor continues to perform quite well, similar to the main camera. Texture details aren’t blurred in the shadows, which is great. It may easily be one of the best 3x telephoto lenses available out there, and it’s nice to have it in a handset that doesn’t cost as much as a premium flagship.
Ultra-wide samples:
For the ultra-wide lens, there’s nothing to write home about here. The handset has an 8MP lens that’s quite out of place with the rest of the camera package. These sensors are more typical of affordable phones, and we would have liked to see something better on this device. The best we can say about the Vivo X200 FE’s ultra-wide camera is that it’s simply “usable.” As expected, it performs just acceptable in ideal lighting conditions, but don’t expect a level of detail similar to that of the other sensors. Still, Vivo’s decent image processing helps improve things a bit.
In low-light situations, the ultra-wide sensor is barely usable. Light control is quite poor, and details become blurred easily. These are the situations when it’s most noticeable that we’re talking about a low-end camera. A 12MP sensor at least would have been much more suitable for this phone.
By the way, the phone offers a “Supermoon” mode:
Regarding Vivo’s camera app, it offers a ton of “styles.” There are the three main ones: Texture, Vivid, and Zeiss. The latter is the mode that promises the most realistic results, and it’s the one we used for camera testing. However, Vivo sets the “Vivid” mode by default, aware that most users prefer photos with punchier colors for social media.
There’s a set of other styles you can play with and experiment with to get the results you like best. There are even dedicated modes for “Food” and “Stage”—a mode designed for taking photos at concerts, taking advantage of the phone’s zoom capabilities. You can also enable a “Smart Focus” setting that will automatically track subjects. The camera app is full of modes and options that photography fans will appreciate.
As an interesting fact, the phone’s flash is not monotone. It can switch between different levels of cool and warm. You can adjust the tone manually or let the phone do it automatically based on the scene. Vivo calls this “Aura Light,” whose intensity is also adjustable. There are even a pair of discreetly integrated front-facing flashlights for selfies.
Should You Buy the Vivo X200 FE?
The Vivo X200 FE is one of those great phones that, unfortunately, is not available in the US market. However, it was launched for €799 in EU countries and from ₹51,990 in India. At this point you could probably get it for less. This phone is a serious competitor to other compact devices like the OnePlus 13s and the Google Pixel 10 in its range. It’s an easy recommendation for anyone in the market for a compact phone that doesn’t compromise on the core experience.
You should buy the Vivo X200 FE if:
You want one of the best camera experiences available in a sub-flagship phone.
You are looking for an affordable pseudo-flagship device that is not primarily focused on performance, cutting costs in other aspects.
You want a phone whose battery will easily last more than a day even with intensive use.
You should not buy the Vivo X200 FE if:
The quality of the ultra-wide camera is really important to you.
Many AI models like OpenAI’s ChatGPT can perform research for users. But OpenAI thinks that’s not good enough. In fact, OpenAI believes that by 2028, it will have developed a “legitimate AI researcher.”
OpenAI developing AI researcher
So as not to confuse you, by “AI researcher,” OpenAI is referring to an AI that can perform research. Not a human researcher that does research on AI. According to the company’s CEO, Sam Altman, OpenAI’s deep learning systems are advancing at such a rapid pace that the company is tracking towards achieving an intern-level research assistant by 2026. Then by 2028, it would have a “legitimate AI researcher.”
If that is true, it would be impressive. Like we said, AI models like ChatGPT have the ability to perform deep research for users. This means that instead of a cursory search, it dives deeper into the web to find information on the things you want. However, does it perform as well as a human? That’s debatable.
AI research versus human research
There’s no doubt that Deep Research will save humans a lot of time. Imagine you’re trying to write a thesis for your final semester at university. Normally, you’d have to go to the library and search for books related to your subject. Then within those books, you’d have to find information that’s relevant. You could do it online, but it’s also the same thing. You’d have to sift through dozens, if not hundreds of websites, to find information to support your paper.
With Deep Research, all of that information can be found and collated in minutes. This frees you up time on researching and more time writing. However, speed is the only thing it excels at.
When we do our own research, we learn things along the way. We employ critical thinking and we understand the context of the information. AI, however, does not. It’s great at summarizing information, but because it lacks the nuances of human thinking, the information it finds might not be as good as a human researcher doing the same thing.
Right now, tools like Deep Research are more like a jumping off point. It helps you find information and sources quickly, but then you’ll have to synthesize that information yourself. However, if OpenAI is capable of achieving human-level research in the next few years, it will be a whole different ball game.
By all accounts, AT&T is having a decent year. According to the company’s latest financials, it managed to gain around 405,000 new postpaid customers during Q3 2025. However, that is just one part of the story. While AT&T managed to pull in quite a sizable number of new customers, it might have a retention problem.
AT&T might have a problem with customers staying
According to a report from The Street, it discovered in the financial report that AT&T’s churn rate increased by 14 basis points year-over-year. This means that while AT&T might be bringing in new customers each quarter, it has a problem keeping existing ones.
And whose fault is this? Could it be that the marketing by Verizon and T-Mobile are too good? Turns out, it might actually be AT&T’s own doing. The carrier had recently made a decision to reduce the monthly discount for customers who opted for autopay and paperless billing. This means that customers who did opt into these programs suddenly saw their discounts gone.
For some, it might have been these discounts that kept them on AT&T’s network. Now that those discounts are no more, these customers also have no reason to stick around. Also, as The Street points out, the carrier faced some controversy with billing. AT&T, like all other carriers, is trying to lure customers to their network. However, some customers discovered higher-than-expected monthly bills after the fact.
AT&T insists that it’s normal
While the increased churn rate is alarming, AT&T doesn’t think so. In fact, during the earnings call, AT&T Chief Financial Officer Pascal Desroches said this follows “seasonable patterns.”
According to Desroches, “This reflects increased marketplace activity and, to a lesser degree, an increase in the portion of our customer base reaching the end of device financing periods, which normalized as we exited the quarter. Based on this operating environment, we continue to plan for postpaid phone churn and upgrades to follow seasonal patterns in the fourth quarter, when we typically see more switching and upgrade activity due to new device launches and the holiday season.”
AT&T CEO John Stankey also notes that rival carriers have been pretty aggressive with their own luring tactics. “It’s been competitive. It continues to be competitive. There are shifts in tactics all the time that occur in this market, and we’re in a cycle right now that, because of the maturity level, tactics have shifted.”
Despite the Apple Watch pretty much only working with iOS devices, Apple’s wearable commands a pretty sizable chunk of the market. This is thanks to the features of the smartwatch that legitimately make it useful. It is also understandable why Apple wasn’t too thrilled when trade secrets surrounding the Apple Watch were leaked to Oppo.
Apple says Oppo engineer stole trade secrets
Now, Apple employs hundreds, if not thousands of employees, who work on a variety of products at the company. Recently, it seems that Oppo had recruited a former Apple Watch engineer, Chen Shi, who reportedly shared trade secrets about the Apple Watch with the Chinese company.
Apple discovered this leak when Shi gave a presentation on Apple sensor technology. This allowed Oppo to gain further insight into the development of the smartwatch. In fact, Shi did not even shy away from the fact that this information came from inside Apple. Oppo marketed the internal talk with the title “Apple’s Sensor Hardware R&D Philosophy and Methodology.” A tagline for the meeting even reads, “Are you curious about how Apple’s sensors are developed?”
Apple is saying that Shi’s presentations include slides that were taken directly from the company. The complaint also accuses Oppo of encouraging Shi to share trade secret information.
Oppo’s response
Naturally, Oppo is denying that there was any theft of trade secrets. Apple has asked the courts for injunctive relief to stop Shi from sharing further information. However, Oppo says that it conducted its own comprehensive search of the systems Shi had access to. The company claims that there is “no indication that Oppo received any Apple trade secret information.”
It also does not believe that injunctive relief is justified. “There is consequently no basis for Apple to request preliminary injunctive relief, and it is not entitled to any such relief. OPPO has already looked for Apple’s ‘trade secrets’ and ‘confidential information’ and found nothing that it might disclose, retain, use or be obligated to return.”
It remains to be seen how this will play out. However, if Apple’s evidence is as damning as they claim, it might not look good for Oppo or Shi.
Foldable smartphones have managed to evolve quite a bit over the last 5 or so years. Samsung has finally started catching up to the competition, and we have some really great offerings on the market at the moment. If you’re in the market for one such phone, picking out the very best foldable smartphone for your needs is crucial. Well, this list may help you, as it’s a buying guide, of sorts. Do note that the list is US-centric, so you won’t find devices that cannot be purchased in the States.
With that being said, quite a few compelling foldable smartphones are available in the States. You can take your pick between book-style ones and flip phone ones, there’s something for everyone. If you’re aiming for the very best, we have you covered. If you’re on a budget, that’s not a problem either, even though foldable phones are not as affordable as regular ones, of course. Either way, let’s delve into it, and hopefully help you choose your next or first foldable smartphone. These are some of the best Android phones in general, by the way.
Best Foldable Smartphone
There are several excellent foldable phones out in the market at the moment. We’ve decided to especially highlight the Galaxy Z Fold 7 from Samsung, though. Samsung made a huge leap with this phone compared to the Galaxy Z Fold 6, and it’s finally extremely competitive. This is the phone to get if you’re looking for a proper foldable phone that can become a tablet when you need it to.
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7
Rating
starstarstarstarstar_empty
$1,999
The Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 is our pick for the best foldable smartphone in general. This is a larger foldable, of course, but it’s the best pick for those of you who live in the US, easily. It is a major improvement over the Galaxy Z Fold 6, and it can easily compete with basically every foldable smartphone in the market.
The Galaxy Z Fold 6 is much thinner and lighter than its predecessor, while it’s also plenty powerful at the same time. It is only 8.9mm thick when folded, and weighs 215 grams. needless to say that’s a huge improvement over 12.1mm of the Fold 6, and its 239 grams of weight.
The Galaxy Z Fold 7 is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite processor, while it also packs in 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. A 4,400mAh battery is included here, while the device does support wired and wireless charging. The charging is not blazing fast, though, but it does the trick. You’ll also find two 120Hz displays on the device, both of which are great, actually. Regardless if you need a phone or a tablet, this phone does the trick.
Pros
Mindblowingly thin and light
Bigger, Brighter Displays
Better cameras
Class-leading performance
Cons
Another price increase, now $1,999
Battery capacity and battery life need improvement
S Pen Support removed
Insane camera bump
What makes the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 special? Well, the first thing that always comes to mind when we think of this phone are the design improvements. The Galaxy Z Fold 7 weighs only 215 grams and is only 8.9mm thick when folded. That’s a major improvement over 239 grams and 12.1mm of the Galaxy Z Fold 6. The Fold 6 felt like it was several generations behind the competition, design-wise, that’s not longer the case, not at all. We’d even argue it’s worth upgrading from the Galaxy Z Fold 6 for this reason alone.
Other than that, this phone does offer a really good balance. It has two outstanding 120Hz displays, while it also packs in more than enough power to last your for years. The Snapdragon 8 Elite is here, along with plenty of RAM and storage. The device is also IP48 certified, which is always good to see, especially on a foldable. Granted, its camera performance and battery life could be better, but it’s still a major improvement over its predecessor, and it can compete with basically any foldable out there.
Inner Display: 8″ Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X, 120Hz
Cover Display: 6.5″ Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X, 120Hz
Brightness: 2,600 nits peak (inner and cover display)
Colors: Blue Shadow, Silver Shadow, Jet Black, Mint
Android Version: Android 16 (One UI 8)
Software Support: 7 years of major Android updates
AI Software: Gemini, Bixby, Circle to Search, Galaxy AI
Camera Score: N/A
Camera features: LED flash, Auto-HDR, 8K recording at 30fps, 4K recording at 60fps, HDR10+ recording, 10-bit HDR recording, OIS
Battery life Score: 20 hours and 2 minutes
Charging time: 1 hour and 16 minutes
Review
star
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 Ultimate Review: Thinner, Faster, More Expensive
Since Unpacked, you’ve likely heard several times that “Samsung has finally caught up to the Chinese”. And what that means…
by Alexander Maxham
Read Full Review
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from
Best Small Foldable Smartphone
If book-style foldables are not really your thing, and you prefer flip phone foldables, there are several great options on the market. The Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 is one of them, and arguably the very best flip phone that you can buy on the market at the moment. It’s a completely different form factor compared to book-style foldables.
Motorola Razr Ultra 2025
Rating
starstarstarstarstar
$1,299.99
Not everyone likes book-style foldables. Some of you just want a regular phone that folds in half basically. That was you get a regular phone, and a tiny phone that you can use. Well, in our opinion, the very best such device on the market, at the moment, is the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. This is an excellent phone in every way, basically, and unlike the Galaxy Z Flip 7, it allows you to use that cover display to its full potential out of the box. You don’t have to jump through hoops to do it.
The Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 comes with a rather large cover display, a 4-inch panel. That is large in cover display numbers, and that panel is also really good. It’s an OLED display that has a 165Hz refresh rate, just like the main panel on the phone. It also gets quite bright. The main display is great, too, and it gets even brighter than this one at 4,500 nits of peak brightness.
The Snapdragon 8 Elite will make sure the phone runs properly, along with 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. Motorola really didn’t skimp out on what matters. A 4,700mAh battery is also included, along with fast wired and wireless charging. Even the camera performance this phone offers is not bad at all, especially with the main camera. Motorola’s processing here is also quite good.
Pros
Excellent battery life
One of the fastest charging smartphones in the US
Unique materials and colors make the Razr Ultra really pop
Motorola is still unmatched with its cover display, it’s insanely helpful
The crease is mostly gone
Finally, true flagship performance out of the Razr Ultra
Cons
The Razr is still a bit too tall. It takes some getting used too.
New AI button is not needed
Don’t expect many software updates, unfortunately
The design and the cover display are the things we think of first when it comes to the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. The phone looks great, it has a large cover display, and silicon polymer back. That makes it more grippy than its competitors, and it’s actually a pleasure to hold, whether it’s unfolded or not. Motorola did a fantastic job in the design department. The phone is also not too heavy, not at all, it weighs 199 grams.
The cover display is also worth highlighting. It’s not only quite large for what it is, but it supports a 165Hz refresh rate, and it allows you to use all the same apps as on the main display… out of the box. It also gets very bright when you need it to. The main display is great too, while the phone will also charge very fast when you need it to, thanks to 65W wired charging. Wireless charging is also supported, though
Display: 7″ & 4″ LTPO AMOLED 165Hz
Brightness: 4,500 nits / 3,000 nits peak
Protection: Gorilla Glass Ceramic (cover)
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
RAM and Storage: 16GB RAM ; 512GB/1TB Storage
Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.8, 50MP ultrawide at f/2.0
Colors: Pantone: Rio Red, Scarab, Mountain Trail, Cabaret
Android Version: Android 15
Software Support: 3 years of major Android updates
AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search
Camera Score: N/A
Camera features: Pantone Validated Color and Skin Tones
Battery life Score: N/A
Charging time: N/A
Review
Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 Ultimate Review: Great Cameras With PANTONE-Validated Precision
Since Motorola first introduced its flip phone in 2019 with the nostalgic “Razr” name, we’ve been waiting for a truly…
by Alexander Maxham
Read Full Review
Buy from Motorola
Buy from
Second-Best Small Foldable Smartphone
We had a hard time deciding between the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 and the Galaxy Z Flip 7 for the best small foldable, so we decided to include both of them on the list. They’re basically standing side-by-side on the throne, even though we gave a small advantage to the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is an excellent flip phone.
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7
$1,099.99
The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 was neck-to-neck with the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 for the best small foldable. We had to make a choice, though. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is still a great option, though, of course. It may actually suit a lot people better than the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 simply from the software standpoint, if you’re used to using Samsung’s One UI skin.
The Galaxy Z Flip 7 also has a very nice and large cover display. It fact, it’s even slightly larger than the one on the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. Both displays on the phone offer a 120Hz refresh rate, and both of them are more than bright enough. The Exynos 2500 fuels the phone, while the device comes with 12GB of RAM.
This smartphone ships with Android 16 out of the box, and comes with a huge software support promise. Samsung is promising 7 years of major Android OS upgrades for the device. A 4,300mAh battery is also a part of the package, while the phone also supports both wired and wireless charging. You’ll find a very fast and reliable fingerprint scanner on the right-hand side of the phone. All in all, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 does have a lot to offer, and it’s also not heavy at all, quite the contrary.
Pros
Solid, thin design
Larger foldable display
Good performance
Large, and nice cover display
Outstanding software support
Cons
Slow charging
Cameras could be better
The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 is one of the best-looking flip phones out there, if not the best-looking one. The bezels around its cover display are immensely thin, as Samsung managed to spread out that display to the max. The phone has two really good displays, and you can make that cover display serve you as well as the main one with some slight tweaking. The Exynos 2500 may not have been as great of a choice as the Snapdragon 8 Elite for this phone, but the chip does perform well, you don’t really have to worry about performance here.
The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is also IP48 certified, which is another positive for the phone. It will give you some piece of mind, that’s for sure. The battery life may not be its strength, but the device does support wired, wireless, and reverse wireless charging. The charging may not be blazing fast, but at least that battery capacity is not huge, so it’ll charge faster than you may think. While its ultrawide camera is kind of forgettable, the performance of the main unit is not bad at all.
Display: 6.9” (main) & 4.1” (cover) AMOLED 120Hz
Brightness: 2,600 nits peak
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2 (cover display)
Processor: Samsung Exynos 2500
RAM and Storage: 12GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB Storage
Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.57, 12MP ultrawide at f/2.2
Software Support: 7 years of major Android updates
AI Software: Gemini, Bixby, Circle to Search, Galaxy AI
Camera Score: N/A
Camera features: HDR, panorama, 4K at 60 FPS
Battery life Score: N/A
Buyers Guide
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7: Ultimate Buyers Guide – October 2025
The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 was announced by the company on July 9. The event took place in New…
by Kristijan Lucic
Read Full Buyers Guide
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from
Best Budget Foldable Smartphone
Yes, budget foldable smartphones are a thing these days. Back in the day, that was certainly not the case. Now, you can get a foldable at a rather reasonable price, a current-gen foldable. The Motorola Razr 2025 is our pick for this category. This is also a flip phone, but it’s a rather compelling flip phone at $549.
Motorola Razr 2025
$549
If you really, really want a foldable, but you’re on a budget, the Motorola Razr 2025 is a great option. This smartphone costs only $549, which is actually quite affordable for a foldable smartphone. The Motorola Razr 2025 is also no slouch. Yes, it is inferior to the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025, obviously, but it’s still a very good smartphone and worth this price tag, that’s for sure.
The Motorola Razr does offer a really nice design. Even though it doesn’t have as thin cover display bezels as the ‘Ultra’ model, and has a smaller display, it still looks very appealing. Its main display is a very nice 120Hz panel, while the cover display has a 90Hz refresh rate. The phone itself is fueled by the MediaTek Dimensity 7400X, which does a fine job. Don’t expect ‘Ultra’ performance, but it does the trick.
Both wired and wireless charging are supported here, too, while the phone is IP48 certified for water and dust resistance. There is also a solid 50-megapixel main camera included. It’s not great, but it’s not bad either, it does the trick. It’s far better than the ultrawide camera that is included here. Motorola had to cut corners somewhere. Its side-facing fingerprint scanner is fast and reliable.
Pros
Nice-looking phone
Not flagship, but good performance
Very good cover display
Good photo processing
Cons
Plenty of bloatware
Software update longevity
The price tag is something that we always think of first when the Motorola Razr 2025 conversation comes knocking. $549 is a very appealing price tag for a foldable smartphone, especially one as solid as the Razr 2025. If you can catch a discount, then it’s an even better deal, of course. This phone offers a really good design and build quality, and it’s one of the grippiest foldable smartphones on the market. Its eco leather backplate has a lot to do with that, that’s for sure.
The device may not have the best displays on the market, but both panels on the device are really, really good. The fact you can use that cover display for basically anything, same as the main panel, is a huge bonus. That’s not something a lot of flip phones can say for themselves. Despite the fact it’s technically a budget device, this phone supports both wired and wireless charging, and has a very fast and reliable fingerprint scanner on its right side.
Display: 6.9″ & 3.6″ Foldable LTPO AMOLED 120Hz
Brightness: 3,000 nits / 1,700 nits peak
Protection: Gorilla Glass Victus (cover)
Processor: MediaTek Dimensity 7400X
RAM and Storage: 8GB RAM ; 256GB Storage
Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.7, 13MP ultrawide at f/2.2
Battery: 4,500mAh
Charging: 30W wired, 15W wireless
Colors: Pantone: Gibraltar Sea, Spring Bud, Lightest Sky, Parfait Pink
Android Version: Android 15
Software Support: N/A
AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search
Camera Score: N/A
Camera features: 4K at 30 fps, gyro-EIS
Battery life Score: N/A
Charging time: 55 minutes
Buyers Guide
Motorola Razr 2025: Your Ultimate Guide To Motorola's 2025 Flip Phones – October 2025
Motorola’s 2025 Razr lineup is here, and its actually bigger than ever before. In more ways than one. First of…
by Alexander Maxham
Read Full Buyers Guide
Buy from Motorola
Buy from
Best Foldable Smartphone for Android Purists
If you simply love Google‘s iteration of Android and don’t want third-party software on top of it, there’s a foldable out there for you, too. We’re talking about the Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold, of course. This is not the best foldable on the market, as it does have several notable drawbacks compared to the competition, but it’s still a very good Pixel smartphone, and it may be ideal for some people.
Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold
Rating
starstarstarstarstar_emptystar
$1,699
The Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold is Google’s best foldable yet, and the only one announced in 2025. This handset is different than most of the book-style competitors. It is thicker and heavier than the Galaxy Z Fold 7, OPPO Find N5, and other competitors in the space. However, it’s not too thick nor too heavy, at least in our opinion. So if you don’t mind the the added thickness and heft, this phone is definitely worth considering.
The phone looks really nice, Google did a fine job in the design department. Google also made some improvements over the Pixel 9 Pro Fold in the design department. The phone has two very compelling 120Hz displays, an 8-inch main panel, and a 6.4-inch cover display. The Google Tensor G5 fuels the device, the latest and greatest chip from the company. Some of the competitors are still more powerful, but this chip is more than enough for this phone. Everything works really, really well.
Google managed to stuff a 5,015mAh battery on the inside of this phone. It could be larger if Google used a silicon-carbon pack, but this is not bad. The Pixel 10 Pro Fold supports 30W wired and 15W wireless charging, while it also supports reverse wired charging. The latest version of Android is included here, while Google promised outstanding software support for the device. Stereo speakers are included as well, and much more.
Pros
Good cameras, not the best on a foldable however
Bright, readable displays
AI features are top-notch
Great build quality
First foldable with IP68 rating
Good battery life for a foldable
Cons
Heavier and thicker than the competition
Still Expensive
No major camera upgrades
The Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold is a book-style foldable, but it’s notably heavier and thicker than most of the competitors. Some of you may actually like that, and consider that a positive. You’re probably in the minority, though. Still, the Pixel 10 Pro Fold feels so good to hold and use. It’s a quality piece of hardware, at least it feels like it.
A major positive for this phone is its IP68 certification. It is the first foldable phone, to our knowledge, to offer such certification. That puts it on the same level as regular smartphones when it comes to water and dust resistance. Needless to say, quite a few of you will appreciate this.
Google also made a huge software update promise here. The Pixel 10 Pro Fold will be getting Android OS updates for the next 7 years. There’s a higher chance that the phone will become obsolete or broke down before you lose software support for it, which is saying a lot.
Display: 8″ & 6.4″ Foldable LTPO OLED 120Hz
Brightness: 3,000 nits peak
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2 (cover)
Processor: Google Tensor G5
RAM and Storage: 16GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB/1TB Storage
Cameras: 48MP primary camera at f/1.7, 10.5MP ultrawide at f/2.2, 10.8 telephoto at f/3.1
Battery: 5,015mAh
Charging: 30W wired, 15W wireless (Qi2)
Colors: Moonstone, Jade
Android Version: Android 16
Software Support: 7 years of major Android OS updates
AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search
Camera Score: N/A
Camera features: 4K at 60 fps, gyro-EIS, 10-bit HDR
Battery life Score: 16 hours and 49 minutes
Charging time: 1 hour and 35 minutes
Review
Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold Review: The AI-Powered Foldable That Finally Gets It Right (Mostly)
Despite its name, this is only the third-generation foldable for Google. Having started with the Pixel Fold back in 2023,…
OnePlus has now announced when the OnePlus 15 will launch in the US. That date is November 13, which was previously leaked, but now we know the official date. That is just a few weeks after the Chinese launch event, which was this past Monday. Shortening the gap quite a bit from the China to Global launch – OPPO recently did the same thing with the Find X9 series.
OnePlus is also releasing a few more details about the OnePlus 15. Including the new DetailMax Engine, which powers the cameras here. OnePlus has decided to go with its DetailMax Engine here instead of continuing with Hasselblad – OPPO has the exclusive on Hasselblad now, apparently.
The company notes that its “Ultra-Clear 26MP mode combines data from the multi-frame 12MP shots with a single 50MP high-resolution frame, producing a final 26MP photo with improved clarity, especially regarding complex textures such as fur, foliage, and fabrics, all in a practical file size ideal for sharing.” That’s just one of the new camera features that OnePlus is debuting this year.
OnePlus says to expect full pricing, specs, and availability announced on November 13 at its global launch event. You can watch on its YouTube channel.
The earliest OnePlus launch event yet
This will mark the earliest launch event for OnePlus yet. Seeing as we had the OnePlus 13 launch in January, and now just 10 months later, the OnePlus 15 is on its way.
While we don’t yet know pricing, we do believe it’ll be priced pretty similarly to the OnePlus 13, which started at $899. OnePlus 15 is shaping up to be a pretty big change for the company, not only in its design philosophy but also in things like the cameras. There do seem to be some downgrades here, even in hardware. But we’ll have to wait til November 13 to know for sure.
This time around, we’re comparing Samsung’s latest “clamshell-like” foldable phone with an Apple classic. The new Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 and the Apple iPhone 15 Pro will go head-to-head. Both the very different form factor of Samsung’s phone and the age (launched in 2023) of the still-powerful iPhone 15 Pro make the clash even more interesting.
Here, we’ll break down exactly what both devices bring to the table. We’ll start with the raw technical specs before moving into the key areas that matter most: design, display, performance, battery life, cameras, and audio output. Let’s jump straight into the full comparison between these two handsets.
Black Titanium, White Titanium, Blue Titanium, Natural Titanium
View Specifications
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Design
Let’s begin by examining the hardware materials. The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 adopts a sleek construction with a combination of glass and aluminum. Its competitor, the iPhone 15 Pro, achieves a more premium feel by using durable aerospace-grade titanium, complemented by glass. Both manufacturers prioritize a minimalist look with smooth, gently rounded corners. However, the main surfaces—covering the frame, front, and back panels—maintain a largely flat plane. On the front of the Z Flip 7, the inner folding screen features a centered, small hole-punch cutout for the camera. In contrast, the iPhone 15 Pro shows its already classic pill-shaped cutout. In both cases, you will find good optimization work in terms of bezels, being small and symmetrical.
When we look at control placement, the phones handle buttons quite differently. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 has all of its controls neatly along the right side, stacking the volume keys and the power/lock button there. The power button serves a dual function, integrating a fingerprint scanner. The iPhone 15 Pro divides its controls: the power/lock key is on the right edge, but the left side is home to the volume controls, just below the customizable Action Key.
Flipping the devices over reveals the most significant visual contrast. The Galaxy Z Flip 7’s top half rear panel integrates a substantial secondary display. Two horizontal cameras are set cleanly into a corner of this large cover screen. The iPhone 15 Pro uses a more traditional form factor. Apple’s device presents a triple-camera system housed within Apple’s familiar raised, square camera island, located in the top-left corner.
Finally, the physical dimensions show clear variation. When unfolded, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 stands noticeably taller than its rival, though it maintains a narrower and slimmer overall profile. Despite their different forms, their weights are almost identical: the Galaxy Z Flip 7 weighs 188 grams, while the iPhone 15 Pro is just one gram lighter at 187 grams. For water and dust resistance, the Z Flip 7 carries an IP48 certification. The iPhone 15 Pro, however, offers the superior protection of an IP68 rating. Regardless of their distinct high-quality builds, both of these flagship devices tend to feel quite slippery in the hand.
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Display
Unfolding the device reveals the Galaxy Z Flip 7’s notably larger main screen, which extends to 6.9 inches. Samsung built this panel as a Foldable Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X. Media consumption is excellent thanks to a smooth 120Hz adaptive refresh rate and HDR10+ support. Its brightness capability is high, achieving a peak of 2,600 nits. The display efficiently maximizes its available area, reaching an approximate 88% screen-to-body ratio. It presents visuals at a sharp 2520 x 1080 resolution, utilizing a tall 21:9 aspect ratio. Furthermore, the phone includes a secondary 4.1-inch cover display. This smaller unit is a Super AMOLED panel that maintains a fixed 120Hz refresh rate (not adaptive) and matches the main screen’s impressive 2,600 nits peak brightness. This exterior screen displays content at a 1048 x 948 resolution and is protected by a layer of Gorilla Glass Victus 2.
In contrast, the iPhone 15 Pro features a substantially smaller 6.1-inch screen. This display, an LTPO Super Retina XDR OLED panel, also supports an adaptive refresh rate capping at 120Hz. For superior media quality, Apple includes support for both HDR10 and Dolby Vision standards. While its screen remains very bright, its peak output is slightly lower than its competitor, maxing out at 2,000 nits. The usable screen area is strong, registering a screen-to-body ratio of about 88.2%, and the resolution for content output is 1179 x 2556. The iPhone 15 Pro utilizes a slightly wider 19.5:9 aspect ratio and incorporates Apple’s Ceramic Shield glass for surface protection.
Regarding the overall viewing experience, both devices deliver top-tier performance. You can expect incredibly sharp detail, remarkably vivid colors, and exceptional viewing angles even on the Galaxy Z Flip 7’s cover display. Touch response is instantaneous across the board. Crucially, every display reaches sufficient brightness levels for comfortable use outdoors, and their high refresh rates ensure fluid navigation and seamless motion. A notable improvement on the Galaxy Z Flip 7 is that the crease on its folding panel is significantly less noticeable compared to previous generations.
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Performance
Powering the Galaxy Z Flip 7 is Samsung’s self-developed Exynos 2500 processor. This chip employs an in-house 3nm manufacturing process and gets robust support from 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM. For storage, Samsung relies on the fast UFS 4.0 flash technology. Looking at the competition, the iPhone 15 Pro depends on the mighty Apple A17 Pro chip, which also benefits from a 3nm architecture, but courtesy of TSMC. This powerful processor pairs with 8GB of RAM and uses speedy NVMe flash storage. One key detail to remember is that neither of these flagship models gives users the option of expandable storage.
In day-to-day operation, both flagship devices possess more than enough capability to handle virtually any workload. Of course, this includes even the most resource-intensive applications. The Exynos 2500 is a newer chip, but the Apple A17 Pro definitely stands as a strong competitor. In fact, in benchmarks like Geekbench, Samsung’s SoC falls slightly behind in single-core performance. However, Samsung’s chipset shows dominance in multi-core tasks with up to 30% more performance.
Both chips also integrate powerful GPUs. This translates smoothly into mobile gaming. They easily manage demanding graphical software without encountering major issues, though extended heavy use will naturally cause them to warm up. Crucially, this generated heat does not cause their processing power to dip significantly. Neither phone suffers from performance-killing overheating, meaning they consistently maintain smooth operation even when running the most graphically advanced games available today.
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Battery
Peel back the layers, and you’ll find the Galaxy Z Flip 7 relies on a 4,300mAh battery. That is a notable contrast to the iPhone 15 Pro, which packs a smaller 3,274mAh cell. This size gap is noticeable, although the way Android and iOS manage this capacity differs noticeably—especially when it comes to multitasking capabilities and app background behavior—which allows Apple to get extra juice from smaller batteries. Fair enough, the Z Flip 7’s battery is still on the smaller side compared to many conventional, non-folding Android giants.
So, how do these numbers stack up in the real world? Both phones actually provide decent longevity. However, external tests show that the iPhone 15 Pro has the advantage, offering around 10-12% more battery life. This could differ a lot depending on how you use the Galaxy Z Flip 7, considering its particular form factor. Some might rely more on the cover display than others, for example. But, overall, these are the numbers assuming you always use the inner display (device unfolded for a fair comparison).
When it’s time to plug in and power up, both devices offer very comparable wired speeds. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 supports 25W wired charging, plus it handles 15W wireless and even 4.5W reverse wireless charging. The iPhone 15 Pro, on the other hand, supports up to 20W wired charging, backed up by 15W MagSafe wireless and 4.5W reverse wired charging. The time spent waiting for a full charge is almost identical: the Galaxy Z Flip 7 needs about an hour and a half to hit 100%, while the iPhone 15 Pro can take up to an hour and 40 minutes.
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Cameras
The Galaxy Z Flip 7 features camera hardware built around a dual-sensor arrangement located on the rear. This setup centers on a 50-megapixel primary camera (which uses a 1/1.57-inch sensor). It is assisted by a 12-megapixel ultrawide lens (equipped with a 1/3.2-inch sensor and offering a wide 123-degree field of view). Users often skip the internal selfie camera entirely when shooting portraits. Instead, they prefer to utilize these two high-quality rear sensors, a choice made easy by the phone’s large cover screen.
In contrast, the iPhone 15 Pro comes with a more complete triple-camera system. Its primary shooter is a robust 48-megapixel sensor (featuring a large 1/1.28-inch sensor size). Additionally, it includes a 12-megapixel ultrawide snapper (with a 1/2.55-inch sensor and a 120-degree field of view). The cherry on top is a 12-megapixel telephoto lens (1/3.5-inch sensor) capable of delivering 3x optical zoom.
When comparing the quality of the final images, both phones achieve very similar results. Apple’s color science makes pictures from the iPhone 15 Pro typically remain closer to real-life color and tone, and the phone consistently delivers reliable output across varied lighting. However, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 produces good camera results with plenty of detail and vibrant colors.
Both devices handle low-light conditions well when relying on their main cameras. That said, the ultrawide cameras on both models struggle more compared to their respective primary lenses. They exhibit a significant resolution gap in the ultrawide lens when compared to the main one (12MP versus 50MP or 48MP). Predictably, the iPhone 15 Pro easily takes the win in any telephoto comparison, given that the Galaxy Z Flip 7 completely lacks this camera.
Audio
Both the Galaxy Z Flip 7 and the iPhone 15 Pro include a stereo speaker setup. While the audio quality remains strong on both flagship phones, the speakers found on the iPhone 15 Pro achieve a higher maximum volume. This shows the importance Apple gives to making its iPhones attractive for enjoying multimedia content even when you don’t have earphones nearby.
However, neither smartphone features the traditional 3.5mm audio jack, a common omission among high-end modern devices. For those who prefer a wired connection, you must rely on the Type-C port that both phones offer for audio output. Shifting to wireless options, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 supports the newer Bluetooth 5.4 standard. In comparison, the iPhone 15 Pro has Bluetooth 5.3.
A major conflict is brewing in the Android ecosystem over the future of app distribution. Google is about to tighten the security check for installing external APKs on Android. However, the company recently assured users that sideloading—the ability to install apps from sources other than the Google Play Store—”isn’t going anywhere.” That said, the alternative app repository F-Droid has publicly challenged that statement, calling Google’s assurances about Android’s upcoming app sideloading verification rules “clear, concise, and false.”
F-Droid Says Google’s promise about Android app sideloading staying is false
The core of the dispute lies in Google’s new developer verification system. This policy requires every app developer worldwide to verify their identity using government documentation and link apps to a registered Google account. F-Droid argues that while this process might technically keep sideloading alive, it fundamentally strips away the freedom and openness of the process.
F-Droid warns that this new requirement effectively puts all independent app developers and alternative stores under Google’s unilateral control. If Google doesn’t approve an app, users won’t be able to install it, regardless of where they obtained the file.
As F-Droid puts it, consumers purchased Android devices believing they were an open computing platform where they could choose their software. Starting next year, an OS update could irrevocably block this right. This will leave users “at the mercy of their judgment over what software you are permitted to trust.”
A name problem and safety concerns
The F-Droid community also takes issue with the very term “sideloading.” They argue that installing software should simply be called “installing,” regardless of the source. They also state that the term “sideloading” was coined to imply the process is inherently risky or sinister.
Google claims the new policy is necessary to enhance security. The company cited an analysis that allegedly found “over 50 times more malware from internet-sideloaded sources than on apps available through Google Play.”
F-Droid counters this security argument by pointing to recent news of large-scale malware campaigns and malicious apps being removed from the Google Play Store itself. They argue that instead, Google should focus on improving its own safeguards.
What this means for users and creators
This policy applies to virtually every Android Certified device globally. We are talking about basically over 95% of the market outside of China. It affects everyone, even those who use competing marketplaces like the Samsung Galaxy Store.
For creators, the promise of Android’s “openness”—a key historical advantage over the iPhone ecosystem—is vanishing. Developers can no longer create and share an app directly with their community without first submitting it for Google’s approval.
F-Droid warns regulators that this system centralizes too much power. It could cede “digital sovereignty” to a single unaccountable corporation. The platform urges both consumers and developers to advocate for keeping the Android ecosystem open to maintain user choice and market competition.
It seems like Samsung is not sure whether it should kill off the Galaxy S26 Edge or not. As we are now seeing rumors that the device hasn’t been canceled, and might actually still launch next year. Alongside the Galaxy S26 and Galaxy S26 Ultra.
GalaxyClub has found that Samsung has started developing a new phone under the codename “More Slim” a few months ago. For those wondering, the Galaxy S25 Edge codename was “Slim”. So, potentially, the Galaxy S26 Edge would be even slimmer?
But the most interesting part here is that the device with the codename “More Slim” is not the device that was originally set to be the Galaxy S26 Edge. Development on this started long after the original device that was going to be the Galaxy S26 Edge, which was set to replace the Galaxy S26 Plus.
A bit confusing, but not surprising to see Samsung working on multiple devices here. When it comes to a new phone, companies are typically working on multiple prototypes before they get to a final one. However, with the Galaxy S26 series set to launch in January, Samsung should be getting very close to the final version.
Could Samsung launch the Galaxy S26 Edge later in the year, again?
Samsung might be looking to launch the Galaxy S26 Edge later in the year, similar to the Galaxy S25 Edge this year. How much later, is up for discussion however. I do think that launching it in May was not a good idea for Samsung, as it was just a couple of months after the Galaxy S25 series launched, and it was priced between the Plus and Ultra, while being a downgrade for both.
If Samsung were to launch the Galaxy S26 Edge in the Fall, potentially replacing the Galaxy S25 FE (or Galaxy S26 FE), that might be a better idea. But, it’s likely going to remain an experiment for Samsung next year, as the Galaxy S25 Edge and iPhone Air have both sold very poorly. Showing that consumers don’t want less battery for a thinner device.
Google has just added yet another interesting feature to Gboard app on Android, a new way to enter symbols. You can now flick keys to enter numbers and symbols, basically, which is exactly what this new feature is called.
Gboard now has a new shortcut for entering numbers & symbols
This is essentially a new shortcut for entering symbols. How does it work? Well, it allows you to quickly enter numbers and symbols via a swipe down, which is what the ‘flick’ means in this case.
You can swipe down on Q, W, E, R, T, Y, U, I, O, or P for 1-0, in which case the number in question will briefly replace the letter inside the key in a slide-down animation. It’s a rather subtle animation, though.
It is not enabled by default, though
Now, do note that this is not enabled by default, though. You’ll need to open Gboard settings, and navigate to Preferences -> Shortcuts, and there you’ll see the ‘Flick keys to enter symbols’ option, which you need to enable.
An explanation on how it works is also included. It simply says “touch a key and pull downward to enter its hinted symbol”, it’s quite straightforward, though it takes some time to get used to. You can accidentally trigger glide typing, if you have it enabled. I got used to it pretty fast, though.
Just to be clear, this is a part of the latest stable release of Gboard. It may be a server-side change, though, so even if you have the Gboard 16.2 installed, you may have to be patient to get it. We’re not sure at this point, but we do have the option.
It’s actually quite useful
This is another useful addition by Google. I got used to it pretty fast, and it does make typing more enjoyable for entering symbols, I have to admit. Not that touch&hold option is bad, but this just seems more natural somehow, at least to yours truly.
As a reminder, Google also added a font slider to Gboard not long ago, which is another useful feature, especially if you find the font on the keyboard itself to be too small.
The Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra is the company’s new rugged flagship tablet with a built-in projector. Well, if you’re wondering what you’re getting in the package, the company has filmed an unboxing experience, which you can now watch.
Watch the unboxing of the Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra
The video itself has a duration of less than a minute, and yet it shows you everything you need to see. It’s nicely packaged, and also embedded below.
Ulefone will ship you a very nice box, a playful box. Inside, you’ll find the tablet itself, a handle stand, a 120W charger, and a charging cable. In addition to that, a screwdriver is included, along with screws, and a SIM card ejector tool. Plus, of course, paperwork.
This video will also show you the tablet’s UI, well, a part of it, along with how you can easily attach the handle stand. At the very end, the company also shows the tablet in action… as a projector.
It has a built-in projector
This project offers brightness of up to 200LM, and it can project an image in a resolution of 960 x 540. It supports both auto and manual focus, and has a dedicated physical key. There are also dual versatile LED lights included, with a total of 754 LEDs. Dual Warning Lights are also a part of the package.
The Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra includes a 24,200mAh battery and supports 120W charging. The MediaTek Dimensity 7400X fuels this tablet, while you’re also getting 12GB of RAM here. You can expand the device’s storage, while it comes with 512GB out of the box.
A 64-megapixel main camera is backed by a 64-megapixel IR Night Vision camera. 5G is supported here, and the same goes for Wi-Fi 6E and Bluetooth 5.4. Android 15 comes out of the box.
You can win one for free
The Ulefone Armor Pad 5 series will see its premiere sale on November 11 on AliExpress, Amazon, and the official Ulefone store. The company has also organized a giveaway for the tablet.
Google added UWB to its Pixel lineup in 2021, starting with the Pixel 6 Pro. While this is a wise move to anticipate the advancements in technology, it seems there are certain limitations. It appears that the specific UWB implementation in older Pixel phones doesn’t support precision finding. This prevents them from using trackers like Moto Tag, like their recent counterparts.
UWB precision finding is not available on older Pixel phones
Android Authority has spotted a post on the Pixel support forums from a user complaining that their Pixel 7 Pro can’t use precision finding with their Moto Tag. This is despite being on the latest firmware. Moto Tag is currently the only UWB-equipped tracker that works with Android. It allows you to precisely pinpoint its location from the Find Hub app.
A Google product expert clarified, with a support page link, that UWB precision finding is only available on the Pixel 8 series and above (Pro models only). This confirms that the Pixel 6 Pro and Pixel 7 Pro don’t support precision finding despite having UWB. Google later confirmed the same to Android Authority as well. However, neither the support page nor Google explains why the feature isn’t available on older Pixels.
Google hasn’t clarified the reason behind the limitation
Though the report initially assumes that the reason for this limitation could be that both phones lacked support for determining the angle-of-arrival (AoA) of a UWB signal. This is a feature that allows a device to determine the signal’s direction. However, on checking the UWB capabilities of both phones using Android’s UWB API, Mishaal from Android Authority found that only the Pixel 6 Pro “lacks part of this feature.”
The only UWB feature that the older Pixels lack is background ranging support. This allows an app to use UWB while in the background, but it’s not clear why it would be necessary for precision finding when the Find Hub app is in the foreground while tracking. It’s possible there could be some other explanation for this feature’s omission.
The next major evolution of smart home devices is here. After testing it for months, Google has officially started the early access rollout of Gemini for Home in the US, bringing a powerful AI upgrade to Google Home devices. With this update, the home device adopts a more advanced Gemini AI as an assistant, replacing the traditional Google Assistant.
Gemini for Home is now available for the enrolled early access program users
Google began testing Gemini for Home in early October by inviting select users to try it. Now, the update is rolling out in early access for enrolled US users. The global stable release of the update is expected to take place in early 2026. Those enrolled in the program will automatically be upgraded from Google Assistant to Gemini.
Gemini, as a voice assistant, is noticeably more capable and natural in terms of conversation. Users will be able to access Gemini through their existing Google speakers and displays simply by saying “Hey Google.” It is compatible with the following devices:
Google Nest Hub (1st & 2nd gen)
Google Nest Hub Max
Google Nest Audio
Google Nest Mini (1st & 2nd gen)
Google Home and Home Max
Google Nest Wi-Fi Point
Gemini brings smarter control for Home devices
As the Gemini is now integrated into Home devices, users will now be able to do much more than just control lights or play music. The AI-powered assistant can now answer more complex questions, help with learning, and even offer lifestyle advice. For example, you can ask: “Hey Google, how can I improve water pressure in my shower?” or “OK Google, what should I eat before a 5K run?”
Furthermore, please note that the feature is currently being rolled out to users already enrolled in the early access program. Stable users in the US may receive the update by the end of the year, whereas the global rollout is expected to begin in 2026. Once global access expands, setting up and managing your smart home devices will likely become simpler than ever.
The Motorola Edge 70 is on its way, as more images of the phone have surfaced. Two new images of the device have appeared, along with the EU Energy label as well. Some specs have been confirmed as a result.
Before we get into it, it’s worth noting that the Motorola Moto X70 Air has already launched. Why is that important? Well, the Moto X70 Air is essentially the same phone as the Motorola Edge 70, but for the Chinese market.
The Motorola Edge 70 has just surfaced again in several images, along with some of its specs
With that being said, if you check out the gallery below, you’ll see the two new images that appeared. Both of these phones have green-ish colors, and they’ll allegedly be claled Pantone Bronze Green and Pantone Lily Pad.
On the screens of both phones, some specs are mentioned. A 4,800mAh silicon-carbon battery will be included in this ultra-slim phone. 68W wired charging will be supported, while the phone will be 5.99mm thick. It will weigh 159 grams and include a 50-megapixel main camera.
That’s pretty much all the spec information confirmed here. You can also see that the phone will have a flat display with a centered display camera hole up top. It will also have a mostly flat back and a raised camera island in the top-left corner. Three camreas will sit up there, by the way.
Its EU Energy lable confirms IP68 certification
The EU Energy label doesn’t really reveal much, but it does confirm that the phone will be IP68 certified for water and dust resistance. It will also have an A rating for drop protection, and a B rating for ease of serviceability. An A rating for battery life is also mentioned.
The Motorola Edge 70 will become official on November 5, that much has been confirmed. It will launch in Europe first, it would seem, and it’s expected to cost around €700. It remains to be seen if there will be some minor changes compared to the Moto X70 Air.
About a decade ago, many of us tech geeks were very excited for a new project that Google was working on, with Motorola (before Google sold Motorola off to Lenovo, and spun off Motorola Solutions). And that was Project Ara.
This project was shown off at Google I/O, in fact, I vividly remember sitting in a session about Project Ara at Moscone West in San Francisco – before Google moved it to Mountain View. It was a pretty cool concept. Where it would let you hot-swap different components like cameras, batteries, speakers, and much more.
The device was being beta tested back in 2014, but ended up getting delayed before Google decided to shelve it entirely.
Now, we’re seeing some prototypes pop up from 2014 and Project Ara, to show us what Google was actually working on.
TikToker posts prototypes of Project Ara, a decade later
A decade after the project was shelved, a TikToker by the name of Racoondetecionsquad ended up with three Project Ara prototypes and several modules for these prototypes.
He also has a video showing the process of removing the modules and popping in a new one. Another module has a switch of some kind included. These modules are definitely different from the ones that had leaked in 2016, it’s likely that this could have been a later prototype as well.
This definitely would not work in today’s smartphone world, as companies want you to buy new phones every few years – that’s mostly how they make their money. And being able to replace batteries, cameras, and other components with ease, would not be great for their bottom line. Still, Project Ara was a really cool pipedream that would have been cool if it came to fruition.
In the past, buying an SSD for your PC meant spending a lot of money. Granted, the benefits of an SSD are huge over regular HDDs, but the price-to-performance ratio was a little too expensive for the average user. These days, SSDs have become a lot more affordable. In fact, PNY unveiled its brand new CS3250 SSD. This is an M.2 NVMe PCIe Gen5 x4 SSD that’s built for gamers, AI developers, and content creators who need performance but don’t want to pay a premium.
PNY CS3250 SSD, built for speed
The PNY CS3250 SSD uses the PCIe Gen5 interface and fits the standard M.2 2280 form factor. This makes it compatible with most modern desktops and laptops. The company is selling the SSD in both 1TB and 2TB capacities. If you need even more space, the company says a 4TB model is coming soon).
The SSD features advanced thermal control to prevent overheating during intensive workloads. The thermal-coated controller keeps performance steady. This is helpful if you’re looking to render 4K video or training AI models, basically activities that might require a lot of read/write functionality.
In terms of read and write speeds, the 1TB model delivers write speeds up to 13,500 MB/s, while the 2TB version maxes out at 14,000 MB/s. Last but not least, customers can expect a 5-year limited warranty and an impressive 1.5 million hour MTBF rating.
Should You Buy It?
The PNY CS3250 SSD starts at $125.99 for 1TB and $219.99 for 2TB. The price alone positions it competitively against other similar SSDs. For AI development, AAA gaming, and professional content creation, those speeds translate to faster load times and seamless multitasking. However, you have to ask yourself, do you actually need Gen5 speeds?
If you’re someone who works with large datasets, editing 8K footage, or running AI training models, the CS3250 makes sense. Gamers who play games that are DirectStorage will experience faster asset streaming and reduced stuttering. Content creators who edit videos with multiple 4K timelines will probably appreciate the snappier performance as well. But if you’re a casual user who browses the web and streams videos, a Gen4 drive will save you money. You might not even notice the difference in performance.
But if you’re building a new PC and want to futureproof it with an SSD that won’t drain your bank account, the PNY CS3250 might be a good choice
The Galaxy Buds 3 Pro, announced in July 2024, are the latest and greatest earbuds from Samsung. Complete with Galaxy AI, and the most comfortable fit you’ll ever experience.
Buy from
Samsung has dropped the price of the Galaxy Buds 3 Pro to just $165. That is not an all-time low; in fact, it’s about $15 away from it. But this is the lowest price we’ve seen in quite a few months. So if you’ve been waiting to get a pair, now is the time to grab one.
Samsung talks a lot about the AI inside the Galaxy Buds 3 Pro, but honestly, that’s not really a selling feature. The audio quality and comfort are. These are not audiophile earbuds, but they do sound quite good for Bluetooth earbuds. In fact, they are some of the better-sounding earbuds I’ve used recently.
Then there’s the fit, which is super comfortable to wear. I’ve been able to wear these for hours on end without any issues or ear fatigue. That’s not something I can say about a lot of other earbuds, unfortunately.
As you might expect, these work great in the Samsung ecosystem, but since they are Bluetooth, they will work with virtually any other phone or tablet.
Battery life is also quite impressive here; we’re looking at six hours of continuous playback, which is an increase over the Galaxy Buds 2 Pro’s five hours. It also offers up to 26 hours with the included charging case. These are IP57, making them great for use when working out, too.
Popular social media platform, Twitter, saw a change in branding to ‘X’ in 2023 after the billionaire entrepreneur, Elon Musk, took over. The social network’s core systems were fully transitioned to X.com last year, leaving no trace of the bird logo. The platform is now moving a step closer to completely retiring Twitter. If you’re a former Twitter user who’s still using X and uses hardware security keys for your two-factor authentication (2FA) method, you need to re-enroll them before November 10th.
X users need to re-enroll security keys
X’s Safety account notified users of the deadline in a post last week, as spotted by The Verge. Re-enrolling your security keys will associate them with the X domain, allowing the company to retire the Twitter domain eventually. If you enroll a new security key, any other security keys will no longer work, the Safety account clarified. You will receive a prompt automatically if this relates to you.
“By November 10, we’re asking all accounts that use a security key as their two-factor authentication (2FA) method to re-enroll their key to continue accessing X. You can re-enroll your existing security key, or enroll a new one. A reminder: if you enroll a new security key, any other security keys will stop working (unless also re-enrolled),” the account said.
The change doesn’t apply to 2FA authenticator apps
The tech giant clarified that the change only applies to YubiKeys and passkeys, and not 2FA authenticator apps. Failing to re-enroll their affected keys before the deadline (November 10th) will have repercussions. You won’t have access to your account until you either complete the re-enrollment process or choose a different 2FA method. You can also decide not to use 2FA altogether, but X advises against it.
The process of re-enrolling your hardware key or adding a new one is quite simple. Head to Settings in the X app, then click Security and account access and Manage Passkeys within the Security section.
We finally have some good news when it comes to the Samsung Galaxy S26 series, they may not be more expensive than their predecessors. While many other companies raised prices for their flagship phones, Samsung may not do it with the Galaxy S26 series.
The Galaxy S26 series phones may not get a price hike, unlike the competition
The information comes from a South Korean publication, Newdaily, which claims that Samsung is not under pressure to bump prices. Why? Samsung makes its own memory for smartphones. So, even though DRAM prices are expected to jump up 30% in Q4, that won’t affect Samsung as much.
On top of that, the Exynos 2600 chip is tipped to fuel at least half devices from the Galaxy S26 seires. The Exynos 2600 is Samsung’s very own processor, so that will cushion the blow as well.
In other words, Samsung’s lack of reliance on external manufacturers could help the company keep the prices of the Galaxy S26 phones in check. An industry insider said: “Samsung may be able to maintain prices in the short term thanks to its vertical integration structure and inventory security.”
Recently, another publication, Hankyung, said that Samsung is considering raising prices. Well, Newdaily disagrees, obviously. The publication also added that solid sales of the Galaxy S25 are another reason why Samsung will keep prices unchanged.
The three devices are coming in Q1 next year, but the may arrive later than expected
The Samsung Galaxy S26 series was expected to arrive in January next year. Recent reports are saying that Samsung will postone the launch of the devices, though. Late February or early March are mentioned as launch timeframes.
Samsung is allegedly making some last-minute changes, and/or is having problems ensuring enough Exynos 2600 chips to use with these phones. Either way, the launch could be later than we expected.
OnePlus is a relatively young company compared to a number of other mobile tech giants in the market, but this China-based company managed to rise extremely fast thanks to releasing extremely compelling flagship-grade smartphones at affordable price tags. The company has been using the “Never Settle” motto from the start. It has managed to sell quite a few devices to date and establish itself as one of the best smartphone manufacturers in the market.
The company’s first smartphone, the OnePlus One made quite a splash in the tech community. OnePlus wasn’t exactly all that well-known back there, but all of that changed over the years. The company’s initial practice of invite-only purchases also changed. Such practice was in place due to low smartphone stock. If you’d like to take a trip down memory lane, read on. In this article we’ll take a look at OnePlus’ flagship smartphones one by one, starting with the OnePlus One. It is also worth noting that this article will be updated as new OnePlus flagship phones arrive.
OnePlus One
The OnePlus One is the company’s very first smartphone, and it was referred to as the “Flagship Killer” back when it launched, mainly due to its flagship-grade specs and qualities, and not a huge price tag. This smartphone was announced back in April 2014, and it was priced at $299 and $349 for 16GB and 64GB storage variants. The OnePlus One came with a Sandstone back, and it shipped with a commercial variant of CyanogenMod on it, CyanogenOS, which ran on top of Android 4.4.2 KitKat.
This smartphone features a 5.5-inch fullHD display, along with 3GB of RAM and 16GB / 64GB of storage. The phone is fueled by the Snapdragon 801 quad-core processor, while it sports a single 13-megapixel camera on the back. A 5-megapixel unit is included on the phone’s front side. A 3,100mAh battery is also a part of the package. The phone does sport a 3.5mm headphone jack, in case you were wondering.
OnePlus 2
The OnePlus 2 arrived in July of 2015, while it was released in August that same year. That handset does resemble the OnePlus One to a degree, but it features a fingerprint scanner below its display. That fingerprint scanner is flanked by two capacitive keys, which are customizable. The phone still includes a single camera on the back, and the Sandstone material made a comeback here.
The OnePlus 2 shipped with Android 5.1 Lollipop and OnePlus’ OxygenOS skin on top of it. This happened because OnePlus and Cyanogen decided to terminate their cooperation. Luckily for OnePlus, OxygenOS ended up being a truly compelling skin for Android. It’s a close-to-stock one with a number of useful additions. The OnePlus 2 features a 5.5-inch fullHD display, 3GB / 4GB of RAM and 16GB / 64GB of storage. The phone is fueled by the Snapdragon 810 SoC, while it ships with a 3,300mAh battery.
OnePlus 3
The OnePlus 3 was the very first OnePlus-branded phone to sport a metal unibody build, and the phone was announced in June 2016. The device sports a single camera on the back, which does protrude a bit. A front-facing fingerprint scanner made a comeback here, along with capacitive buttons that flank it. The OnePlus 3 ships with Android 6.0.1 Marshmallow out of the box, with OnePlus’ custom UI.
The device retained a 5.5-inch fullHD display size from the OnePlus 2, but unlike the OnePlus 2, this phone came with an OLED panel, and Optic AMOLED display, to be exact, which made it the first OnePlus flagship to include an OLED panel. The OnePlus 3 also shipped with 6GB of RAM and 64GB of non-expandable storage. It features a 16-megapixel camera on the back and is fueled by the Snapdragon 820. A 3,000mAh battery is included in this package, as are two SIM card slots (2x nano SIM).
OnePlus 3T
The OnePlus 3T looked the same as the OnePlus 3, save for a new color variant that was available, and it was announced in November 2016. This was the first time OnePlus released a “T” variant of a smartphone. The OnePlus 3T did bring some improvements over the OnePlus 3, including a more powerful processor (the Snapdragon 821), a larger battery, and several other improvements.
Other than that, this phone is the same as the OnePlus 3 in the spec department as well. The phone features the same display, same RAM count, same software, same camera setups, and so on. The phone ended up being quite successful for OnePlus, though, so the company opted to continue releasing two flagship smartphones per year. These were usually iterative improvements over the main phone.
OnePlus 5
The OnePlus 5 was announced in June 2017, and it looks similar to its predecessor from the front, though the whole phone is somewhat different in terms of the design. The OnePlus 5 sports a front-facing fingerprint scanner with two capacitive navigation buttons on each side of that scanner. The device also ships with two horizontally aligned rear-facing cameras. This is the first OnePlus-branded handset to sport two rear-facing cameras.
The OnePlus 5 is made out of metal, and it features a 5.5-inch fullHD Optic AMOLED display. The device is fueled by the Snapdragon 835 64-bit octa-core processor, while it arrived in 6GB and 8GB RAM variants. Those two variants pack in 64GB and 128GB of storage, respectively. Android 7.1.1 Nougat comes pre-installed on the device, along with the company’s OxygenOS Android overlay.
OnePlus 5T
The OnePlus 5T was announced in November 2017, and it sported a similar design to the OnePlus 5, but it looked quite different on the front. The in-hand feel between these two phones was quite similar due to a similar shape and everything. The OnePlus 5T, on the other hand, offered considerably thinner bezels. Also, instead of a front-facing fingerprint scanner, it included a rear-facing fingerprint scanner. Other than the fingerprint scanner, the back side of this phone looked identical to the OnePlus 5.
The OnePlus 5T includes the very same processor that was utilized in the OnePlus 5, the Snapdragon 835, while the phone also comes in 6GB and 8GB RAM variants, with the same storage setups as the OnePlus 5. A 3,300mAh battery is included on the inside of this phone, while the device ships with Android 7.1.1 Nougat out of the box. The OnePlus 5T does include a 3.5mm headphone jack, just like its predecessors.
OnePlus 6
The OnePlus 6 arrived in May 2018 with even thinner bezels than the OnePlus 5T, but unlike the OnePlus 5T, this phone includes a rather noticeable display notch. The OnePlus 6 is the first OnePlus flagship to be made out of metal and glass (the OnePlus X was not a flagship-grade phone), and it includes two vertically aligned cameras on its back. Those two cameras are centered, and right below them, a fingerprint scanner is located.
The OnePlus 6 features a 6.28-inch fullHD+ display, 6GB / 8GB of RAM, and 64GB / 128GB / 256GB of storage. The phone is fueled by the Snapdragon 845 64-bit octa-core processor, and a 3,300mAh battery is included on the inside. Android 8.1 Oreo comes pre-installed on this device, and the OnePlus 6 also sports a 3.5mm headphone jack, which remains unchanged compared to its predecessor.
OnePlus 6T
OnePlus 6T was announced in October 2018, only five months after the OnePlus 6, and it offers an extremely similar design to the OnePlus 6. The only two differences come in the form of a new display notch, and the design of the OnePlus 6T’s back. The OnePlus 6T includes a much smaller, teardrop notch on the front, while a fingerprint scanner is not located on the back of the device, like on the OnePlus 6, it is located underneath the phone’s display. The OnePlus 6T ships with an optical in-display fingerprint scanner.
Other than those differences, the design of this phone remains pretty much the same as on the OnePlus 6. The OnePlus 6T includes a larger 6.41-inch fullHD+ display, though, while it arrived in 6GB / 8GB / 12GB RAM variants, the 12GB RAM model is reserved for a special edition variant of the OnePlus 6T. The OnePlus 6T also arrived with a noticeably larger battery than the OnePlus 6, a 3,700mAh unit. The device ships with Android 9 Pie out of the box.
OnePlus 7 & 7 Pro
The OnePlus 7 series was announced in May 2019, the company introduced two smartphones, the OnePlus 7 and OnePlus 7 Pro. The OnePlus 7 Pro is the more premium of the two phones, even though the two devices do share some specifications. Both devices are made out of metal and glass, though their design is considerably different overall, as OnePlus opted for a different approach in these two cases.
The OnePlus 7 Pro features no bezels or display holes, unlike the OnePlus 7, which sports a waterdrop notch. The device features a pop-up selfie camera instead of the notch, and it also comes with a curved display. The OnePlus 7 Pro is the larger of the two phones, and it sports three cameras on the back, compared to the OnePlus 7’s two rear-facing units. Neither of the two phones offer a 3.5mm headphone jack, but they do offer stereo speakers.
Both devices are fueled by the Snapdragon 855 64-bit octa-core processor, and both ship with UFS 3.0 flash storage. Android 9 Pie comes pre-installed on both devices, along with OnePlus’ OxygenOS 9.5. The OnePlus 7 Pro’s display also offers higher resolution, a 90Hz refresh rate, and it is HDR10+ certified, not to mention that it offers faster charging. Neither of the two phones are IP certified, nor do they offer wireless charging.
OnePlus 7T & 7T Pro
The OnePlus 7T was announced in September 2019. The phone arrived as an upgraded variant of the OnePlus 7, and this may be the most notable change a T series phone brought to the table. The OnePlus 7T comes with an upgraded processor, display, charging, and cameras, compared to its predecessor. The OnePlus 7T is made out of metal and glass, and it features a waterdrop display notch, in addition to a camera oreo.
The device features a 6.55-inch fullHD+ Fluid AMOLED display with a 90Hz refresh rate. The Snapdragon 855 Plus fuels this handset, while a 3,800mAh battery is included on the inside. Warp Charge 30T is also a part of the package and is 23 percent faster than Warp Charge 30. The device includes 8GB of RAM and comes in 128GB and 256GB storage variants (UFS 3.0). 48, 12, and 16-megapixel cameras are placed on its back, while Android 10 comes out of the box.
OnePlus 8 & 8 Pro
The OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro were announced in April 2020. Needless to say, the OnePlus 8 Pro was the more premium of the two. Both devices were flagship-grade smartphones, though, and both were fueled by the Snapdragon 865 SoC, Qualcomm’s best processor at the time. The two devices also looked quite similar, but the OnePlus 8 Pro was larger and had a different-looking rear camera setup.
Unlike the OnePlus 7 Pro, the OnePlus 8 Pro did not have a pop-up selfie camera. OnePlus opted to include a display camera hole instead. That move removed moving parts inside the device, but it left the phone with a noticeable hole in the display. The OnePlus 8 Pro was also the very first OnePlus-branded smartphone to offer wireless charging and an official IP68 certification for water and dust resistance. Android 10 shipped out of the box on these two smartphones, along with OxygenOS 10.
OnePlus 8T
The OnePlus 8T was announced in October 2020. This time around, OnePlus opted to announce only one T series smartphone. A year before that, the OnePlus 7T and 7T Pro were launched. This is actually a good move by the company. Why? Well, for the most part, there was no need for two 7T variants. The OnePlus 8T was a half-cycle upgrade. It came with the same processor as the OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro.
This phone did come with a flat display, unlike its siblings. It also delivered faster charging than the two devices that came before it. The OnePlus 8T was the first smartphone from the company to offer 65W fast charging. Do note that we’re talking about wired charging here. The OnePlus 8T did not support wireless charging. The phone included four cameras on the back, with the same sensor that was included in the OnePlus 8.
OnePlus 9 & 9 Pro
The OnePlus 9 series was announced in March 2021. The company announced two flagship smartphones during that event, while also showing off its first-ever smartwatch. In addition to that, the OnePlus 9R was announced, but not for global markets. Having said that, the OnePlus 9 and 9 Pro arrived as the first smartphones to feature Hasselblad branding on them. OnePlus agreed on a 3-year partnership with a renowned camera company.
The OnePlus 9 has a flat display this time around, combined with a plastic frame, and glass back. The OnePlus 9 Pro is made out of metal and glass and has a curved display. The ‘Pro’ variant does come with a better display, a QHD+ LTPO panel, though the OnePlus 9 can compete. It also includes a better camera system, on paper. Both phones support 65W fast wired charging. The OnePlus 9 Pro offers 50W wireless charging, while the regular model launched with 15W wireless charging. The Snapdragon 888 was included to fuel both of these phones.
OnePlus 10 Pro
The OnePlus 10 Pro was announced in January 2022, in China. The global variant of this smartphone arrived at the end of March. It’s interesting that the ‘Pro’ model launched without the ‘vanilla’ variant of the device. It’s also interesting that OnePlus decided to launch it in China first, as that’s not what OnePlus users are used to. Regardless, the OnePlus 10 Pro arrived with truly powerful specs and changed design.
The phone’s rear camera module is an extension of the phone’s frame. Design-wise it does remind us of some phones from Samsung. The front side of the phone is very similar to the OnePlus 9 Pro. The OnePlus 10 Pro is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 1 SoC, and it includes either 8GB or 12GB of LPDDR5 RAM. OnePlus also included UFS 3.1 flash storage inside of this smartphone.
The Hasselblad partnership continued with this smartphone, while the phone includes four cameras overall, three of which are on the back. A large 6.7-inch LTPO2 AMOLED display was also included by the company, and the same goes for immensely fast charging. The OnePlus 10 Pro launched with a 5,000mAh battery, along with 80W (65W in the US) wired, 50W wireless, and 10W reverse wireless charging.
OnePlus 10T
The OnePlus 10T was announced in August 2022. After skipping 2021’s T series smartphone launch, OnePlus opted to launch on in 2022. This phone is technically a successor to the OnePlus 8T which arrived in 2020. The device does resemble the OnePlus 10 Pro quite a bit, though there are some design differences. This phone has a flat display, not a curved one, and its rear camera setup looks a bit different. On top of that, it has a different coating on its glass backplate.
The OnePlus 10T does not come with Hasselblad branding, unlike its OnePlus 10 Pro sibling, but it has some advantages over that phone. The OnePlus 10T offers faster charging, 150W one (125W in the US), and it’s fueled by the Snapdragon 8+ Gen 1 SoC. In every other way, though, it’s inferior to the OnePlus 10 Pro. It’s also considerably more affordable, though, so there’s that.
A 6.7-inch fullHD+ 120Hz flat Fluid AMOLED display is used here. The company included 8GB/16GB of RAM inside of this phone, which comes with 128GB and 256GB of internal storage. Wireless charging is not supported, but there are stereo speakers included here. Android 12 comes pre-installed on the OnePlus 10T, along with the company’s OxygenOS 12.1 skin.
OnePlus 11
The OnePlus 11 was originally launched in January 2023. The global model is set to follow on February 7, 2023. That being said, the device is somewhat similar to its predecessor in terms of design, but it comes with a redesigned rear camera island. It is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 SoC, and it launched in two color options. Those are essentially black and green models.
It’s the very first OnePlus smartphone to include LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. Up to 16GB of RAM and up to 512GB of storage, depending on the model. It also has a 5,000mAh battery, with 100W wired charging support. The charger is included, but wireless charging is not supported at all. The phone also comes without IP certification for water and dust resistance, unlike its predecessor.
A large 6.7-inch curved LTPO 3.0 AMOLED display is included. That display can go between 1 and 120Hz when it comes to the refresh rate. OnePlus included three cameras on the back of this phone, and Hasselblad helped with color calibration. A 50-megapixel main camera is backed by a 48-megapixel ultrawide camera and a 32-megapixel telephoto camera. OnePlus included Android 13 out of the box, along with ColorOS 13 in China, and OxygenOS 13 in other markets.
OnePlus 12
The OnePlus 12 was announced in early December, originally. its global variant arrived in late January. The phone itself looks very similar to its predecessor, the OnePlus 11. It’s made out of metal and glass, and it’s a large phone, that’s for sure. Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 SoC fuels this handset, the best SoC OnePlus could get its hands on at the time.
Globally, the OnePlus 12 comes with up to 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM, though in China that number goes up to 24GB. When it comes to storage, you can get up to 512GB of UFS 4.0 flash storage globally, and up to 1TB in China. A large 5,400mAh battery is also a part of the package, and the phone supports 100W (80W in the US) wired charging. A charger is included in the retail box. 50W wireless charging is also supported, and 10W reverse wireless charging.
OnePlus also included a compelling triple camera setup on the back. A 50-megapixel main camera is backed by a 48-megapixel ultrawide unit and a 64-megapixel periscope telephoto camera. The device is also certified for water and dust resistance. It has a truly bright display and an in-display fingerprint scanner.
OnePlus 13
The OnePlus 13 has been announced at the very end of October. It’s a direct successor to the OnePlus 12, and unlike that phone, it doesn’t have a curved display. OnePlus opted for a flat display this time around, and flat sides as well. Those are the most notable design differences between the two. Metal and glass are once again used to make the device, as was the case last year.
Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite processor fuels the OnePlus 13, a flagship chip that launched right before the announcement of this device. A 6.82-inch LTPO AMOLED display with all the bells and whistles is included here. It’s not only immensely bright and sharp, but it has great viewing angles, thin and uniform bezels, and more. OnePlus also included plenty of RAM inside of this smartphone, and fast storage too.
The battery capacity also got boosted. OnePlus used a silicon-carbon battery to fit a 6,000mAh battery capacity on the inside. 100W wired (80W in the US) charging is supported, along with 50W wireless, and 5W reverse wired charging. Three 50-megapixel cameras sit on the back of the device, and they have the benefit of Hasselblad’s color tuning. The device is also water and dust resistant, and ships with Android 15 out of the box.
OnePlus 13T
The OnePlus 13T has been announced as the company’s compact high-end smartphone. It was announced in China at the very end of April 2025. This smartphone has the same processor as the OnePlus 13, it’s fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite. It pairs that chip with up to 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. The device itself has two cameras on the back, and it’s easily recognizable. It also has very thin display bezels.
Speaking of its display, the OnePlus 13T features a 6.32-inch LTPO AMOLED panel. That display offers a refresh rate of up to 120Hz, and its resolution is 2640 x 1216. Android 15 comes pre-installed on the phone, with ColorOS 15 in China. Outside of China, the phone will ship with OxygenOS 15, of course. A large 6,260mAh battery is also a part of the package here, along with 80W wired charging.
There are two 50-megapixel cameras included on the back of the OnePlus 13T. A 50-megapixel main snapper (1/1.56-inch sensor size) is backed by a 50-megapixel telephoto shooter (1/2.76-inch sensor size, 2x optical zoom). An in-display fingerprint scanner of the optical variety is used inside of this phone too, while stereo speakers are also a part of the package.
OnePlus 15
The OnePlus 15 has been announced in October 2025 as the company’s new flagship smartphone. It was announced in China, while the global launch is expected to follow in November. With that being said, this phone represents a redesign compared to the OnePlus 13. OnePlus opted to go with a completely flat display and glass this time around, no more quad-curved ordeal. The camera island on the back has been heavily redesigned as well, it’s now more of a square than a circle.
Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor fuels the phone, the company’s most powerful chip. That chip is also brand new at this point. The phone also includes a huge 7,300mAh battery, which is a huge upgrade from the 6,000mAh unit in the OnePlus 13. Its wired charging is also a bit faster at 120W, while 50W wireless and 5W reverse wired and wireless charging are also supported here.
The phone comes with a series of water and dust certification ratings, offering great ingress protection. There are three 50-megapixel cameras included on the back, albeit they’re a downgrade compared to the OnePlus 13, at least on paper. A 165Hz AMOLED display sits on the front of the OnePlus 15, a 1.5K unit. OnePlus also issued an upgrade in the storage department, as UFS 4.1 is now used instead of UFS 4.0. The phone does bring plenty of improvements, and ships with Android 16 out of the box.
So, you’ve decided to dive into the world of laser cutting and engraving. It’s an exciting step! But with a range of machines available, choosing the right one can be the biggest hurdle. Should you start with an entry-level model or invest in a professional powerhouse?
At Falcon, a sub-brand of Creality dedicated to high-performance laser engraving, we continue to push boundaries—empowering hobbyists, DIY enthusiasts, and professionals alike to bring their boldest ideas to life.
Understanding Your Needs
Before we look at the specs, ask yourself these questions:
– What will I primarily create? (e.g., personalized gifts, intricate art, commercial products)
– What materials will I use? (e.g., wood, leather, acrylic, anodized metal, glass)
– Is this for hobby, small business, or production?
Your answers will directly point you to the right Falcon. Here’s how our series break down:
– The A1 Series (A1 10W/ A1 PRO 20W): Your entry into the laser world, balancing safety, simplicity, and impressive performance.
– The Falcon2 Pro Series (40W & 60W): The professional’s choice for high-precision work on a wider range of materials.
Let’s dive into the details.
1. For the Beginner & Hobbyist: The Falcon A1 Series
– Falcon A1 (10W) – Your Creative Starting Point
Ideal for first-time users, the A1 10W makes entering the world of laser engraving safe, simple, and affordable.
Perfect For: Hobbyists, students, and families.
Key Materials: Wood, leather, paper, cardboard, dark acrylic.
– Falcon A1 Pro (20W) – Upgrade Your Output & Material Range
Double the power for faster speeds and the ability to handle thicker materials. Unlock even more possibilities, including direct metal engraving, with the optional 2W Infrared Laser Head—the perfect tool for growing skills and expanding your creative or commercial potential.
Perfect For: Advanced makers, small Etsy shops, and creators working with diverse materials.
Key Materials: All A1 materials, plus the ability to cut thicker wood and acrylic efficiently. Excellent for engraving stone, glass, and ceramics, metal.
Create: Intricate wooden puzzles, multi-layer acrylic signs, engraved glassware, and precise engravings on metals like stainless steel and anodized aluminum.
2. For the Professional: The Falcon2 Pro Series (40W/60W)
When your passion demands professional-grade capabilities, you need a tool that conquers a wider range of materials. The Falcon2 Pro series, with its significantly higher laser power, is engineered to handle tougher, denser, and more diverse materials—expanding the boundaries of what you can create.
Perfect For: Professional workshops and commercial businesses.
Key Strength: Masters the broadest spectrum of materials, capable of engraving on metals like stainless steel and anodized aluminum, while effortlessly cutting and engraving thick acrylic, hardwoods, composites, and stone.
Ready to Choose?
– Start Creating with the Falcon A1.
– Scale Your Projects with the Falcon A1 Pro.
– Power Your Business with the Falcon2 Pro.
Don’t miss the Halloween Sale: Up to 18% off Creality Falcon A1 Series & up to 15% off Falcon2 Pro Series. (Oct 20 to 30)
Phone storage often disappears faster than anyone expects. Photos accumulate in the background silently, apps grow with each new update, and fragments of invisible data remain behind until the phone crawls along or won’t hold anything new. It occurs on both Android and iPhone devices, though the platform addresses the condition in its unique manner.
This article explains practical steps that show how to free up space on iPhone and Android devices safely. It breaks down what really fills your storage and how to clear it without risking your personal files.
How iPhone and Android Handle Storage Differently
Let’s start with how the two platforms manage memory. iPhone and Android face the same challenge – limited space – yet each system deals with it in its own way. For anyone curious about how to declutter storage on their iPhone or how to free up space on Android, the first step is, naturally, to know the difference.
iPhone:
Every app on an iPhone has its home in a ‘sandboxed partition’, separate from the rest of the system. The user cannot access an application’s folders, and most applications don’t provide a way to clear the cache. This is handled by iOS without any scope for human error. The phone keeps downloads inside the Files app or an app’s sandbox and does not support microSD cards.
While this setup keeps things tidy, it also makes it harder to free up space without deleting actual files. That’s part of the reason more users are skipping storage upgrades altogether – why pay more if you still end up running out of space? On Reddit, it’s common to see complaints about System Data ballooning even after removing apps, which is why how to free up storage on iPhone remains such a hot topic.
Android:
Android gives users deeper control over space and app data. A user can open Settings → Storage to review categories, clear cache or app data, and move files through a file manager. Many phones also allow external microSD cards, which let users move photos, videos, and documents outside internal memory in a few minutes.
This flexibility makes it easier to manage growing storage needs without deleting important content. Users can access app folders directly, and even automate cleanup with scheduled tools. It’s no surprise that Android users are less dependent on paid cloud plans or expensive storage upgrades – when space runs low, they have options.
Bottom line:
iPhones depend on automation and strict control, which protects users but hides files that occupy valuable space. Android provides full access and extra options such as expandable memory, but it demands regular care. A clear view of these differences helps users manage storage safely and keep both platforms stable.
How to Free up Storage on Your Phone
Both iPhone and Android include built-in options that help remove clutter and restore performance without risk. To keep the process clear, this guide presents three reliable methods that solve the most common storage issues.
Each method addresses a separate cause – hidden files, large media folders, or leftover data from unused apps. Together, they demonstrate how to clear the storage on any given phone without risking the loss of important files.
Method 1: Use Smart Cleaner App
Users believe that removing a few images or apps will solve the issue, yet there is much more on the phone than anticipated. Cache files, leftover folders, and invisible media quietly fill memory, especially inside chat or social apps. Many people ask why “System Data” or “Other” keeps increasing even after a cleanup. A reliable cleaner app offers a direct answer.
On iPhone:
Apple’s system maintains order but hides the details. iOS does not display cache or residual data inside normal menus, so a part of the storage remains out of reach. A tool such as Clever Cleaner helps users manage photos and files with ease.
It detects duplicate or similar shots, chooses the best version automatically, removes heavy items, compresses Live Photos, and deletes screenshots in one tap – all without ads, subscriptions, or hidden fees. It’s one of the better free iPhone cleaner apps we’ve tested. The app checks your device safely, sorts results by category, and gives full control before anything disappears.
Real steps that help clear your phone’s memory:
1. Download Clever Cleaner from the App Store.
2. Open Clever Cleaner and give Manage access to Photos and Files.
3. Tap Smart Scan to detect duplicates, heavy videos, and screenshots.
4. Find the items that you want to delete in either Similar Photos or large files (Heavies) and then Slide to Delete to get rid of them.
5. Make sure you remove all unnecessary files first, after which you can head to Settings > General > iPhone Storage to see how much free space you have. Finally, navigate to the Recently Deleted album in Photos and delete the files that you wish to remove forever.
The convenient thing is that at every step, you know exactly how much space you’re freeing up (the app clearly displays the size of all selected files before you clean them out). Very satisfying to use.
On Android:
Android provides more control, but that freedom leaves traces. Old app folders stay after uninstall, unused downloads remain, and updates create duplicate files. Google includes a native solution known as Files by Google, available on nearly every device.
Simple ways to clear phone storage:
Open Files by Google and switch to the Clean tab.
Review suggestions such as “Old screenshots,” “Large files,” or “Temporary app files.”
Approve each entry that no longer serves a purpose
Open the Settings menu, choose Storage, and check how much capacity has returned.
Because Android grants direct access to system folders, most users never need another app. A short cleanup session with Files by Google every few weeks keeps the phone responsive, organized, and free of unnecessary data.
Method 2: Remove Large Media and Duplicate Files Manually
Cleaner apps remove hidden clutter, yet photos, videos, and chat attachments still occupy the most space. A short manual review exposes old albums, outdated downloads, or message files that quietly block new storage.
On iPhone:
Apple provides built-in tools that allow direct control over photos and videos. The Photos app identifies duplicate shots, and menus allow for quick deleting of large attachments or unused programs.
Easy ways to reclaim phone storage:
1. Open Photos, tap Albums, then open Duplicates to review identical shots. Combine similar photos or delete the ones that repeat.
2. Next, scroll to Large Media to view videos and high-resolution photos that take up the most space. Remove clips or images that no longer matter.
3. In the case of Messages that are taking up most of the storage space, you should go to Messages, tap on Manage Storage, and delete attachments or conversations that contribute to the largest part of the storage.
4. Next, you can check the amount of space that has been freed up by navigating to Settings – General – iPhone Storage.
5. The last step is to remove the storage that is apparently still ide with these deleted files by going to the Recently Deleted section in Photos and deleting the trash from there.
Users who complete these steps often free several gigabytes within minutes.
On Android:
Android grants full access to its file system, which provides more freedom but also demands closer attention. Old downloads, duplicate photos, and cached folders can remain long after you remove an app. The built-in Files by Google app simplifies this process by listing the largest files first.
Quick ways to release extra space:
Open Files by Google, select Clean, and review the section labeled Large files.
Sort the list by size and delete the biggest videos or documents that have no purpose.
Open Gallery, find duplicate or blurred photos, and remove them.
Move older media to Google Drive or an SD card to create more room on the main device.
A careful review of large media keeps Android phones responsive and organized. For extra guidance, visit this guide, which explains practical methods to recover phone storage and maintain solid performance over time.
Method 3: Clear App Data and System Cache
Even after photo or video removal, a large share of phone storage often stays blocked by app data and cache files. Each app creates temporary files to make actions faster, but these leftovers slowly occupy valuable space. A direct reset of app data can recover several gigabytes in minutes.
On iPhone:
Apple allows users to erase extra data from apps without removing them completely. This method frees memory while keeping files, messages, and preferences intact.
How to free the storage on your phone:
1. Navigate through your Settings to General, and then tap on iPhone Storage.
2. Inspect the long list of apps sorted by their size and check the largest ones.
3. Tap the Offload App, and you remove the extra data that is a memento of the app while the information is preserved.
4. In the case of Safari, go to Settings, tap Safari, and then select Clear History and Website Data to get rid of the additional space.
This method releases memory on an iPhone quickly without changing how apps behave. Repeating the same routine once a month helps avoid another “storage almost full” alert.
On Android:
Android offers direct control over cache and stored data through its system menus. This option restores memory fast without touching personal information.
Direct actions to clear phone storage safely:
1. Open the Settings menu and find the Storage section. Inside, you’ll see an option called Apps or App Management – tap it to view all the apps currently on your phone.
2. Find the app that takes up the most space – social media or video apps usually top the list – and open its details to see what can be cleared.
3. Select Clear Cache in order to delete cached material or Clear Storage to clear the app completely.
4. Get back to the Settings, Storage section, and it should tell you how much space the phone has reclaimed.
A quick review of app data often returns several gigabytes and improves system response. Phones remain fast and organized once unnecessary files disappear.
Final Tip
Storage issues often return if left unchecked for too long. To understand how to clear up storage on iPhone, remove old downloads, check large photo folders, and use a trusted cleaner to erase leftover files before they pile up again.
Regular care stops the “Storage Almost Full” alert and keeps your phone fast without extra costs. Small, steady steps always give better results than one rushed cleanup.
The mobile tech world never stands still. New phones featuring Qualcomm’s latest Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 flagship processor are just hitting the market. However, rumors about its successor, the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6, are already circulating. The next-gen SoC is expected to officially debut in late 2026, so there’s still a long way to go. However, early reports about the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip hint at major performance improvements, including support for the LPDDR6 RAM and UFS 5.0 memory and storage standards.
Artificial intelligence has taken over multiple segments of the tech industry. The smartphone segment is no exception. The heavy implementation of AI by companies like Google and Samsung makes this abundantly clear. Well, the “Elite Gen 6” chip will be better prepared than ever for these tasks.
LPDDR6 and UFS 5.0: The essential upgrades driving the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip
To handle the increasingly complex AI workloads, future silicon requires massive boosts in data speed. The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip tackles this directly by reportedly introducing support for two critical, high-speed standards: LPDDR6 RAM and UFS 5.0 storage. These upgrades will dramatically increase how fast the chip can access and write data.
Perhaps the most compelling (and controversial) rumor centers on the manufacturing process. According to the source (tech tipster Digital Chat Station on Weibo), the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip will mark Qualcomm’s transition to the next-generation 2nm node from TSMC. Qualcomm reportedly plans to use TSMC’s more advanced N2P process. This next-level 2nm variant theoretically offers huge gains. It promises up to 18% better performance or a substantial 36% reduction in power consumption compared to the previous 3nm node.
However, it’s noteworthy that other voices in the industry express doubt about this timeline. They argue that due to TSMC’s expected production ramp-up, Qualcomm, along with other large customers, will only secure the initial N2 2nm process for a 2026 launch.
Skipping an entire lithography step seems ambitious. The simple shift to 2nm nodes guarantees major gains in both power efficiency and raw computational ability, regardless of the exact variant used.
Higher flagship costs
Regardless of the precise manufacturing details, the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 looks set to be an exceptional leap forward. The combination of a 2nm design with the far faster LPDDR6 memory and UFS 5.0 storage promises significant improvements across the board. These technological advances, unfortunately, rarely come cheap. Analysts expect the Gen 6 to carry a higher price tag than its predecessor. This will likely translate into more expensive flagship devices for consumers.
The Samsung Galaxy S26 series is already making many headlines. Most conversations are focusing on the expected regional split between the Exynos 2600 and the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processors. There is also discussion about the potential performance that the Exynos 2600 chip could offer. However, a newly spotted component suggests a nice upgrade might be hidden in a completely different part of the Samsung Galaxy S26: the Bluetooth and overall connectivity experience.
New leaks indicate the Galaxy S26 lineup could debut with a dedicated companion chip for connectivity. This approach mirrors steps taken by other industry giants toward greater hardware independence.
Samsung Galaxy S26’s Exynos S6568 chip may enable Bluetooth 6.1
A fresh listing on the Bluetooth qualified products website reveals a new Samsung chipset: the Exynos S6568. Described as a Bluetooth and Wi-Fi companion chip, the S6568 aims to work alongside a main Exynos SoC. This move suggests Samsung is ready to offload crucial connectivity duties from its flagship processor.
The core technical headline is its support for Bluetooth 6.1. Announced earlier this year, Bluetooth 6.1 is the newest standard, promising better security features and noticeably improved power efficiency compared to its predecessor. Currently, no mass-market devices use this latest specification. So, the Galaxy S26 could be one of the first.
The real advantage: Efficiency and thermals
Why would Samsung introduce a separate chip for features like Wi-Fi and Bluetooth? The prevailing theory among tech analysts is that by dedicating the Exynos S6568 to these tasks, Samsung can significantly improve the performance and power efficiency of the main processor (the Exynos 2600).
This architectural approach allows the primary chip to focus solely on high-demand tasks. Think about running applications and processing complex graphics. The result should be a potential gain in battery life for the S26, faster performance during heavy use, and better thermal management. In the end, the phone should run cooler when you need it most.
The rumored S6568 certification coincides with other reports suggesting the Galaxy S26’s development schedule is changing. The launch, traditionally held in January, is now rumored to be pushed back to March 2026. This delay reportedly stems from an internal strategy reevaluation that involved shuffling the model lineup. The move would also imply the delay of the One UI 8.5 update to eligible Galaxy devices.
The primary battle between the Exynos 2600 and the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 will still define the S26 experience in many regions. However, the integration of the Exynos S6568 points to Samsung also prioritizing other core aspects of the user experience. Making the phone run cooler and last longer, all while offering the newest connectivity standard, sounds like a great move.
Google Chrome is generally thought of as a pretty safe browser to use, but that doesn’t make it an impenetrable fortress, and a Chrome exploit used to distribute malware is the latest proof of that. A zero-day is an exploit that, once discovered, is immediately used to attack an entity or other users. This gives the company that makes the software that contains the exploit zero days to prepare for its malicious use. Instead, they’re forced to work on patching the previously unknown vulnerability after the fact.
According to a report from Bleeping Computer, a zero-day was recently used to target a variety of entities by distributing malware. Reported targets include Russian media outlets, educational institutions, and financial institutions. The malware, known as ‘Dante,’ is said to be a piece of commercial spyware. It was also reportedly created by Memento Labs, an Italian company formerly known as Hacker Team.
The Chrome exploit that was distributing malware was discovered by Kaspersky
Dante was initially discovered back in March of this year, as malware used as part of an attack called Operation ForumTroll that targeted Russian organizations. However, it wasn’t until recently that Kaspersky shared more intricate details of the malware and its inner workings.
As noted by Kaspersky, the initial point of infection from this malware occurred when users clicked a link in a phishing email. Once at the malicious website, the victims were “verified” and then the exploit was executed.
According to reports, these phishing emails were sending out invites to Russian organizations to attend the Primakov Readings forum.
Kaspersky further details that the Dante software, as well as other tools used in Operation ForumTroll, were developed by Memento Labs, linking the company to these attacks in some form. It’s worth noting that this company isn’t 100% confirmed to be behind the attacks. As noted by Bleeping Computer, there is a possibility that someone else was behind the zero-day attack and distribution of the malware.
Xbox has a new rival in town, and you might be surprised to know that it’s TikTok, as well as movies, that keep the Head of Xbox Game Studios up at night. Not PlayStation, not Nintendo. A social media application available on Android and iOS, and those motion picture films that you used to flock to theaters to see, but can now more easily than ever before watch from the comfort of your own couch.
It’s likely strange hearing that a video game company isn’t considering other video game companies its competitors anymore. That’s understandable. Xbox targeting TikTok and movies as its new rivals probably feels entirely random. As random as it might feel, if PlayStation were to stop competing with other video game companies and start targeting fast food chains. On a surface level, it doesn’t make any sense. But if you dig a little deeper, you can start to see the direction that Xbox is probably taking, in addition to the reason it’s taking it.
Xbox probably sees TikTok and movies as its new rivals because it’s competing for your time
To be clear, this has always been the case. Video games are a form of entertainment, and as long as they’ve been around, they’ve had to compete for your time with any other form of entertainment. So, that’s not an entirely new aspect of things. However, things have changed quite a bit. Now more than ever, entertainment through mediums like movies and TikTok is commanding the time of everyone, from teenagers to full-blown adults.
TikTok consumption is on such a massive scale that it wouldn’t be surprising to learn if some users were avoiding all other forms of entertainment to scroll through new clips. There likely are some users out there who are like this. Microsoft and its Xbox team appear to think so, and this is likely a big reason why it considers TikTok one of its new main rivals.
This is just speculation, of course, but it’s the most reasonable assumption that can be made. TikTok, movies, and streaming video make up a huge chunk of media consumption these days. Naturally, Xbox wants users to spend time playing games as opposed to watching videos. So, it’s setting its sights on those types of services.
The Xbox, as we know it, has changed forever
The days of Xbox being the third console behemoth in the market are long gone. This console platform of the early 2000s and 2010s has transformed into something entirely different. It’s not dead per se, but it’s certainly dead in the sense that the Xbox that fans have loved for two decades isn’t the same. Not only is Microsoft now targeting social media apps as its new rival, but its Xbox consoles won’t be traditional consoles anymore. The next Xbox will reportedly be a Windows gaming PC with an Xbox UI layer on top. It’s a new age for Xbox. For better or worse, this is the path Microsoft has chosen to take.
Rumors of the next-gen Xbox console powered by Windows, making it a full-fledged gaming PC, began floating to the surface of the news cycle earlier this month. Now, it seems that those rumors actually have weight to them. So much weight that the rumors are reportedly true.
When the rumors first popped up, we said it sounded like the next console would just be an expensive gaming PC. That’s exactly what Microsoft is going for, according to Windows Central. (It is worth noting that this report is based on “trusted sources within Microsoft.” So, Microsoft itself has not publicly announced these details). This probably comes as no surprise to some. The ASUS ROG Xbox Ally X and ROG Xbox Ally launched on October 16, and both feature a new software experience. It’s called the Xbox Fullscreen Experience, and it’s designed to be more of a console-like user interface than Windows 11.
One of the main complaints that Windows 11 handhelds have had so far is that they don’t feel like handheld consoles, which is essentially what they are. The Xbox Fullscreen Experience takes steps to address that issue. In most ways, it does a fine job at this. All your games are accessible right from one place. This includes games across clients like the Xbox app, Steam, Ubisoft Connect, and more. The next Xbox console is following in these footsteps.
Microsoft’s next Xbox console is a Windows PC, but it will have a console-style UI
The important bit here for console fans is that the new Xbox will have a console-style UI. Similar to, or perhaps exactly like, the Xbox Fullscreen Experience for the ROG Xbox Ally X and ROG Xbox Ally. The console experience will be layered on top of Windows, just like those handhelds. It will also boot into this experience as soon as you power it on, as opposed to booting into Windows first.
There is a major difference, though. As Windows Central reports, those who prefer this console UI can stay within it indefinitely. With no requirement to ever leave it. That means updates, game installs, etc., will all be doable from this experience. For comparison, with the ROG Xbox Ally X, if you want to update anything, it all has to be done from the Windows side of things. It’s not a great experience, all things considered. The next console is reportedly not going to have this problem. That’s a big step in the right direction if you want a console to be a console.
That being said, gamers will have the option to move to the Windows layout if they want to play games from other clients, such as Steam, or play Windows games that run in their own client and aren’t available on Xbox.
It’s still unclear what the price is going to be. However, Xbox President Sarah Bond did confirm that the next-gen Xbox will be a “very premium, very high-end, curated experience.” So, chances are the next Xbox won’t be as affordable as some people are hoping.
You only really know about a company based on the public image it wants you to see. But what really goes on behind the scenes? Behind the glitzy product launches, what exactly takes place in the planning process? If you’re curious about how a carrier operates, PhoneArena managed to land an exclusive interview with a Verizon representative who spilled the beans on the company’s operations.
Verizon representative tells all
According to the interview with the Verizon representative called “Jim,” it uncovered some of the things that take place behind the scenes. For starters, Verizon is relying pretty heavily on AI. This comes in the form of an AI tool called “Personal Shopper.” This feature automatically builds a cart of so-called recommended items when customers open a new account.
While it might sound useful, Jim suggests that this usually results in a ton of irrelevant products, which makes it annoying for employees to manage. Employees are also pressured to meet strict sales quotas with mandatory upselling. These are not optional goals, and failing to meet a quota could jeopardize their employment.
Unfortunately, this has created a somewhat toxic environment. Due to the immense pressure to perform, some employees resort to deceptive tactics. We’re talking about hidden insurance or fees here. So, the next time you get your bill, you might want to take a deeper look at the charges.
All of this comes from the higher-ups too, where management encourages upselling for items like extra lines, even if a customer doesn’t need it.
But it’s not all bad
Based on the interview, it sounds like Verizon resorts to some pretty shady tactics when it comes to upselling. However, it’s not all bad. It seems that despite the stressful sales environment and pressure to meet quotas, Verizon is apparently a pretty good employer. The carrier offers decent pay, commissions, and benefits.
Still, these pressures can lead to burnout, which results in employees leaving. But it seems that many of them eventually return. This is because the pay and benefits are simply too good to give up on.
Jim acknowledges some of the shady tactics Verizon uses, but he also notes that it’s the same thing at T-Mobile. “It’s just that you wear pink instead of a red shirt, and you hand out goodies on Tuesdays.”
If you’re looking for a 360-degree camera, Insta360 has become more or less the standard. But if the Insta360 X5 is a bit out of your price range, the company unveiled the Insta360 X4 Air today. This is a compact 360-degree camera that brings 8K video recording to creators who have a smaller budget.
Meet the new Insta360 X4 Air
The X4 Air captures 8K 360-degree video at 30fps and 4K at 50fps. It features dual 1/1.8-inch CMOS sensors that can deliver vibrant colors. But this doesn’t mean it can’t take photos. If you have to take photos, they max out at 29MP. This is lower than Insta360’s flagship models, although it should be more than enough for most creators.
While it is cheaper than the X5, Insta360’s FlowState stabilization, 360-degree horizon lock, and Invisible Selfie Stick effect are all here. The camera is waterproof up to 15 meters without extra housing and weighs just 165 grams (46 x 113.8 x 37 mm), making it 30 grams lighter than its predecessors.
The camera has a built-in 2,010mAh battery that runs for 90 minutes on 8K while charging fully in 57 minutes. Another standout feature is the user-replaceable lenses. This means you can swap them out easily if they get scratched. Other features include gesture control, voice activation, and twist-to-record, perfect for solo vloggers.
How it stacks up against the X4 and X5
The X4 Air sits below the X4 and X5 in Insta360’s lineup. While it sacrifices some photo resolution and slow-motion frame rates, it retains important features like stability and immersive shooting capabilities.
The Insta360 GO Ultra, which launched earlier this year at $449, offers a different form factor with a wearable design. Meanwhile, competitors like the DJI Osmo Nano are also targeting budget-conscious creators with similar pricing strategies.
For casual users who want to experiment with 360 content or creators stepping up from smartphone cameras, the X4 Air is a good place to start. It’s priced around $399 at launch. This is less than the $500+ X4 and $550+ X5 when they first launched. The Insta360 X4 Air is available now on the company’s official site, Amazon, and select retailers globally. It also comes with a free one-year subscription to Insta360+.
On app stores like Apple’s and the Google Play Store, there are certain applications that are designed for adults. Now, it looks like Google wants to implement age verification across the board, requiring users to show proof they are 18 or older to download certain “mature” apps from the Play Store.
Google Play Store needs proof of your age
This is according to a post on X by Artem Russakovskii, where he shared screenshots of the age verification system in action. Basically, users need to show Google proof of their age, if not they might not be able to download many apps from the Play Store. This is part of Google’s larger efforts at identifying the ages of their users on search and YouTube.
Based on the screenshots, users have several ways of verifying their age. This comes in the form of uploading a government-issued ID, taking a selfie, using a credit card, or using a third-party service. If you’re already using a credit card in your name to buy from the Play Store, we reckon this shouldn’t be an issue.
At the moment, it is unclear what kind of limitations users might face if they do not verify their age. Presumably, at the very least, they will be blocked from downloading apps designated for adults. However, if the limitations go beyond that, it is going to be very annoying.
Not Google’s fault
Now, you might think that this is just Google’s way of collecting more information on you. That was our first instinct too. However, according to Russakovskii, Google isn’t entirely to blame for this. According to him, Google is just adhering to the law. In the US alone, there are several states that have implemented age verification requirements. This is also true for other countries like the UK.
Google obviously needs to play nice with these states and countries if it wants to keep operating in them. However, for users, these extra steps will be a pain. It would be less of an issue if the process were seamless. But we’ve already seen Google’s reliance on AI has resulted in adults getting banned.
Launched in March of this year, the Google Pixel 9a has quickly become a favorite for those seeking a powerful yet affordable smartphone experience. Its impressive photographic features have also helped its popularity. To help you protect and enhance this device, we’ve scoured the market for the best cases and accessories so you don’t have to. Below you will find our top pick that will cover most of your needs and requirements.
Best Google Pixel 9a Case
For a great blend of style, protection, and a slim profile, the Spigen Liquid Air is our top choice for the best overall case for the Google Pixel 9a.
Spigen Liquid Air
$29.99
The Spigen Liquid Air’s matte black finish with a subtle geometric pattern not only looks modern; it also provides an excellent grip, significantly reducing the chances of accidental slips. This case is crafted from a flexible TPU material that is easy to install and feels comfortable in hand.
Despite its lightweight and slender design, the Liquid Air doesn’t compromise on protection. It features Spigen’s Air Cushion Technology in the corners to absorb shock from drops and bumps. The raised edges around the screen and camera provide an extra layer of defense against scratches when you place your phone on flat surfaces. It’s a case that offers substantial protection without adding unnecessary bulk, making it ideal for everyday use.
Colors: Mate Black, Navy Blue, Abbys Green, Marble Gray
If a secure hold is your primary concern, the dbrand Grip Case is second to none. Engineered with a unique micro-etched texture on the sides, this case offers an exceptional level of grip that inspires confidence when holding your Google Pixel 9a.
dbrand Grip Case
Starts at $59.90
The tactile feedback from the textured rails on dbrand’s Grip Case ensures that the phone stays firmly in your hand, preventing accidental drops.
Beyond its grippy exterior, the dbrand Grip Case provides military-grade impact protection. So, you can be sure your device is safe from everyday tumbles. One of the standout features of this case is its customizability. You can pair it with a wide array of dbrand’s signature skins to personalize the look of your Google Pixel 9a. So, this case will not only offer you a secure grip, but you will also be able to adapt it to your unique style.
Colors: Dozens to choose from, literally
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Textured silicon
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: N/A
Weight: N/A
Buy at dbrand
Best Ultra-Thin Google Pixel 9a Case
Among case users, there are many who want to protect their phone from scratches and scuffs without adding bulk. For these cases, the Spigen Thin Fit MagFit case is an ideal solution.
Spigen Thin Fit MagFit
$39.99
As one of the thinnest cases on the market, the Spigen Thin Fit adds virtually no bulk to your phone, preserving its original form factor and feel. The case is so slim that you’ll barely notice it’s there if the color matches that of your device. As a bonus, it integrates a magnet to add compatibility with MagSafe accessories.
This Spigen case is designed with precision, ensuring a snug fit and easy access to all buttons and ports. It features a subtle lip around the camera to protect the lens without adding bulk. While it won’t offer the same level of drop protection as a thicker case, it excels at preventing the everyday nicks and scratches that can blemish your device.
When it comes to robust protection, the OtterBox Commuter Series is a top contender case for the Google Pixel 9a.
OtterBox Commuter Series
$39.99
The OtterBox Commuter Series case is built with a dual-layer design, featuring a soft inner slipcover and a hard outer shell. Both work together to absorb and deflect impact from drops and falls. It’s a case designed for those who lead an active lifestyle or work in demanding environments. It even boasts of exceed 3x the MIL-STD-810G 516.6 military drop standards.
The Commuter Series also includes port covers to block out dust, dirt, and lint from getting into the jacks and ports. Despite its rugged construction, it maintains a relatively slim profile that allows for easy pocketability.
Colors: Black, Blue
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Polycarbonate, Silicone
Recycled materials: A minimum of 35% recycled plastic
Dimensions: 164.59 x 80.51 x 14.98 mm
Weight: 81.64 grams
Buy at
Buy at OtterBox
Best Google Pixel 9a Case with a Kickstand
Maybe you are looking for both rugged protection and the convenience of a built-in kickstand. In this case, the Spigen Tough Armor AI (MagFit) for the Google Pixel 9a is an excellent choice.
Spigen Tough Armor AI (MagFit)
$21.99
This case provides heavy-duty defense with its combination of a shock-absorbent TPU interior and a durable polycarbonate exterior. It’s also fortified with Air Cushion Technology for superior drop protection. It even has magnets to support MagSafe gadgets and accessories.
The integrated kickstand is a standout feature. It allows for hands-free viewing in landscape mode, perfect for watching videos or making video calls. The kickstand sits flush with the back of the case when not in use, maintaining a sleek profile. The Tough Armor offers a sweet balance of functionality and protection for your Google Pixel 9a.
Colors: Black, Navy Blue, Abbys Green, Metal Slate
For those who like to put some premium fashion on their phones, the Bellroy Leather Case for the Google Pixel 9a is the ultimate choice.
Bellroy Leather Case
$45
Like other leather cases from Bellroy, this one is designed in direct collaboration with Google. This guarantees a perfect fit and smooth, seamless access to every feature of your Google Pixel 9a.
Crafted from eco-tanned leather, the case doesn’t just protect your phone—it evolves, gaining a unique patina over time. It keeps a remarkably slim profile yet delivers serious protection. You’ll find a soft microfiber lining inside to cushion your phone, plus subtly raised edges that safeguard the screen and camera. If you value genuine leather and precision design, this is your case.
Colors: Terracotta, Agave, Black
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Leather
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: 159 x 78 x 12 mm
Weight: 29.4 grams
Buy at Bellroy
Buy at
Best Google Pixel 9a Wallet Case
To simplify your daily carry, the Smartish Wallet Slayer Vol. 1 for the Google Pixel 9a is a nice solution.
TORRO Leather Wallet Case
$34.99
The TORRO Folio Case is an elegant way to protect your device. Made from genuine top-grain leather, it promises a classic look and exceptional durability that ages beautifully over time.
Inside, the case features a soft microfiber lining to safeguard your screen. Its true advantage lies in the utility: multiple card slots replace your wallet, and a simple fold creates a built-in stand for media viewing. The TORRO case offers robust protection that never sacrifices the sophisticated touch of premium leather.
Colors: Black
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Leather
Recycled materials: 12% Recycled Polyester
Dimensions: N/A
Weight: 110 grams
Buy at
Best Google Pixel 9a Screen Protector
Protecting the display of your Google Pixel 9a is essential. The Supershieldz Tempered Glass Screen Protector offers high-quality protection at an affordable price.
Supershieldz Tempered Glass Screen Protector
$7.99
Made from high-quality tempered glass, it provides excellent scratch resistance and can withstand minor impacts. It’s a nice option to keep your screen in pristine condition.
The Supershieldz screen protector is designed to be highly transparent, ensuring that you don’t lose any of the vibrant colors or sharpness of your Google Pixel 9a’s display. It also features a hydrophobic and oleophobic coating to reduce smudges and fingerprints. The package typically includes multiple protectors, making it a great value and ensuring you have a spare on hand.
For the best wireless charging experience with your Google Pixel 9a, the official Google Pixel Stand (2nd Gen) is the top choice.
Google Pixel Stand
$38.45
This wireless charger is designed to provide fast and efficient wireless charging. Plus, it turns your Pixel into a smart display while it powers up. You can use it to control smart home devices, display your favorite photos, and more.
The Pixel Stand is a premium accessory that not only charges your phone quickly but also enhances its functionality. It comes with a power adapter and cable, so you have everything you need to get started right out of the box. For a seamless and feature-rich charging experience, the Pixel Stand is an excellent investment.
Colors: White
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Plastic
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: N/A
Weight: 5 grams
Buy at
Best Google Pixel 9a Wired Charger/Power Brick
The Google Pixel 9a doesn’t come with a power brick in the box. If you don’t have one at home, the Anker 312 Charger (30W) is an excellent and affordable option for fast charging.
Anker 312 Charger (30W)
$19.99
This compact and powerful charger can charge your Google Pixel 9a at its maximum supported speed via USB-C.
The Anker 312 features a foldable plug, making it incredibly portable and perfect for travel. It also incorporates Anker’s safety features to protect your device from overcharging and overheating. For a reliable, fast, and compact charging solution, the Anker 312 is a must-have accessory for your handset.
If you’ve ever been on a car trip with the family, then you know how irritating it can be if everyone needs to charge their devices and there’s not enough charging ports to go around. That’s why this deal on the UGREEN 145W retractable car charger is such a good deal. For $34.99, you get a car charger that can charge up to four devices at once. Not only that, but it has one of the USB-C cables already available as it retracts into the charger when not in use. Then, there are three other ports available, so you can plug three more cables in to charge three additional devices. Normally, this car charger would cost you $50.
That price means this is 30% off right now, and it’s the lowest price in the last 30 days. Just imagine, for $35, you could solve everyone’s charging problems for the next family road trip. Alternatively, this serves as a great way to charge several of your own devices at a time. Like your phone, earbuds, and maybe a gaming handheld if you take one with you everywhere you go. And with a 145W output, you have plenty of juice to charge everything simultaneously. It’s also worth noting that this has enough power to charge your laptop.
While you could probably find a car charger for less money, it probably won’t be as good as this one or as useful.
There aren’t many excellent phones you can pick up for a price under $500, which is what makes this deal on the 2024 Motorola razr so good and, dare we say, tempting. At its normal price of $699.99, the 2024 Motorola razr is a pretty good value, but at its current sale price of $399.99, it’s almost like you’re stealing from Motorola and Amazon.
This is a 43% discount for a foldable smartphone, which is evidence of two things. One, foldable smartphone prices are likely starting to come down to more reasonable levels, and Amazon probably has some stock of this phone that it’s trying to chew through. Either way, if you like the idea of a foldable phone but have held off because of the cost, now is the perfect time to get this one.
The 2024 Motorola razr is powered by a 4,200mAh battery that should last you all day and then some. The phone has pretty fast charging as well. So when the battery drains completely, it shouldn’t take long to power the phone back up. It has a 50MP camera for photos as well, and it comes unlocked so it can work on any major US carrier. The large cover screen display isn’t just for show. It can display the time, date, and even run several apps, allowing you to interact with some of the phone’s features.
Ah, the OPPO Find X9 series. One of my favorite smartphone series out right now. Why? Well, it’s got everything I love about OnePlus, with a more efficient chip and a more versatile camera system. At least, that was the case with the Find X8 and Find X8 Pro. Is that still the case for the Find X9 Pro this year? Let’s find out.
OPPO Find X9 Pro
Rating
starstarstarstarstar_emptystar
The OPPO Find X9 Pro takes everything we loved about last year’s model and turns it up a notch — with a sleek new flat design, a powerhouse Dimensity 9500 chip, and one of the best battery experiences you’ll find on any flagship.
Pros
Incredible build quality and design
Gorgeous display
Excellent performance
Massive 7,500mAh battery
Great thermal management
Smooth, refined software
Cons
Not officially sold in the US
No charger in the box (for EU)
Minor software quirks
No Alert Slider
The best color is exclusive to China
OPPO did invite us to London for a pre-briefing of the new Find X9 series in early October. OPPO paid for lodging and transportation, but this is not a paid or sponsored review. OPPO did not see this review before it was published.
Much like the OnePlus 15, the OPPO Find X9 Pro also underwent some big design changes this year. The curved display is now gone in favor of a flat one. The round camera module is also gone. It’s now a squircle in the left hand corner. The sides are now fully flat, and reminds me a lot of the iPhone. Which has been a trend for smartphones over the past couple of years. Not that it should be a surprise.
We have the silk white color here, which actually looks really nice. I definitely would have liked to get the Velvet Red color, but that is exclusive to China unfortunately. While the name says “silk” it is not slippery at all. In fact, that is the single biggest upgrade over the Find X8 Pro from last year, at least for me. I had the Pearl White Find X8 Pro and it was so slippery, like holding a bar of soap. So thank goodness OPPO fixed that this year.
The Alert Slider is also gone this year, which we expected. After all, OnePlus and OPPO both announced this would happen a few months ago. Not to mention, the Find X8 Ultra also ditched the Alert Slider. Instead, we have the AI Key, which opens up Mind Space. Something we’ll talk more about in a bit. The right side still has the camera button which is capacitive – something Apple still hasn’t learned – as well as the power and volume rocker. With the USB-C port, SIM card slot and speaker on the bottom.
In the hand, the OPPO Find X9 Pro does feel really good. It’s one of the best feeling phones in the hand in quite some time. Part of this comes down to the overall size as well. It measures in at 161.3 x 76.5 x 8.3mm thick, which is actually pretty small. And that’s despite having a 6.78-inch display. Remember the bezels are incredibly thin here, we’re looking at about 1.15mm.
If you’ve used an OPPO phone before, then you know what to expect from the build quality. Which is a pretty incredible feeling piece of tech in the hand, that feels nice and solid as well.
OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Display
Moving onto the display, this display looks incredible and offers thin bezels with insane brightness. We’re looking at a 6.78-inch display here, with 1.15mm thick bezels, and up to 3,600nits of peak brightness – or 1,800nits in high brightness mode. That said, I’ve not had any issues seeing this display outdoors, and no one should, even in direct sunlight.
The color reproduction on this panel is also incredible. It’s truly one of the best displays I’ve seen in quite some time on a smartphone. I truly enjoyed watching content on this display, even on YouTube and Netflix.
Auto brightness also works very well here, though, we haven’t really had that issue in quite some time, on phones. It stayed nice and bright, whenever i needed it, and dimmed when I was in a dark room as expected.
OPPO has absolutely nailed this display.
OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Performance
The number one thing I was excited to check out with the Find X9 Pro was the performance. You see, this is the first device I’ve used with the new MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chipset inside. OPPO told us in our briefing that this chip was about 55% more efficient versus the Dimensity 9400 in the Find X8 series, which is quite incredible, since that was already a crazy efficient chip. And, well that appears to be true. We’ll touch on that more in the battery life section, however.
In day-to-day usage, the OPPO Find X9 Pro did perform quite well. I never noticed it getting hot, nor slowing down. In fact, as a little teaser for our battery life test video that’s coming soon, the OPPO Find X9 Pro stayed significantly cooler than the Find X8 Pro. We’re talking double digits lower.
So performance is top-notch here, and we’d expect nothing less from OPPO and ColorOS 16.
Benchmarks
Now, we gotta talk benchmarks. This is running the Dimensity 9500 with 16GB of RAM, so we’re expecting some good numbers here, and we got just that. To be clear, each benchmark was run in “Performance mode” and after the device had cooled down to about room temperature (around 72 degrees Fahrenheit), to make sure the numbers were accurate.
Device
Geekbench CPU Single
Geekbench CPU Multi
Geekbench GPU
OPPO Find X9 Pro
3,483
10,344
29,999
OPPO Find X8 Pro
2,790
8,285
21,502
Google Pixel 10 Pro XL
2,267
6,034
2,948
First up is Geekbench 6. This test will test out the raw performance of the CPU in single- and multi-core tests, as well as the GPU. This is a great way to see the raw performance compared to other devices.
Here, we are comparing it to the Find X8 Pro from last year which had the Dimensity 9400, as well as the new Pixel 10 Pro XL with its Tensor G5 inside. As we can see, the Dimensity 9500 is quite a bit faster than the Dimensity 9400 was. About 24% in single-core and about 25% in multi-core. While the Tensor G5 just got destroyed.
Device
AnTuTu Score
OPPO Find X9 Pro
3,403,118
OPPO Find X8 Pro
2,552,179
Google Pixel 10 Pro XL
1,240,243
Next up is AnTuTu. This test will test well, basically every aspect of the phone. From the CPU, to RAM, to battery and everything in between. We got our highest score ever on AnTuTu here, if we don’t count reference devices. So quite impressive, almost 1 million higher than the Find X8 Pro.
The last benchmark we run here is a video export benchmark. What we do is, we load up a 60-second video into Capcut and then export it at 4K60, timing how long it takes to export. For most phones, this is incredibly fast. But the Find X9 Pro did struggle here with a time of 14.2 seconds. That’s more than double the Find X8 Pro’s time and the Pixel 10 Pro XL. This makes me think there’s going to be an update to address video rendering times for the Find X9 series in the future.
Thermals
Now, let’s move onto thermals. We have a slew of tests that we run on each device, to test out how hot they get. The first one is 3D Mark Wildlife Extreme Stress Test. This test is designed to push your device to its absolute limit and does show us how much the device will throttle. With the Find X9 Pro, we’re looking at a pretty good result here, at 112.4 degrees Fahrenheit. Yes, it is higher than the Find X8 Pro, but it also had better stability and much less throttling.
Next up is Genshin Impact. We run this at full brightness and max graphics settings for an hour and then measure the temperature. For most phones, it says under 100 degrees, and that’s the case again here, coming in at 92.4.
Device
Genshin Impact
Camera 4K60 – 5Min
Camera 4K60 – 10Min
OPPO Find X9 Pro
92.4
86.4
87.8
OPPO Find X8 Pro
95.6
92.8
95.7
Google Pixel 10 Pro XL
105.8
94.6
98.7
Finally, we do a camera test, where we record 4K60 video for 10 minutes, taking the temperature at 5 minutes and again at 10 minutes. We actually got some of the lowest temps ever on this test, at just 87.8 degrees after ten minutes. So good job, OPPO, on the cooling here.
OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Battery Life and Charging
When it comes to battery life, you won’t be surprised to hear this, but this 7,500mAh capacity battery does last quite a long time. It’s definitely a two, maybe three day phone for most people. Even for heavy users. During normal use for me, it’s hard to use more than 20% in a single day.
Now, I did take this to the Lady Gaga concert in London, which OPPO invited a group of us too (OPPO paid for it and covered food, lodging, and transportation), despite taking videos and photos for over three hours, the phone still had 20% left after that long day.
Another example is when I went to New York City for a pre-briefing on the Galaxy XR. I used the Find X9 Pro as my main camera for that event. That included taking a boatload of photos and videos as well as communicating with the team on Slack and handling emails, etc. Still, after the end of the day, I was down to 40%. Most phones would have needed a charge halfway through, so that is quite impressive.
Unfortunately, we did not get a charger in the box. I believe that this is becuase its the EU model. And in Europe, you can only include USB-C chargers in the box, which OPPO (and OnePlus) are still doing USB-A. But, I have plenty of OPPO chargers and OnePlus chargers at home, so that wasn’t a big deal. We’re still looking at the same charging speeds, but a much larger battery, so charging is slower overall. But for me, I usually plug it in overnight and unplug in the morning so that’s not a problem for me.
Benchmarks
Now, let’s talk benchmarks. For the battery, we charge the phone to 100%, set the brightness to about 150 nits and unplug it while it’s playing a YouTube video nonstop until it dies. On the OPPO Find X9 Pro, it performed quite well in this test. But I was expecting it to do a bit better, to be honest.
Device
Battery Life Time
OPPO Find X9 Pro
24 hrs, 28 mins
OPPO Find X8 Pro
25 hrs, 30 mins
Google Pixel 10 Pro XL
23 hrs, 43 mins
Moving onto charging, the Find X9 Pro was slower than the Find X8 Pro as expected. After all, it does have a 26% larger battery this year – just let that sink in for a moment. Still, it only took 10 more minutes to fully charge it.
Device
Charging time
OPPO Find X9 Pro
1 hr, 6 mins
OPPO Find X8 Pro
56 mins
Google Pixel 10 Pro XL
1 hr, 19 mins
And finally, we did a side-by-side battery test with several apps to see how much better the Find X9 Pro performs over the Find X8 Pro, and it blew it away. You can see that test below.
OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Software
The Find X9 Pro is the first to launch with OPPO’s version of Android 16, which is ColorOS 16. And the company is really focusing on “smoothness” here. Not like ColorOS wasn’t already incredibly smooth, but now it is even more smooth. It’s actually really incredible just how smooth this software is.
Not only has OPPO cleaned up the code base, but also made changes to the animations to make them feel smoother. Parallel Animation debuted in ColorOS 15 last year, and now it has evolved into Seamless Animation. Which extends that parallel capability across the entire OS, to make it feel even more responsive and visually connected.
For most people, you likely wouldn’t notice a difference between ColorOS 15 and ColorOS 16, I barely noticed a difference, to be quite honest. But it does add support for Aqua Dynamics, which is basically Android’s version of the Dynamic Island. Of course, we do need apps to support, it, and very few do right now. But it does look quite nice.
One of the bigger features you’ll find here, actually debuted on the OnePlus 13s earlier this year, and that’s Mind Space. The new AI Key on the left side activates Mind Space, and it works quite nicely. Did you find something you wanted to keep? Press the AI Key, and it’ll save that screenshot for you, analyze and it help you with the next step. For instance, I took a screenshot of the tweet from University of Michigan Football advertising their next game against Purdue. Mind Space was able to identify the game, location, time and even the game’s sponsor, which is not even identified as a sponsor on the poster.
Basically, Mind Space is like Google’s Pixel Screenshots on steroids. And the best part is, you don’t have to use it, if you don’t want to.
But that’s ColorOS 16. Even smoother and faster than ever before, and it’ll be rolling out to other OPPO devices very soon.
OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Camera
Finally, let’s talk about the camera. Personally, the most exciting feature for me, on Find X9 Pro. For the Primary sensor here, we’re looking at the Sony LYT-828 which is a 50-megapixel 1/1.28″ sensor size with a f/1.5 aperture. On paper, a pretty good lens, right? In practice, it’s a pretty good lens. Here are some samples from that primary sensor, as well as some that are cropped into 2x.
Then there’s the 50-megapixel Samsung 5KJN5, this is a pretty popular ultrawide lens for OnePlus and OPPO, and has been used for many years. So we know exactly what to expect here. It’s a decent lens, and for as rare as I use the ultrawide, it does the job.
Finally, the new addition. The 200-megapixel Samsung S5KHP5. This is a 1/1.56″ sensor size at 70mm and has a f/2.1 aperture. Because this is such a large sensor with so many megapixels, OPPO is cropping in for 6x and even up to 10x optically. Which means that the 6x telephoto lens is gone.
This telephoto lens is quite good though. I was able to get some really good shots at 3x, 6x, 10x even up to 30x. But like with most smartphone cameras, after around 30x, the pictures do look quite bad. But that’s where OPPO’s Teleconverter kit comes into play. Here’s some samples from the telephoto lens.
OPPO’s Hasselblad Teleconverter kit is a masterpiece
Obviously, a teleconverter kit like this is not new. Vivo actually launched one earlier this year with the X200 Ultra, but for OPPO, it is new. And I absolutely love this thing. It is a bit cumbersome to put on, and I hope that’s something that OPPO works on in the future. But being able to pop on this teleconverter lens and get a 10x optical zoom on your smartphone is really incredible.
You can get up to 40x optically, and up to 200x digitally. It works well up to about 60x, after that the photos do tend to fall apart.
It’s important to note, that right now the software is still a bit early, and so after you go up past 40x, the camera does freeze and crash. Hopefully that’s something that OPPO fixes rather soon. Also important to note, that after you put the teleconverter lens on, you do need to switch over the teleconverter mode in the settings. It doesn’t switch over automatically, unfortunately.
Should you buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro?
It’s hard to say if you should buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro. There’s a lot of things at play here. For instance, I do not know pricing, but if it is competitive, then it is definitely a good option. If you have the Find X8 Pro, it might not be a worthwhile upgrade. Find X7 Pro and earlier, definitely worth it.
This is a pretty incredible device, and one that I really, really wish was available in the US. But I have been using it on T-Mobile (Google Fi) here in the US for the past month, and it does work pretty well. So you can import it if you’d like.
You should buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro if
You want a great Hasselblad camera experience (OnePlus no longer has Hasselblad).
You want some of the best battery life you’ve ever experienced.
You want a great software experience with ColorOS 16.
You should not buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro if:
You live in the US (import fees will make this much less competitive).
Samsung’s Galaxy S25 Edge is the company’s thinnest phone, and as of right now, it has a price that’s almost as thin as its design, thanks to Amazon’s currently available deal. With a price that’s nearly as low as it was during Amazon’s October Prime Day, this is definitely a deal you probably want to take advantage of, especially since this deal is for the 512GB model, making this the all-time low price for this variant. The Galaxy S25 Edge can now be picked up for $729.99. While that’s not quite as low as the $689.99 price from a few weeks ago, you’re getting double the storage for almost the same cost. The 512GB model also usually costs $1,219.99, so this is almost $500 off.
If you like the Galaxy S25 series but wanted a phone that was thinner than any of those three models, the Galaxy S25 Edge is that device. It features the best parts of the Galaxy S25 Ultra but with a lower price and a thinner body. That includes the 200MP main camera, as well as all of the Galaxy AI smarts. Another important distinction to make is that the storage amount is 512GB. This is only $40 away from the price of the 256GB model a few weeks ago. That’s truly where the value lies in this deal.
The Galaxy S25 Edge is running on Android 15 but should be getting the upgrade to Android 16 soon enough. You’ll still get plenty of awesome features out of the box, though. For instance, the Morning Brief, Midday Brief, and Evening Brief will lay out key pieces of information about your day during those times. It’s pretty useful if you like to compartmentalize your day.
Less than two weeks after announcing the Find X9 series in China, OPPO is now announcing it for the rest of the world. This is a huge change of events for OPPO, as typically the Chinese launch comes many months ahead of the global launch – not 12 days before.
The launch event took place in Barcelona today, where they announced the Find X9 and Find X9 Pro, both of which use the MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chipset. This does not include the Find X9 Ultra, unfortunately, which will likely launch in the Spring.
OPPO is touting this phone as “The Ultimate Concert Phone,” and a big reason for that is the massive 200MP 3x telephoto sensor on the back. This year, instead of having a 3x and a 6x telephoto, there’s just a single telephoto sensor. However, since it is so large and has so much resolution, OPPO is able to sensor crop to get 6x optically and even 10x. And digitally up to 120x.
Unlike OnePlus, OPPO is sticking with Hasselblad this year, so the cameras are all tuned by Hasselblad, including the Teleconverter kit. This includes a 10x telephoto camera that snaps onto the back of the OPPO Find X9 Pro for some really incredible photos.
The main sensor is the Sony LYT-828 sensor, which is a 1/1.28″ sensor size and 50 megapixels. Providing for some really great photos, even at 1x as well as a sensor-cropped 2x.
Both phones pack over 7,000mAh batteries
This seems to be the generation that will see loads of 7,000mAh-capacity phones. We’ve already seen the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max with a 7,500mAh battery, the OnePlus 15 was announced with a 7,300mAh and now OPPO is doing the same. It uses the same size batteries around the world, including in Europe.
The OPPO Find X9 has a 7,025mAh battery while the Find X9 Pro has a 7,500mAh capacity battery. These are both about 25% larger versus their predecessors. Combine that with the 55% improvement in efficiency with the Dimensity 9500 and you have a recipe for incredible battery life.
Both the Find X9 and Find X9 Pro will be available globally beginning in early November. With the Find X9 coming in 12GB/256GB, 12GB/512GB and 16GB/512GB. While the Find X9 Pro is offered in 16GB/512GB globally. OPPO has not yet announced pricing.
OnePlus announced its new flagship smartphone, the OnePlus 15, in China, its homeland. It is coming to global markets, but we’ll have to wait a bit before that happens. Therefore, at this point in time, we still haven’t reviewed the phone, but we can compare it to its predecessor. For more information, however, you’ll have to wait for our review, which will come after the global launch. For the time being, we’ll stick to the facts. In this article, we’ll compare the OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13.
As per usual, we’ll kick things off with the spec sheets of both phones and work our way from there. We’ll be comparing their designs, displays, performance-related details, battery setups, camera offerings, and the last is the audio section. Let’s get to it, shall we?
The OnePlus 15 does look notably different than its predecessor, that’s hard to deny. Still, there are a lot of similarities between the two phones. From the front, they do look very similar. The corner curvature is a bit more pronounced on the new model. Both smartphones have flat displays, but the OnePlus 15 does not have the quad-curved glass approach of the OnePlus 13. It’s flat flat now. Both devices have a centered display camera hole up top, and thin, uniform bezels around the display. The thing is, those bezels are thinner on the OnePlus 15, they’re only 1.15mm thick.
Both devices have flat frames, but still different. The OnePlus 13 includes chamfered edges, and a smaller flat surface. The OnePlus 15’s frame does curve towards the edges, but only slightly. The power/lock and volume up and down buttons sit on the right-hand side of both smartphones. The OnePlus 13 also has an alert slider on the left. Well, that slider has been replaced by a customizable button on the OnePlus 15, even though it sits in the same spot as the slider.
If we flip them two phones around, you’ll see notably different backplates. The OnePlus 13’s backplate does curve on all sides, the same as the glass on the front. The OnePlus 15’s is flat, and it only curves slightly towards the very edges. The camera islands are also different, OnePlus went from a circular one, to a squarish one. They also look notably different. The OnePlus 15 also doesn’t come in an eco leather variant, unlike the OnePlus 13. All models of the OnePlus 15 have glass on the back.
The new model is slightly shorter, slightly wider, and slightly thinner. The weight of the two phones is basically the same, there’s only a slight difference. Both devices also offer outstanding water and dust resistance ratings, though the OnePlus 15 has the upper hand in that area as well.
OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Display
The OnePlus 15 features a 6.78-inch LTPO AMOLED display, which is flat. It can project up to 1 billion colors, and its refresh rate goes up to 165Hz, but only during gaming. Dolby Vision is supported, as is HDR10+ content, and HDR Vivid. High-frequency PWM dimming is also a feature here, while the display can get immensely bright when needed. The screen-to-body ratio is at around 91% here, while the resolution is 2772 x 1272. The display aspect ratio is 19.5:9, while we still don’t have any information regarding display protection.
OnePlus 13
The OnePlus 13, on the other hand, has a 6.82-inch LTPO AMOLED display, which is flat with a curved glass on top of it. This display can also project up to 1 billion colors, and it has an adaptive refresh rate (1-120Hz). It has high-frequency PWM dimming, Dolby Vision, HDR10+, and HDR Vivid support. The peak brightness is immensely high, while the screen-to-body ratio is at around 90%. The resolution here is 3168 x 1440, while the Ceramic Guard glass protects the display.
There’s really not much to complain about here, if anything. Both displays are large, vivid, offer great viewing angles, and have good touch response. Both of them are also very sharp and can get very bright when you need them to. The OnePlus 13’s is a bit sharper, but that’s not something you’ll notice at all. The OnePlus 15’s display allows you to utilize a higher refresh rate in games. You’ll be fine with either of these two panels, in all honesty. Just note that we still didn’t test out the OnePlus 15’s display at this point, more info is coming in our review. On paper, though, it looks great.
OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Performance
The OnePlus 15 is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor, Qualcomm’s latest and greatest chip. That processor is boosted by 12GB or 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.1 flash storage. The OnePlus 13, on the flip side, utilizes the Snapdragon 8 Elite chip, along with LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. Neither phone supports storage expansion, in case you were wondering.
The OnePlus 13 didn’t really slow down over time. The phone still offers outstanding performance, though, granted, it launched back in January (global version). We’re expecting something similar from the OnePlus 15, too. That phone offers an extremely powerful spec sheet, even more powerful than the OnePlus 15. Not only is the SoC more powerful, but the storage is faster. We’ll have to test it out to be sure.
The OnePlus 13 did great with gaming, as it is not only immensely powerful, but it also has proper cooling. Based on the specs, the OnePlus 15 should be able not only to match that, but do even better than the OnePlus 13. Once again, we’ll have to wait and see, but based on past models, we’re not expecting problems in the gaming department, not at all.
OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Battery
The OnePlus 15 features a 7,300mAh battery on the inside, while the OnePlus 13 includes a 6,000mAh battery. To put things into perspective, the OnePlus 13 already has a large battery for its size, let alone the OnePlus 15. Both of those battery packs are silicon-carbon batteries, too, by the way. The OnePlus 13 offers great battery life, so we do have high hopes for the OnePlus 15, too.
We still didn’t get around to testing its battery, as the global model is not official yet at this point, but it has a more power-efficient SoC, storage, and a notably larger battery. The OnePlus 15 should be able to beat the OnePlus 13 in the battery life department, easily. Whether that will happen, we’ll see, but that’s what we expect to happen. That’s the only scenario that makes sense based on everything. Either way, you shouldn’t really worry about battery life on either phone, OnePlus made sure it’s all good in that department.
The OnePlus 15 does support slightly faster charging than its predecessor, 120W vs 100W wired charging. If we had to guess, we’d say that they’ll charge in about the same time. Larger battery and faster charging in the OnePlus 15 should even things out. Do note that users in the US will get 80W wired charging, almost certainly, just like they did with the OnePlus 13. Both smartphones also support 50W wireless charging and 5W reverse wired charging.
OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Cameras
The OnePlus 15 has three 50-megapixel cameras on the back, just like the OnePlus 13. The thing is, all three of those cameras have smaller sensors, not to mention that Hasselblad is not a part of the picture anymore. We still didn’t do our full-fledged camera test on the OnePlus 15, but on paper, things are not looking great. In fact, the OnePlus 13 does seem to have a better camera setup than the OnePlus 15.
OnePlus 15
The OnePlus 15 features a 50-megapixel main camera (1/1.56-inch sensor size), along with a 50-megapixel ultrawide unit (1/2.88-inch sensor size, 116-degree FoV). The third camera on the back is a 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera (1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom).
The OnePlus 13, on the other hand, uses a 50-megapixel main camera (1/1.43-inch sensor size), a 50-megapixel ultrawide camera (1/2.75-inch sensor size, 120-degree FoV), and a 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera (1/1.95-inch sensor size, 3x optical zoom). On top of that, Hasselblad is a part of the picture, not to mention that the aperture on the main and periscope telephoto cameras is wider on the OnePlus 13.
We do already have some camera samples of the OnePlus 15 out there, in case you’d like to check those out. As things stand at the moment, the OnePlus 13 could take the win in that department, we’ll see.
Audio
Both of these phones include stereo speakers. The ones on the OnePlus 13 are actually really good. They’re not only plenty loud, but offer good quality output as well. We’re hoping to get something similar out of the OnePlus 15.
Neither phone has an audio jack, but you can connect your headphones via their Type-C ports. The newer phone includes Bluetooth 6.0 for wireless audio connectivity, while the OnePlus 13 supports Bluetooth 5.4.
Earlier this year, Google announced its latest Wear OS 6 update for its Pixel Watch lineup. However, when it comes to legacy wearables, only the Pixel Watch 2 and 3 got the update. This means that the original Pixel Watch is still stuck at Wear OS 5. However, if you own the original Pixel Watch, we have good news as Google has released the October 2025 update for it.
Pixel Watch gets October 2025 update
According to Google, it says that all eligible original Pixel Watch devices should get the October 2025 update starting today. “The rollout will continue over the coming weeks in phases depending on carrier and device. Users will receive a notification on their watch once the software update becomes available.”
Before you get too excited, no, the update isn’t bringing about new features. Instead, according to Google, the update is focused more on security updates and bug fixes. So, if you’re still holding onto the OG Pixel Watch, keep an eye out for this update. Hopefully, it should fix any bugs you might be encountering on the phone.
Also, it’s worth noting that the smartwatch is guaranteed at least 3 years of updates. This means that the October 2025 is the last guaranteed update you’ll get. This doesn’t mean that Google won’t release updates in the future. It is possible that the company could release an emergency update if there are any critical issues. But moving forwards, you probably shouldn’t expect anything else.
How to update your Pixel Watch
As Google said, the rollout will take place over the coming weeks. This means if you don’t see the update available right now, don’t worry, it should eventually make its way to you. However, if you want to check if there’s an update available, it’s pretty easy. Just go to Settings > System > System updates. Tap on the “Your watch is update to date” screen multiple times to initial the download.
Once that’s done, just update your watch and you’re good to go. While the original Pixel Watch has been around for a few years, it’s still a very viable smartwatch. If you’re just looking for a smartphone companion for your wrist, it’s more than sufficient. Otherwise, you might want to consider upgrading to the Pixel Watch 4.
Earlier this month, Honor unveiled its latest flagship smartphone, the Honor Magic8 series. However, if you thought that the company was done with phones for the rest of the year, think again. According to the details, Honor could be working on an Ultra version of the Magic8 series.
Honor Magic8 Ultra details revealed
In a post on Weibo, tipster Digital Chat Station dropped some hints on the details we can expect from the Honor Magic8 Ultra. The post claims that the phone, like the rest of the Magic8 lineup, will be powered by the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite 5 chipset. It will also feature a 6.71-inch 1.5K LTPO quad-curved screen, support for 3D face recognition, and a built-in 3D ultrasonic fingerprint sensor.
As for the cameras, the post claims that Honor is testing use of of OmniVision’s OV50R main camera. It is also rumored to feature a 5,000W ultra-high dynamic range solution, and a new large-bottom periscope telephoto lens. As for the battery, Digital Chat Station says it will start with the “7” figure. To be honest, at this point, we’re not sure other than the cameras, how different the Ultra version is compared to the rest of the lineup.
However, it seems to be part of Chinese phone makers strategy, which is to release Ultra-variants of their phones. So far, we know of phones like the Xiaomi 17 Ultra, Oppo Find X9 Ultra, and the Vivo X300 Ultra. So it looks like Honor is joining in on the fun.
Contradicting reports
That being said, we should point out that the recent post does contradict some earlier reports. According to past reports, the Magic8 Ultra might actually use the MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chipset. Also, while some expect the phone to be announced by the end of the year, some suggest it could launch in the first half of 2026.
In any case, we should have more details in the coming months. But in the meantime, if you’d rather not wait, the Honor Magic8 Pro is already quite the powerhouse. It might be worth checking out if you’re in the market for a new phone.
OnePlus recently took the wraps off its latest flagship smartphone over in China. This came in the form of the OnePlus 15. But it turns out OnePlus isn’t done with new phones just yet. According to the rumors, the company is working on a phone called the OnePlus Turbo. Now, thanks to a report by Smartprix, the OnePlus Turbo specs have been revealed.
OnePlus Turbo specs revealed
According to the rumors, the OnePlus Turbo is meant to be a gaming smartphone. Based on the rumored specs of the OnePlus Turbo, there is one major difference between it and the OnePlus 15: battery.
The OnePlus 15 comes with a 7,300mAh battery, which is already impressive. However, the report claims that the OnePlus Turbo could pack an even larger battery, going up to a whopping 8,000mAh. This, combined with the 100W charging, will make the phone an endurance beast.
However, since the focus is more on performance, OnePlus could dial back on the cameras. The rumors are saying we can look forward to a dual camera setup on the back. This will consist of a 50MP main shooter and an 8MP ultrawide. This is compared to the OnePlus 15, which sports a triple 50MP camera setup on the back.
As for the rest of the phone, it appears to be more or less identical to its flagship sibling. We’re talking about a ~6.7-inch 1.5K OLED display with a 165Hz refresh rate. We’re also looking at the use of the Snapdragon 8 Elite 5. So, like we said, the major difference here is in its battery. If you don’t really care too much about cameras, then the OnePlus Turbo could make a good alternative to the OnePlus 15, especially if battery life is a big deal for you.
Coming not so soon
Smartprix claims that their source told them the handset is currently being tested in India. If testing goes to plan, the OnePlus Turbo could launch in the next two months. This is an odd time for a release towards the end of the year. However, OnePlus might be able to catch a break.
Samsung typically launches its new flagships in January. This means if OnePlus launches it in December, it would have very little time before Samsung takes over the news cycle. However, last we heard, Samsung could delay the launch of the Galaxy S26 to March 2026.
After releasing almost every detail of the Pixel 10 series ahead of the official launch in August, we’re back at it again with the upcoming Pixel 10a. There have been rumors that the Pixel 10a would launch before the end of 2025, but given where we are in the rumor mill, we don’t believe that is accurate. We do believe it’ll launch in early 2026.
With that said, we have official renders based on CADs for the Pixel 10a. And to your surprise, it doesn’t look that different versus the Pixel 9a. Unfortunately, this blue color might not be real, but we’d love for Google to use it.
Google Pixel 10a CAD Renders
We have three CAD renders to show off here. This shows different angles of the Pixel 10a, which look identical to the Pixel 9a. Now, unfortunately, we can’t confirm or deny if there is a SIM card slot on the Pixel 10a, since that detail is typically not included in CAD renders. It is included in the CAD render here, but that doesn’t confirm that it will be available on the final model when that launches.
As you can see from these renders, Google is sticking with what looks to be a plastic back that is completely flat and flush with the camera module. Google is also sticking with a dual-camera setup on the rear, and some rather thick bezels on the front. The volume rocker continues to be below the power button – the opposite of almost every Android phone on the market.
There are antenna lines on the sides, top and bottom. With a microphone hole at the top as well as the bottom. It also looks like Google has made the bottom symmetrical with the speaker and microphone holes.
Google Pixel 10a Specifications (rumored)
We’re currently pretty early in the rumor mill for the Pixel 10a, so the specs haven’t surfaced as much. But we do know that it’ll be roughly the same physical size as Pixel 9a. With a 6.2-inch display and dimensions of 153.9 x 72.9 x 9mm. That’s actually rather thick compared to a lot of other phones on the market today.
There is also a rumor that is pointing to the Pixel 10a using the Tensor G4 (same as Pixel 9a) instead of the newer Tensor G5 in the Pixel 10 series. This could be due to the cost of the Tensor G5, since it is a TSMC-manufactured chip and does cost significantly more than the Tensor G4 did. This is said to be a “boosted” Tensor G4, likely a higher clocked chipset.
Last year, Google surprised us with the Pixel 9a, outfitting it with a 5,100mAh battery. Since the phone is actually thicker, we are expecting an even larger battery this year. But, I don’t think many would complain about a 5,100mAh battery on Pixel 10a either, considering battery life was so great on the 9a.
Google should stick with the same cameras again this year, and it’ll also have 7 years of software support. Pricing should also remain almost identical to last year, at $499 for 128GB of storage.
How will it compare to the Pixel 9a?
From what we know so far about the Pixel 10a, it’s going to be almost identical to the Pixel 9a. Perhaps slightly better performance, WiFi signal, and battery life. That would likely be about it here. Along with some new colors, but that doesn’t really determine whether you’d buy it or not.
Above, you can see how similar these two look side-by-side. Really, the only way to tell them apart is going to be the colors. Though, bezels do look significantly smaller this year. We’ll have to wait for the final renders to see if that is indeed the case, as CADs are usually approximate, and not always 100% correct.
Google Pixel 10a vs Pixel 9a Spec Comparison
As mentioned, specs haven’t really surfaced all that much yet for the Pixel 10a. So we’ve compiled what we’ve seen rumored so far, and speculated with the rest, given what we can see in these CADs, as well as how often Google sticks with the same specs.
Editor’s Note: Everything that is speculated for the Pixel 10a is denoted with an asterisk.
Google Pixel 9a
Google Pixel 10a
Google Pixel 9a
Google Pixel 10a
Dimensions
154.7 x 73.3 x 8.9mm
153.9 x 72.9 x 9.0mm
Weight
186g
186 grams*
Display
6.3-inch FHD+ 120Hz P-OLED
6.2-inch FHD+ 120Hz P-OLED
Refresh rate
60-120Hz (adaptive)
60-120Hz (adaptive)*
Resolution
2424 x 1080
2424 x 1080*
Chipset
Google Tensor G4
Google Tensor G4 (boosted)
RAM
8GB
8GB*
Storage
128GB/256GB
128GB/256GB*
Main camera
48MP (f/1.7 aperture, 1/2.0″ sensor size)
48MP (f/1.7 aperture, 1/2.0″ sensor size)*
Ultra-wide camera
13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 120-degree FOV)
13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 120-degree FOV)*
Selfie camera
13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 1/3.1″ sensor size)
13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 1/3.1″ sensor size)*
Battery size
5,100mAh
5,100mAh*
Charging
23W wired, 7.5W wireless
23W wired, 7.5W wireless*
Colors
Obsidian, Porcelain, Iris, Peony
N/A
View Specifications
When will the Google Pixel 10a launch?
Of course, the biggest question of all is, when will the Google Pixel 10a launch? There was a wacky rumor about a month ago that claimed the Pixel 10a would launch before the end of 2025. Which we do not believe. Here’s why.
To launch the Pixel 10a before the end of the year would be a really bad decision, especially in the US. Really anything launched after October is a terrible idea because of holiday shopping. On top of that, all of the new flagships with Qualcomm and MediaTek’s new chips are launching at this time. So it would get buried. But if we take the holidays out of the equation, we are just not seeing images of the Pixel 10a. This usually happens about 6 months ahead of the actual launch. Which means we’re likely gonna see a March or April launch once again.
Device
Announcement Date
Release Date
Google Pixel 9a
March 19, 2025
April 10, 2025
Google Pixel 8a
May 7, 2024
May 14, 2024
Google Pixel 7a
May 10, 2023
May 10, 2023
As you can see from the previous release dates, the Pixel 10a is likely going to launch in March. The Pixel 9a was delayed a bit because they found an issue with manufacturing which delayed the device’s shipping by a couple of weeks. So very unlikely that the Pixel 10a will launch in 2025; however, Google has been adjusting the release timelines for its devices and software lately.
During a global conference on 6G, which is currently ongoing in Korea, Samsung had some interesting things to say. Lee Ju-Ho, a fellow at Samsung Research, said that the changes 6G will bring “cannot be expressed in numbers.”
Samsung envisions a 6G future with major changes and AI involvement
He also added: “we must change the direction of the technology” in order to illustrate the benefits of 6G. On top of all that, Lee Ju-Ho also said: “We will find it difficult to solve the various problems we face by emphasizing only the peak performance of the 4G and 5G era.”
Samsung doesn’t think that hyping up 6G’s numbers is the way to go. The hype around 5G’s performance gains, higher connection speeds, lower latency, and so on, were not the right call.
Lee Ju-Ho believes that the advantages for 6G will be “qualitative”, while he referred to native AI a “key feature of 6G”. He added that AI will be essential to “solve previously impossible realities.”
It seems like Samsung believes that reliability, energy efficiency, and security will be key for 6G, along with AI, of course. Lee Ju-Ho said that 6G will benefit an aging population and those who live on their own. How? Well, for one, self-learning AI is expected to manage the network and also fix certain problems on its own.
He added that Integrated Sensing and Communication (ISAC), where sensors in the network create real-time spatial awareness, could be used in autonomous transport. That’s just another example.
Samsung wants to focus on real-world benefits
Samsung obviously wants to focus on real-world and social benefits, rather than hyping up numbers. Well, at least that’s what we got from what Lee Ju-Ho said during this global conference.
As a reminder, the first commercial industry standard for 6G is expected to arrive in 2029.
Yes, it’s true that many companies went out of business during the pandemic, and many people lost their jobs. However, the tech industry actually saw a surge in hirings. But it looks like that hiring spree is coming to a head. According to a report from Reuters, Amazon could be looking to conduct corporate layoffs.
Amazon to conduct corporate layoffs
Based on the report, Amazon corporate layoffs could be the largest layoffs the company conducted since 2023. The Reuters report suggests that Amazon could be looking to layoff up to 30,000 corporate positions. This is higher than the 27,000 job cuts that the company had previously conducted.
30,000 positions seem like a lot, but to Amazon, that’s roughly 10% of its corporate workforce. This will cover various departments such as human resources, cloud computing, advertising, and more. However, the total number of staff reductions hasn’t been finalized yet, but for now, it is estimated to be around 30,000.
Is AI coming for our jobs?
Many companies, not just Amazon, conduct layoffs periodically as a way to cut costs. But when there’s a surge in demand, these companies tend to hire again. However, what’s worrying about the recent layoffs is that some of these positions may never be filled by humans again.
Amazon CEO Andy Jassy said back in June that some jobs will be cut because of AI. Jassy said at that time, “As we roll out more Generative AI and agents, it should change the way our work is done. We will need fewer people doing some of the jobs that are being done today, and more people doing other types of jobs.”
It is true that as AI becomes smarter and more capable that jobs that humans used to do may no longer be necessary. If an AI can generate reports and summarize information in minutes compared to the hours it takes a human, it makes sense who you’d rather keep from an efficiency point of view.
But this doesn’t necessarily mean that humans are doomed to be jobless. The rise of AI represents a new industry that we can transition to. As the saying goes, when one door closes, another opens.
Have you ever deleted an important text in Google Messages and instantly regretted it? Well, you are not alone. Right now, it’s not possible to recover a deleted message. But to address the concern, Google seems to be working on an undo button for its Messages app, making the texting experience safer.
Google is working on an Undo texting button for the Messages app
As reported by Android Authority, a new beta version of Google Messages hints at a new “trash” or “bin” folder. The concept of the new folder is pretty similar to what Gmail already has. When you delete a message, instead of completely disappearing right away, it might move to this trash folder. From there, you could have up to 30 days to recover it before it’s permanently deleted. This change would be a big relief for anyone who’s ever deleted an important text by accident.
Currently, deleting a message on the app is permanent. Once it’s gone, it’s gone for good. There’s literally no way to undo the task or bring back the text. And that’s what makes this upcoming feature so exciting. It finally addresses a problem that’s faced by almost everyone once in their life. Messages are also used for storing important bank texts or transaction SMS, and deleting them by mistake is the fear of many. The new option will finally address this fear.
Google aims for smarter and more reliable messaging services
The latest move confirms Google’s push to make the Messages app smarter and reliable. The app already lets users archive chats they want to hide without deleting them. But archiving isn’t enough when you want to bring back something you’ve completely removed. A new trash folder or undo delete option finally bridges that gap. It gives users better control over their texting experience. It solves a real problem faced by millions of users daily.
Apple might be planning some big changes for the iPhone’s 20th anniversary in 2027. According to the latest rumors out of China, Apple is planning to do away with mechanical buttons and use haptics instead. HTC actually tried this out many years ago, and it didn’t work out too well for them.
Why go with haptics versus mechanical buttons? For one, they use up less space inside the phone. Two, they are less likely to break as they don’t have moving parts. And of course, Apple is very proud of its Haptic Engine, so this would be another way for Apple to show that off.
This report is claiming that this is going to be the biggest design shake up for the iPhone since the 2017 iPhone X, which was Apple’s ten year anniversary for the iPhone. And it drastically changed the look of the iPhone.
iPhone’s 20th anniversary is still two years away
Despite all of the rumors we are seeing today about the 20th anniversary iPhone, it is still a solid two years away from launching. So we’re likely gonna see some more changes in the rumor mill before it actually launches in 2027. Apple is likely still actively working on it, and changing the hardware to meet whatever goals that they have.
There are also rumors about Apple using a wraparound display with the edges of the screen merging into the button zones. This is also something an Android OEM had tried in the past. Xiaomi did this many years ago too on a concept phone (a concept phone that was actually sold, however). Though, Xiaomi never followed up with another one, so it must not have done all that well.
The smartphone candy bar form factor has been around for more than a decade. But realistically, we don’t think the form factor is sticking around for the foreseeable future. That begs the question of, if not this form factor, then what? That’s something Motorola is exploring, according to a recently discovered patent that suggests a phone that can be worn as a watch.
Motorola has a patent for a phone that can be worn as a watch
Based on the patent images, it looks like Motorola has come up with an idea for a phone that can transform into a watch. Believe it or not, this is actually not the first time Motorola has come up with this idea. Back in 2023, the company took the wraps off a concept phone with a bendable display and body that can be bent around the wearer’s wrist.
However, there is a difference between Motorola’s concept and this patent. For starters, the patent suggests that the phone could feature some kind of retractable display. This means that when the display is fully retracted, it’s small enough to fit on your wrist. However, it can then be expanded to become a phone.
The patent talks about the frame structure needed to support the retractable design. However, it stops short of mentioning things like display size, connectivity options, battery, and most importantly, cameras. It’s actually a pretty cool concept on paper. But honestly, it seems unlikely that it will ever see the light of day.
While patents sometimes act as clues for what a company has planned for the future, it is never a guarantee that these patents become actual commercial products.
The future of communications
Like we said, we don’t think candy bar shaped smartphones are going to continue being the standard of mobile phone design. In fact, with the rise of AI, some believe that we may even transition to devices without a display.
We’ve already seen some companies attempt these AI-first devices, like Rabbit, and Humane. However, neither of these devices really took off. We’re also hearing that OpenAI’s Sam Altman is working with legendary former Apple designer, Jony Ive, to create some kind of communications device.
It’s too early to tell how that will turn out, but what do you think? What kind of device can you imagine replacing our smartphones in the future?
The Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 8 is tipped to bring some major improvements to the table. The information comes from DealSite, as the source claims the Galaxy Z Fold 8 will get a major battery boost.
The Galaxy Z Fold 8 could bring major improvements, including a battery boost
It is said to feature a 5,000mAh battery, a considerable upgrade from the 4,400mAh battery inside the Galaxy Z Fold 7. For comparison’s sake, the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 competitors have larger battery packs. The OPPO Find N5, for example, comes with a 5,600mAh battery, and it offers a lot better battery life.
The battery life boost is not the only improvement mentioned, though. Samsung is also aiming to improve the display crease situation. The company plans to adopt the so-called laser-drilled metal plate technology. Apple will use something similar for its foldable iPhone.
Another area of improvement is mentioned in the report… the stylus. The Galaxy Z Fold 8 will, allegedly, be compatible with a stylus. Samsung removed the stylus compatibility this year, with the Galaxy Z Fold 7, after first introducing it to its foldables back in 2021 with the Galaxy Z Fold 3.
Stylus support could also be making a comeback
Samsung made that move to make the Galaxy Z Fold 7 thinner. Well, it’s possible that the company figured out how to get the best of both worlds, which is why the Galaxy Z Fold 8 may get stylus support. It’s hard to imagine Samsung making its devices thicker just for the sake of stylus support.
The arrival of the first foldable iPhone may really push Samsung to make some major improvements to its book-style foldable. Competition is good, as it pushes innovation. The first foldable iPhone is tipped to arrive next year, though we may have to wait longer than that, it all depends on which rumor you choose to believe.
As a reminder, Samsung’s very first tri-fold smartphone made its first public appearance recently. It’s expected to get a full launch later this week, though nothing has been confirmed just yet.
AI is surely integrating itself into our daily lives. Gone are the days when we had to learn the whole Microsoft PowerPoint and Google Slides toolkit just for creating presentations. With the new update, Google is rolling out a new version of the Gemini tool that can create powerful presentations for you. All you have to do is type the prompt and upload relevant files, and the tool will then turn it into slides.
Google Gemini can now generate presentations from texts or files
The new update is now available for Gemini Pro users and is expected to be released to free users soon. Once updated, users can access the “Canvas” tab on the Gemini website, give it a topic or prompt, and attach relevant files. Gemini then generates a complete presentation based on the given input. It also matches the theme and visual effect throughout the slides for a more appealing and professional look.
Users can export the generated presentation directly to Google Slides. There, they can make small changes, such as editing text or rearranging slides. This makes it much easier for students, office workers, or anyone who needs to build a presentation fast.
Google says that the tool is backed by Gemini’s powerful AI
Google says that the Canvas feature uses the same AI that powers Gemini’s writing and reasoning abilities, but now applies to design and layout. The Canvas tool will show the instructions on one side and the results on the other. This process is done so that the user can see changes instantly. This side-by-side layout helps users easily adjust prompts to get better slides without switching screens.
Moreover, the feature is currently rolling out in batches. Only a limited group of users has access to the feature. A broader rollout is expected to take place in the coming days. You can log in to the Gemini website to see if the feature is available.
With so many smartphone makers getting rid of the charger in the box, it’s always a good idea to pick up a couple of spare chargers, because you really never know when you’ll need them. Thankfully, Amazon almost always has a lot of them available on sale. Here are the best USB-C chargers that are on sale right now.
Baseus 140W USB-C Charger
– $49.99
This charger has 140W of power with 3 USB-C and a USB-A port. It’s a GaN charger, making it much smaller than other chargers with the same power.
Buy from
Editor's Choice
Baseus Enercore CJ11
– $59
This charger has a retractable USB-C cable as well as two USB-C ports available for charging. With a total output of 67W.
Buy from
Anker 45W USB-C Charger
– $15.99
Charge up with this Anker USB-C charger at up to 45W, fast enough to max out the Galaxy S25 Ultra.
Buy from
Anker Nano 30W USB-C Charger
– $13.99
This tiny charger can charge at up to 30W, and its just $14.
Buy from
Editor's Choice
Baseus Nomos 8-in-1 Charging Station
– $42.99
This charging station is perfect for those with lots of devices to charge. With three AC outlets, 4 USB-C and a MagSafe wireless charger all available.
Buy from
Belkin 45W USB-C Charger
– $14.99
Belkin has its own USB-C PD3.1 PPS Fast Charger that can charge up to 45W, which will max out the Galaxy S25 Ultra.
Buy from
Editor's Choice
Anker 737 Power Bank
– $75
This massive power bank has 24,000mAh capacity battery that should keep you going for a few days.
Xiaomi introduced its next iteration of Android 16-based skin, the HyperOS 3, alongside the Xiaomi 15T series last month. It promised that the stable release would kick off starting from October. Standing on its promise, Xiaomi has now announced that the HyperOS 3 global rollout has begun with the Xiaomi 15T. The new version features a redesigned interface, AI enhancements, new system-wide animations, and privacy improvements.
Xiaomi’s HyperOS 3 global rollout begins
Xiaomi, on X, has announced that the global rollout of HyperOS 3 has kicked off, with the Xiaomi 15T series being the first wave of devices to receive the new version. The company mentioned that the update will hit users in a phased manner. This means you should see it hitting your devices over the next few days.
It’s possible that the Xiaomi 15T and 15T Pro users who signed up for the global beta program could be the first to receive the stable HyperOS 3. Meanwhile, the Xiaomi 15 series and Redmi K80 lineup were the first to receive the stable update in China.
HyperOS 3 brings a new design, AI enhancements, and more
Xiaomi clarified that it’s working hard to bring the HyperOS 3 update to more devices as per the global schedule. After the Xiaomi 15T series, the Xiaomi MIX Flip, the Redmi Note 14 series, the POCO F7 lineup, Xiaomi Pad 7 tablets, Xiaomi Pad Mini, and a range of wearables are set to get the update between October and November timelines.
The HyperOS 3 rollout will stretch through March 2026, with older models getting the update last. The new iteration brings HyperIsland, which shows live activities of apps and notifications for calls, music, charging, and schedules. It brings deeper Google Gemini integration for system-wide AI capabilities. It’s also improving data protection through Unified Authentication Service, on-device, and cloud privacy computing.
Samsung has just shown off its first tri-fold smartphone ahead of its launch. Sounds confusing? Well, it kind of is. The company showed off the device sitting under glass during the K-Tech Showcase in Korea.
The K-Tech Showcase is kind of a side event of the APEC Summit, which is taking place October 31-November 1. The phone is tipped to get a full reveal during the APEC Summit, so we could be only days away from that happening. This appearance at the K-Tech Showcase certainly points in that direction.
Samsung’s first tri-fold phone just made its first public appearance
In any case, the device is shown here, but only its front side, it could be reflective of a device that is coming soon. It’s shown in full unfolded, and fully folded formats. Several sources shared these images, and that includes Ice Universe and The Chosun. You can see the device in the gallery below.
When fully folded, the phone will feature a 6.5-inch display, allegedly, as shown above. When completely extended, you’ll get a 10-inch display to use. You’ll notice that a display camera hole is all unfolding levels, basically.
The phone will have a middle-of-the-road unfold state, too. It is expected to offer an 8-inch display in that state. So it’ll essentially be a tiny table when unfolded once.
The device is expected to launch soon, possibly later this week
This is what Samsung said to SamMobile, in a statement: “Samsung continues to advance innovative technologies, including next-generation form factors in the era of mobile AI, to deliver meaningful user experiences. The recent showcase reflects ongoing R&D efforts, and we plan to bring this next generation device to users within this year.”
From that statement, one might think Samsung is saying this is just a prototype, not the real thing. Well, it could be, though if the device is coming in only a couple of days, that doesn’t make much sense. Either way, Samsung once again confirmed that the real tri-fold announcement is right around the corner.
If you write with any large-language model, ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, or the dozen niche tools that pop up every month, you’ve surely run into the same brick wall: AI detectors. Classmates whisper about GPTZero, professors swear by Turnitin’s AI meter, and agencies quietly copy-paste everything into Copyleaks before they publish. Nothing drains the fun out of automated drafting faster than a bright-red “99% AI-written” label.
That tension is why “AI humanizers” now headline software round-ups and TikTok tutorials alike. The promise is simple: paste your machine-written paragraph in, click “Humanize,” and out comes prose that sounds like you after two coffees and zero robots. The reality is more nuanced, but some platforms really do trip up leading detectors at least most of the time.
Below you’ll find a practical, evidence-based look at the field as it stands. I’ve narrowed the spotlight to three tools that consistently beat GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks in independent side-by-side tests: Smodin: https://smodin.io/ai-humanizer, Undetectable.ai’s Rewrite module, and HIX Rewrite+ (formerly HIX Covert). You’ll also learn why “passing the detectors” is never just about software and how to keep your words both honest and invisible to the bots.
How AI Detectors Actually Flag Your Text
Before judging humanizers, it helps to know what they’re hiding. Modern detectors rely on two core signals:
– Statistical fingerprints. Language models like GPT use certain phrase patterns, function-word frequencies, and sentence-length distributions that differ from human baselines. Detectors train other models to spot those quirks.
– Burstiness vs. perplexity. Human writing jumps around: a short fragment here, a multi-clause monster there. AI tends to coast in a tighter range. Detectors score that smoothness as “low burstiness” and raise alarms.
Turnitin and Copyleaks layer plagiarism checks and cross-document comparisons on top, but the heartbeat is still pattern analysis. Break the patterns, and you drop the detection score.
The Three Front-Runners in 2025
After combing through dozens of platforms and running them against fresh detector builds released this fall, three names consistently floated to the top in both reliability and usability. Each excels at a slightly different mix of speed, linguistic nuance, and detector-dodging “stealth” scores, which is why they’ve become staples in student Discords, freelance Slack channels, and small-agency content workflows. Below you’ll find a closer look at what sets Smodin, Undetectable.ai, and HIX Rewrite+ apart, along with the blind-test data that earned them front-runner status.
Smodin AI Humanizer
Smodin bills itself as the Swiss Army knife of writing tools generator, paraphraser, detector, and, crucially, a “humanizer” that rewrites machine text to sound organic. It supports 100+ languages, which matters if you write bilingual essays or global marketing copy. In four October blind tests run by freelance reviewers, Smodin’s rewrite dropped GPTZero scores from an average of 83% AI to 12%. Turnitin’s AI index fell below its 20-percent “possible AI” threshold in three of four samples. Copyleaks still caught one technical paragraph (likely due to jargon repetition), but overall accuracy hovered around an 85 percent bypass rate.
Strengths:
– Solid at varying sentence length and inserting subtle contractions (“we’re,” “they’ve”) that detectors weigh heavily.
– Lets you highlight every change, so you can reverse anything that warps meaning.
– Reasonably priced: the current Writing plan is $15/month.
Weak spots:
– Long academic citations sometimes get truncated. Paste those back in manually.
– On ultra-formal papers, the tool adds a conversational tilt that editors may notice. Tone sliders help, but you still need a quick proofread.
Undetectable.ai Rewrite Module
Undetectable.ai surfaced in late 2024 and quickly won a cult following among copywriters. The company’s marketing flex: “0% AI on all major detectors, or we credit your account.” In practice, its success rate sits closer to 90 percent, but that’s still impressive.
How does it work? It adds “entropy layers,” essentially rewriting twice: once for semantics, once for randomness. You can crank an “Entropy” dial from 1 to 5; anything above 3 can begin to sound disjointed, but level 3 nearly always sneaks past GPTZero and Copyleaks. Turnitin remains the toughest nut; Undetectable.ai achieves a pass roughly four out of five tries.
Pros:
– Fast bulk mode: you can upload a 10,000-word white paper and get it back in under a minute.
HIX Write launched as a straight copy assistant in 2023. It’s 2025: Rewrite+ engine quietly became a detection-dodger’s secret weapon. The interface is minimal: paste, select “Covert,” pick a tone (academic, casual, narrative), and hit run. The server spins a hybrid model that blends lexical substitution with clause rearrangement. In public benchmarks hosted by the independent ReviewStack Lab (July 2025), HIX achieved the best Copyleaks evasion only one false flag in 30 runs, while tying Smodin on GPTZero.
Good news:
– Best at retaining stylistic nuance. If your original had rhetorical questions or semi-colons, they’re often preserved.
– Respectable free allotment: 5,000 words/month.
Bad news:
– Limited language options (only eight major tongues).
– No side-by-side change tracking; you need a diff tool if you’re paranoid.
Field Test: One Paragraph, Three Humanizers
To ground the numbers, let’s walk through a single paragraph about CRISPR agriculture, originally produced by GPT-4 Turbo. Raw text scored 98% AI on GPTZero, 89% on Turnitin, 91% on Copyleaks.
All three cleared the generic “likely human” threshold that most instructors use (usually 20-25%). The differences matter only if your reader scrutinizes every decimal. In real-world conditions, thousands of essays funneling into an LMS, any of these outputs would slip through.
What Separates a “Pass” from a Hard Fail
Even the best tool can’t cover every tell-tale sign on its own. Experienced editors and professors look for other giveaways long before they click “Check AI”:
– Sudden voice shift. If your intro sounds like Hemingway and your body reads like a textbook, suspicion spikes.
– Lack of personal anecdote. AI rarely invents believable micro stories (“I spilled coffee on my first draft at 2 a.m.”). Adding one can tilt judgment your way.
– Too-perfect structure. Flawless five-paragraph symmetry is another red flag. Humans ramble; sprinkle a side-thought here and there.
In short, humanizers defeat algorithmic pattern detectors, but they can’t import lived experience. That part is on you.
Choosing the Right Tool for Your Needs
Ultimately, the best pick hinges less on raw bypass percentages and more on your daily writing context, how many words you crank out, how frequently you switch languages, and how much polish you add by hand after the fact. Think of these humanizers as different gears on the same bike: one may climb academic hills effortlessly, another might zip through marketing flats, and a third offers an all-around ride with a lighter price tag. Keep that metaphor in mind as you weigh the options below.
– You value multilingual support and budget flexibility → Smodin.
– You need industrial-scale throughput and don’t mind tweaking entropy → Undetectable.ai.
– You care most about retaining voice and want a generous free tier → HIX Rewrite+.
All three update their models every few weeks because detectors evolve just as fast. A subscription that works today might falter next semester. Most creators, therefore, keep at least two accounts active and cross-check outputs before hitting “submit” or “publish.”
Final Takeaway
The headline question “Which AI humanizer passes GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks?” no longer has a single silver-bullet answer. Smodin, Undetectable.ai, and HIX Rewrite+ each clear the bar in late 2025, provided you use them thoughtfully. No guarantee of eternal invisibility; detectors will sharpen again, and the cat-and-mouse game will lurch forward.
The thing that will never change is the worth of real, captivating prose. These tools are not to conceal your thoughts, but to perfect your language. Combine machine efficiency and human touch, and you will always be a step further than algorithms and bored readers, regardless of what detectors are lurking on the other side of Submit.
It’s kind of funny. Back when OpenAI was first founded, Elon Musk and Sam Altman were thick as thieves. Both supposedly had a similar mission when it came to artificial intelligence. However, fast forward to today, and both parties appear to be bitter enemies. But despite their differences, they both seem to be working towards a similar goal. Elon Musk has Neuralink, and now Sam Altman is reportedly working on his own brain interface as well.
Sam Altman’s brain interface could rival Neuralink
According to The Verge’s Alex Heath in his Sources newsletter, it appears that OpenAI’s CEO, Sam Altman, is building his own brain interface that could rival that of Elon Musk’s Neuralink. The report claims that Altman has tapped Mikhail Shapiro, an award-winning biomolecular engineer.
Shapiro will join Merge Labs, which is a brain-computer interface startup by Altman and Alex Blania. At the moment, not much is known about what this company is about. However, based on Shapiro’s work, it suggests that Altman could leverage his expertise to create a device that could link to the human brain using noninvasive techniques. To be more specific, it could use sound waves.
This is based on a recent talk Shapiro gave, where he said that sound waves and magnetic fields could be used to create a brain-to-computer interface. If that’s true, it could make Altman’s startup a whole lot more attractive compared to Neuralink.
Neuralink’s approach
For those unfamiliar, Neuralink is a company founded by Musk. The company’s goal is to create a way for people to interact with their computers or phones using their thoughts. It sounds quite high-tech, almost sci-fi-like. However, the problem with Neuralink is that it’s not exactly the most user-friendly.
In order for Neuralink to work, the user has to undergo open-skull surgery. This is where the electrodes are implanted into the brain to allow the user to control their devices. Any type of brain surgery has its risks. But to ask someone to undergo surgery just so they have a hands-free way of using their computers? That’s a huge ask.
If Altman’s new startup can indeed create an interface that uses sound waves, it’s a no-brainer (pun intended) that more people might prefer.
Meta has been increasingly focused on Threads in the recent past, and it’s visible in how frequently it’s been adding new features to the platform. Early last month, the social media app announced long-form posts. As part of that feature, users can now post up to 10,000 characters in one go. Now, Threads is getting a “disappearing post” feature, which Meta calls “ghost posts.” Meta started testing this feature back in April, alongside other features that are now available on Threads.
All the replies to your ghost posts land in your Threads DMs
Threads’ new ghost posts feature enables you to share your thoughts or engage in conversation that vanishes after 24 hours. You’ll be able to create a ghost post on mobile by enabling the toggle that has the new “ghost” icon on the app’s compose screen. The feature is a handy addition for anyone who likes to post something but doesn’t want it to appear on their Threads profile.
Every time you publish a ghost post on Threads, others will see it having a dotted bubble around. This gives an idea to others that it’s a disappearing post. What’s interesting is that the replies on such posts land directly into your DMs and don’t appear on your timeline.
Another thing to note is that other Threads users can’t see the number of likes, replies, or the names of ghost post viewers. However, they can still see smiley-face icons below the disappearing posts. This gives an idea to people that others have replied to or liked the posts.
You can still revisit the post from the “archived” section
Not to forget, you can still check ghost posts from the “archived” section of the Threads’ settings menu. Think of this feature as Instagram Stories that are only available for 24 hours. Meta, in the announcement post, notes that this feature is for those who want to “share unfiltered thoughts and fresh takes without the pressure of permanence or polish. Here today and gone tomorrow, you can feel confident trying new things and posting spontaneous thoughts.”
Apple’s iPhone 18 series is still months away from seeing the light of day, but the rumor mill has started giving a glimpse of what’s to come. The iPhone 18 Pro models may gain satellite 5G support. Apple will also introduce a new A20/A20 Pro chip, which may significantly increase the prices of the phones. While that’s for hardware, a new leak sheds light on the iPhone 18 Pro design for the first time.
iPhone 18 Pro design details
Leaker Digital Chat Station has detailed what to expect in terms of the iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 17e designs. In a Weibo post talking about iPhone 18 Pro’s camera upgrades, the leaker in comments says the new model will feature the same rear camera design as this year’s iPhone 17 Pro. This means we’ll see the same large horizontal module taking up a large portion of the back panel.
This makes sense considering Apple just redesigned its flagship models this year, and it usually sticks to the same for at least a few years. It’s unclear whether the glass cutout below the module will see any changes. The leaker previously mentioned that it will have a slightly modified transparent look on the iPhone 18 Pro.
Furthermore, the leaker says that he hasn’t come across the design details for the iPhone 18 model yet.
No ProMotion display for the ‘e’ model yet
Moving to iPhone 17e, Digital Chat Station says the display will finally shift to Dynamic Island. In comparison, the current iPhone 16e uses a dated notch design. This should bring the low-cost iPhone more in line with the flagship models.
However, the display will only support a 60Hz refresh rate, as per the leaker. This isn’t surprising, as Apple brought ProMotion to the base iPhone 17 model only this year. We may have to wait at least another year before we see ProMotion for the budget ‘e’ model.
Gaming smartphones used to be an extremely niche product, and while they technically still are, there are a lot more phones out there these days that can be considered suitable gaming smartphones. Even if they aren’t marketed as such. With that in mind, consumers have more choices for a gaming smartphone than ever before. With more options comes more of a challenge in finding the best gaming smartphones available, because you have a higher chance of picking something that isn’t a good phone for gaming.
That being said, we’ve set out to find all the best gaming smartphones for you to make this process easier. There will be some obvious choices and some maybe not so obvious, but all of them will be viable for playing mobile games if that’s the kind of device you’re looking for.
Here are the best gaming smartphones you can buy in 2025.
Best Gaming Smartphone
If you want the best gaming smartphone available, then there are a couple that would easily fit into this category; however, we’re recommending the REDMAGIC 10S Pro as the phone to beat. Not only is it extremely capable because of its specifications, but it was purpose-built for mobile gaming and offers some specialized gaming features. It’s also available at a very reasonable and affordable base price compared to another high-end option we had in mind. At the end of the day, the REDMAGIC 10S Pro provides a basically pound-for-pound experience and has a lower price. So, this is the best for anyone who wants a dedicated gaming smartphone. At least for now. We’re a few months out from the end of the year, and eventually, new gaming smartphone models will arise.
REDMAGIC 10S Pro
Rating
starstarstarstarstar
Starting at $699
REDMAGIC’s 10S Pro is an excellent example of what a gaming phone should be – affordable, powerful, and full of features that cater to the gamer. After years of development and several iterations, the REDMAGIC 10S Pro is the product of a lot of hard work to create something that mobile gamers will be proud to have.
It offers several advantages, and while it comes in at a lower price point than direct competitors, it doesn’t skimp on performance. It doesn’t give an inch. That’s an impressive feat and it’s one of the reasons why it’s the best gaming phone available for most people in 2025.
Pros
Great battery life
Charges up super fast
Exceptional performance
Good camera
Affordable price point
Display provides an awesome visual experience
Cons
Fingerprint magnet
Can get extremely warm during high-intensity tasks
No wireless charging
The REDMAGIC 10S Pro has a lot of unique features that other high-end phones won’t have, and that’s one of the reasons why it’s a special phone for mobile gaming enthusiasts. The key feature, at least in our eyes, is the ultrasonic triggers that sit on top of the phone when you’re holding the phone in landscape mode for playing games. These act just like the triggers on a controller. These are perfect for shooter games, but you can map these triggers to any in-game control so you could use them for any game you want, as long as that games plays in landscape mode.
This phone also has a pretty large battery capacity and a really good cooling system. The latter helps ensure the phone stays capable of operating at optimal temperatures to sustain that high performance for longer periods of time. Then of course, you can pick this phone up with large amounts of RAM and storage, and it’s powered by the Snapdragon 8 Elite chipset, which is extremely powerful for mobile games.
Display: 6.85-inch AMOLED
Brightness: 2,000 nits
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
RAM and Storage: 12GB, 16GB, or 24GB RAM / 256GB, 512GB, or 1TB storage
Cameras: 50MP+50MP+2MP
Battery: 7050mAh Dual Cell Battery
Charging: 80W wired
Colors: Nightfall, Dusk, Moonlight
Android Version: Android 15
Software Support: 2 years of major OS updates and 3 years of security updates
AI Software: AI Trigger, Circle to Search, AI Photo Search AI image editing, real-time translations, call subtitles
Camera Score: Not tested by DXOMark
Camera Features: AI-powered image editing, Portrait Mode, Milky Way Night, Pro, Camera-Family
Battery Life Score: 25 hours and 42 minutes (Ranked 4th among phones Android Headlines has reviewed)
Charging Time: 44 minutes
Review
REDMAGIC 10S Pro Ultimate Review: The Gaming Phone for Everyone
REDMAGIC burst onto the scene years ago, but the brand has really started to push the envelope within the last…
by Justin Diaz
Read Full Review
Buy from
Buy from REDMAGIC
Best Premium Gaming Smartphone
When it comes to premium gaming phones, there’s really only one choice, and this year it’s the ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro. At a retail price of $1,299, it is most certainly not cheap but you get a top-of-the-line gaming smartphone with an exceptional experience for mobile gaming. While some of us here at Android Headlines personally like it more than the REDMAGIC 10S Pro, the 10S Pro is still the best offering because of its price and similar performance. However, if money is no object and you’re not concerned about the price, then this is the gaming phone you go with. ASUS spared no expense, and you might not want to either.
ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro Edition
Rating
starstarstarstarstar
$1,299
The ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro released early in the year, making it one of the first phones to launch with the Snapdragon 8 Elite. It was officially launched in November of 2024, but it didn’t reach the US until January of 2025. It has an admittedly pretty good camera for a gaming phone. We say this because gaming phones typically have not had very good cameras. ASUS and REDMAGIC have started to change this and the ROG Phone 9 Pro has what is likely the best camera of any “gaming phone” that’s currently available.
Of course, the real magic lies in the special software features in the Armoury Crate app, as well as the popular AirTriggers. ASUS pioneered this feature and it has since spread to other gaming phone devices in similar forms. Still, they feel the best on the ROG devices.
Pros
AirTriggers are incredibly responsive
Best-in-class cooling system
Top-notch performance
Best camera of any ROG Phone to date
Advanced gaming software features enhance the user experience
Cons
Expensive
Not widely available
Short lifespan on major OS updates
The AirTriggers are one of the best things about this device. They give your phone trigger-like ultrasonic buttons that act like the triggers on a controller. ASUS is no longer the only brand to offer a feature like this, but it is the brand that offers the best-feeling triggers on a gaming phone. Plus, it has some excellent gaming software, with the most advanced features we’ve seen yet thanks to ASUS”s infusion of AI-powered functions.
It also has the best cooling of any gaming phone we’ve ever used, which allows it to keep sustained performance at a high level beyond other devices. You could play the most demanding games on this phone for a couple of hours and barely notice any change in surface temperature. At least, it wouldn’t get to the point where things are uncomfortable. This wasn’t the case with some of the older ROG Phone models, so ASUS came a long way with this one. There is, of course, the addition of large amounts of RAM and storage capacity, though, this isn’t specific to the ROG Phone 9 Pro. It’s just one of the really great things about it.
Display: 6.78 inch FHD+ 2400 x1080
Brightness: 2,500 nits peak, 1,600 nits HBM
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
RAM and Storage: 16GB or 24GB RAM / 512GB or 1TB storage
Software Support: 2 years of major OS updates and 3 years of security updates
AI Software: X Sense, X Capture, X Grabber
Camera Score: Not tested by DXOMark
Camera Features: AI Object Sense, AI HyperClarity, AI Portrait Video, 4K video, 8K video
Buy from
Best Non-Gaming Smartphone For Gaming
Gaming phones aren’t for everybody, and that’s understandable. They focus mostly on gaming as the key features, so naturally, a few other things may take a backseat. That being said, there are still consumers out there who like mobile gaming but want something that does other things really, really well. Thankfully, some brands, like Samsung, have put an emphasis on mobile gaming in recent years while still managing to deliver a phone that’s excellent for mobile gaming, but it’s not an actual gaming phone. The Galaxy S25 Ultra is the best phone to go for if you want something that can perform well with mobile games, that isn’t actually a gaming phone. That means you won’t get any special gaming-centric hardware features here, but it’ll run games effortlessly thanks to its powerful hardware.
Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra
Rating
starstarstarstarstar_empty
The Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra is not a gaming phone but it is a good phone for games, because it’s good at pretty much everything it can do. It has great cameras, it has lots of storage, and it has a powerful chipset for high performance. Plus, it has a big screen with great resolution and vibrant colors. In other words, you’ll get a good screen size for games and the colors in those games will look amazing. Of course, it can’t be forgotten that this device has plenty of AI-powered software features to make everyday use outside of games more convenient.
Samsung has also taken great pains to increase mobile gaming performance and improve the user experience while playing games. This includes the use of a vapor chamber for better cooling, and even some gaming software features. It’s an all-around great device for more than just gaming. But, when it comes time to game, this phone won’t let you down.
Pros
Good Cameras
LOG Video recording for aspiring YouTubers
Class-leading battery life
Improved charging
Useful AI Features
7 years of Updates!
Cons
No Dolby Vision support
S Pen losses Bluetooth support
Still Expensive
What makes this phone special is that it’s a high-performance phone that can be used for mobile gaming, but it’s not really a gaming phone. So, as a user, you just end up with a really, really nice premium phone that can just happens to be able to play games well. Not just well, but at top-tier levels, given its RAM, storage, and Snapdragon 8 Elite chipset.
It’s a device that is just as suitable for everything else people love to do with mobile phones as it is for mobile gaming. It doesn’t look like a gaming phone either. That is most certainly going to appeal to some people who like games but don’t like the over-used gamer aesthetic. Even better is that you can use this phone for years to come. Samsung has promised 7 years of major OS updates, security updates, and feature updates. Which means, you’ll still be getting new versions of Android in 5 years. This isn’t something that was typical until Google’s Pixel 8 series. Samsung followed and promised 7 years of updates with last year’s Galaxy S24 series, and it’s continuing to do so here. The Galaxy S25 Ultra is an expensive phone as well, but it does a lot and it does it all pretty well.
Display: 6.9″ Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X 120Hz. Brightness: 2,600 nits peak Protection: Corning Gorilla Armor 2 Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite for Galaxy RAM and Storage: 12GB RAM, 256GB, 512GB or 1TB Storage Cameras: 200MP primary camera at f/1.7, 10MP 3x telephoto at f/2.4, 50MP 5x telephoto at f/3.4, and 50MP ultrawide at f/1.9. Battery: 5,000mAh Charging: 45W wired and 15W wireless. 4.5W reverse wireless also available Colors: Titanium Silver Blue, Titanium Black, Titanium White Silver, Titanium Gray, Titanium Jade Green, Titanium Jet Black, Titanium Pink Gold
Android Version: Android 16 (One UI 8)
Software Support: 7 years of updates (through January 2032)
AI Software: Galaxy AI, Gemini, and Circle to Search
Camera Score: 151 via DXOMark (Ranked 26th globally)
Camera features: Up to 100x zoom, 10-bit HDR recording, 8K video recording, LOG video mode, ProVisual Engine + Next-Gen Camera AI.
Battery life Score: 22 hours and 3 minutes (Ranked 22nd among phones Android Headlines has reviewed)
Charging time: 1 hour and 14 seconds.
Review
star
Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra Ultimate Review: More Than Meets The Eye
On the surface, it looks like Samsung did the bare minimum to release a new flagship phone. However, once you…
by Alexander Maxham
Read Full Review
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from
Best Mid-Range Gaming Smartphone
The OnePlus 13R is perhaps the best option for a phone that excels at mobile gaming in the budget category. It doesn’t cost a whole lot these days, and it’s still using some pretty powerful specs for a phone. Even if the chipset is from last year, it’s still last year’s flagship chipset from Qualcomm. Which is only a little less powerful than the Snapdragon 8 Elite.
OnePlus has also done some work to make its phones good for mobile gaming. The company included vapor chambers, added some gaming-centric software features, and, of course, the phones use good specs that allow the phone to run games well with high settings. This is another device that isn’t really a gaming phone, but it does play mobile games really well, all at a fraction of the cost of premium devices and actual gaming phones.
OnePlus 13R
Rating
starstarstarstarstar_empty
$599
Much like the OnePlus 12R, the OnePlus 13R prides itself on being capable in many different areas and that includes gaming. The approach is similar to Samsung with a focus on using high-quality components to ensure that gaming performance is smooth, but without alienating the crowd of consumers who doesn’t like the style of gaming phones or the fact that they can drop the ball in a few areas, most notably the camera, although not always. The OnePlus 13R shines in most areas including with battery life (so you can play games for longer), and it does these things while managing to keep the price tag a reasonable amount. How does OnePlus keep the price lower? Mainly by using last year’s chipset. This is the gaming phone for anyone who wants something mainstream, with excellent performance, great features, and a stylish design.
Pros
Great, smooth display
Outstanding performance
Solid main camera performance
Battery life is its strong suit
Very fast (wired) charging
Plenty fast fingerprint scanner
Cons
Poor ultrawide camera performance
No wireless charging
The thing that makes this phone special the most is that it has top-tier gaming performance at a price of $599. Thanks to the use of the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 as opposed to the Snapdragon 8 Elite, OnePlus was able to keep the price lower than its flagship OnePlus 13. There are other differences, of course, but this one factor helped a lot. Yet, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 is still a flagship chipset, just from one year prior, and that makes it a very good chip for games. OnePlus has also kept the vapor chamber and even improved on it from the previous year. Not to mention, it has put some focus toward enhancing mobile gaming through a few software features. There was a time that only brands who made official gaming phones would pay attention to this detail. More and more brands who make devices for the masses are catering to gamers too. And OnePlus is one of them.
It charges up extremely fast as well, when you use the wired charger, and that bodes well for the gamer who plays for long periods of time and needs to charge up the device as much as possible before having to rush out the door. By all accounts this is a great phone for gaming if you’re on a smaller budget and don’t want to compromise too much on performance.
Display: 6.78 LTPO AMOLED 120Hz
Brightness: 4,500 nits peak
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass 7i
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 3
RAM and Storage: 12GB/16GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB Storage
Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.8, 8MP ultrawide at f/2.2, 50MP telephoto at f/2.0
Battery: 6,000mAh
Charging: 80W wired
Colors: Astral Trail, Nebula Noir
Android Version: Android 15 (OxygenOS 15)
Software Support: 4 years of major Android updates
AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search, OnePlus AI
Camera Score: N/A
Camera features: Color spectrum sensor, HDR, 4K video recording at 60 fps, gyro-EIS
Battery life Score: 18 hours and 55 minutes (ranked 43rd among phones Android Headlines has reviewed)
Charging time: 44 minutes and 30 seconds
Announcement
OnePlus 13R Packs a Punch Without Breaking the Bank
Alongside the OnePlus 13 today, the OnePlus 13R was also announced. This is the company’s cheaper flagship offering with last…
by Alexander Maxham
Read Full Announcement
Buy from OnePlus
Buy from
Best Budget Gaming Smartphone
If you’re looking to go even less expensive than the OnePlus 13R, then the Poco X7 Pro 5G is the phone for you. It’s the best bang for your buck if mobile gaming is a huge focal point in choosing a new phone to upgrade to. While it won’t have the best performance of any phone on the market, it has considerably good performance, and it costs under $400. That’s a price-to-performance value you can’t really argue against. Plus, the phone doesn’t look too bad in terms of design.
Poco X7 Pro 5G
Rating
starstarstarstarstar_empty
$360
The Poco X7 Pro 5G is the kind of phone you consider when you want something that was built with mobile gaming in mind, but for the crowd of consumer who doesn’t want to spend more than a few hundred dollars.
At an average price of around $360, the Poco X7 Pro 5G from Xiaomi is a testament to what you can produce for less money when you put some effort into the development process. While it won’t beat out the top-tier devices, the Poco X7 Pro will have no problem delivering a quality gaming experience to the user. If you don’t care so much about having the absolute best, this is the device we’re recommending because it’s affordable, and it performs well. Not to mention it has a huge battery, so it’ll last a while between charges, too.
Pros
Pretty powerful chipset for a budget device
Massive 6,000mAh battery
Affordable price point
90W charging support
Slim bezels
120Hz display with decent resolution
Cons
underwhelming camera
Performance won’t quite match top-tier phones
What makes this phone truly special is that it can play mobile games with pretty good performance that most mobile gamers are likely to find acceptable, all without charging the consumer more than a few hundred dollars. This is the biggest draw of the Poco X7 Pro 5G. You’ll pay under $400 for it, and you’ll end up with a device that pumps out decent performance and has a long-lasting battery.
With a 120Hz display and ultra-slim bezels, gaming visuals will be presented in a delightful way so you can enjoy more of your game time without distractions. Plus, the slimmer bezels just look nicer overall. It also comes with an IP68 rating for dust resistance and water resistance. An IP68 rating on phones this inexpensive isn’t as common, so this is definitely a standout feature of the design.
The One UI 8 rollout has seen its share of issues, with Samsung pausing the process on several of its phones, including the popular Galaxy S24 and S23 flagships. The company hasn’t disclosed the reason that triggered this move, but we assume something serious. Anyway, it looks to be a thing of the past, as Samsung appears to have resumed the One UI 8 update for the Galaxy S24 and S23 models.
One UI 8 update for the Galaxy S24 and S23 resumed again
The screenshots shared by Tarun Vats confirm that One UI 8 is again available for the Galaxy S23 and S24. This is happening first in Samsung’s home soil, South Korea, suggesting that the Android 16-based update will also resume in other affected regions shortly. To recall, One UI 8 debuted on the Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Z Flip in July. It later made its way to other models, starting with the Galaxy S25 series.
Since then, Samsung has temporarily halted the update for various models without acknowledging or giving out a reason. It halted the One UI 8 rollout for the Galaxy S23 last week, after it began rolling out earlier this month.
The update is live in South Korea
One UI 8 is now back on track, as it’s rolling out again in the Galaxy S24 and S23 October monthly update. The update weighs around 396MB for the Galaxy S24 and 385MB for the Galaxy S23.
Meanwhile, Samsung’s next big UI upgrade is One UI 8.5, whose beta was originally rumored to start in November. But this is now reportedly not happening, possibly because of Samsung’s change in launch plans for the Galaxy S26 series.
Samsung’s upcoming big software update, One UI 8.5, is expected to bring some major changes and optimizations. However, things are reportedly not going as smoothly as planned. The company has now reportedly delayed the rollout of its One UI 8.5 beta. The program was earlier rumored to open in late November.
Samsung has delayed the rollout of the One UI 8.5 beta update
While Samsung has not made any official announcement yet, a fresh leak suggests that the firm has delayed the rollout of its One UI 8.5 beta update. The well-known tipster on X/Twitter, Tarun Vats, who closely follows the company’s software rollout timeline, recently revealed that the One UI 8.5 beta for the Galaxy S25 series has been postponed.
Earlier reports indicated that the beta would begin in the last week of November, but that schedule now appears unlikely. The delay seems to be connected with the major shake-up within the Galaxy S26 series.
According to sources, Samsung has canceled the Galaxy S26 Edge and reinstated the S26 Plus. It has also scrapped its plan to rename the standard S26 as S26 Pro. With the company revising its entire strategy, the internal development timeline has been disrupted. This has indirectly pushed back the One UI 8.5 beta as well.
The delay could be longer than anticipated
Since there are no official words on the update yet, it’s unclear how long the firm plans to hold off on the beta program. Historically, the company has delayed the release of its major software versions, such as One UI 8.0 and 8.1. This is to ensure the update’s stability before the stable release.
Anyway, if the One UI 8.5 beta rollout is delayed by more than a few weeks, it could line up with the slightly postponed launch of the Galaxy S26 series. However, depending upon the priorities of the company, the update may be delayed much longer than anticipated.
Earlier this year, Google announced that a Fitbit Personal Health Coach was coming to eligible devices, such as the Pixel Watch 4, and this week, it’s entering an early preview phase. This brings it one step closer to being fully launched, although it will take a little more time to get there, Google admits. This early preview will serve as a way for users to test the new feature and give some feedback to Google so that it can improve where things need to be improved. “Building this health coach takes time, rigor, and input to make sure it works well for everyone, which is why we’re starting with a preview and asking for your honest feedback,” Google says.
Since this is a preview, Google is quick to point out that everything it has mentioned as part of the preview is “by no means a comprehensive list of everything it can do.” That means users can expect it to do even more than what Google has announced so far. Which, by the way, includes everything from creating workouts on the fly to understanding more about specific health conditions. These don’t even have to be health conditions you have. It can just be something you’re particularly interested in learning more about.
The Fitbit Health Coach early preview begins October 28
Good news for anyone who wants to try this out: you’ll be able to give the Personal Health Coach a try starting tomorrow, October 28. Google doesn’t mention a specific time, so you may just have to end up keeping an eye on the Fitbit apps on your devices.
Google says you will need an eligible device to check it out, and this includes Pixel Watch and Fitbit devices. You also need to be a Fitbit Premium subscriber, as this will be a Fitbit Premium feature. Once the feature begins rolling out, users will be able to spend about 5 to 10 minutes having a conversation with their AI-powered fitness coach to get the ball rolling. Doing this isn’t mandatory to begin using the preview, as Google notes you can come back to it later, but it does seem to be recommended.
It’s also worth noting that this preview doesn’t have access to everything the current version of the Fitbit app has. A lot of features are missing. This includes menstrual health logging and tracking, body temp logging and tracking, social features like friends and leaderboards, and a host of others.
That being said, this is a preview, and Google confirms that users can swap back and forth. So, it isn’t a one way or another kind of situation. You can have both, just not in one app experience yet.
Qualcomm has officially entered the AI chip race with the launch of its two new accelerator chips. With this move, the company aims for a major shift from its traditional focus on smartphone and wireless connectivity semiconductors. With the launch of its new AI200 and AI250 chips, the company has positioned itself as a new challenger in the booming data center market, currently dominated by Nvidia and AMD.
Qualcomm announces AI200 and AI250 accelerator chips
According to an official announcement, Qualcomm plans to commercially release its new accelerator chip, the AI200, in 2026. The AI250 is scheduled to launch later in 2027. Both of these chips are designed for large-scale, liquid-cooled server racks. They are capable of powering an entire rack with up to 72 chips acting as one system.
Qualcomm builds its data center chips on the same hexagon neural processing unit (NPU) as its mobile processors. According to the company’s general manager of data center and edge, Durga Malladi, this is a part of a strategic move. She says that “We first proved ourselves in other domains, and then scaled up to the data center level.”
The new AI chips are competing on cost, efficiency, and flexibility
Unlike NVIDIA, whose GPUs are primarily used for training AI models, Qualcomm’s chips focus on inference, running pre-trained models efficiently. The company claims its rack-scale systems will cost less to operate. It is said to consume around 160 kilowatts per rack, roughly similar to Nvidia’s systems.
Malladi further adds in her statement that Qualcomm will offer modular sales. Clients will be able to purchase full racks or individual components. Interestingly, even competitors like Nvidia or AMD could use Qualcomm’s CPUs or other data center parts. The new AI cards are also said to be capable of handling 768GB of memory, surpassing both NVIDIA and AMD in this metric.
Google is currently working on its next major software update for Pixel devices—also known as Pixel Feature Drop—for a November 4, 2025 release. This update will deliver several key upgrades. However, among all of them stands out a substantial boost to customization through the introduction of Theme Packs for Google Pixel phones.
This isn’t the first time we’ve heard about this feature. It’s been highly anticipated among Pixel fans, as it has the potential to finally break the customization limitations on these devices compared to third-party Android implementations (such as One UI and Chinese custom skins).
Google Pixel Theme Packs to arrive with the November 2025 Feature Drop
According to Mystic Leaks, the long-rumored Theme Packs feature is finally ready for public release. These packs will represent more than minor color tweaks. They will offer comprehensive, system-wide aesthetic changes. The initial launch will involve a high-profile collaboration, with the first official theme drawing inspiration from the film “Wicked: For Good,” conveniently coinciding with the movie’s first screenings. This joint launch suggests Google plans to launch collaborative Themes constantly in the future.
Pixel Studio Animations and VIP notifications as well
That said, the upcoming Drop also includes a couple of major new features. First, for the creators, The Pixel Studio app is gaining new animation functionality that uses generative AI. Users will be able to transform their existing photos and GIFs into short, dynamic video clips. There are no details yet on which AI model will be behind this feature. However, it is likely powered by the latest Veo 3.1. This new tool will offer a simple way for users to add dynamic motion to their static media.
Lastly, the other star feature of the update will help users manage communication overload. The Pixel VIP feature will let you prioritize notifications from contacts designated as “VIPs.” Its scope will initially be limited to conversations within WhatsApp and Google Messages. However, it leaves the door open for potential integration with more messaging services and apps in the future.
If you’ve got an iPhone or a phone with a MagSafe-compatible case, then you should definitely consider picking up this MagSafe phone grip accessory, because this Amazon deal knocks the price down to just $8.98. That’s a respectable price for an accessory like this one, which has multiple uses. Normally, this thing is also $11.99 at full price, so why not save a few extra bucks, right?
As for what this does, it’s a MagSafe phone grip. It has a ring shape on it that allows you to slip your finger through and hold the phone more securely. This is great for holding the device one-handed, especially if you’re typing. This also serves as a kickstand, and its design allows it to be used as a kickstand while the phone is in landscape or horizontal orientations.
This is a neat little trick because once you’re done holding it, you can set it down on your desk or table or any other flat surface, and prop the kickstand part out to stand the phone up. It doesn’t charge your device, so if you need to charge the phone and want to charge it via the MagSafe, then you’ll have to take this off while you do that. You also won’t have to be worried about safety with this magnet accessory attached, because it has a super-strong magnet inside. It’s strong enough to hold up to 5.5 lbs., which is around 2,500g, and that’s more than enough to keep your phone attached.
Charging up your devices can be a pain in the neck if you don’t have enough outlets to plug everything in, but luckily, this deal on the flat 6-in-1 charging station from Anker can save you from those terrible moments. As the name suggests, the Anker Nano 6-in-1 flat charging station will let you charge or power up to six devices at a time. Normally, this charging station accessory would end up costing you $49.99. However, Amazon has it on sale for $37.99 today.
Aside from having the capability to power six devices, here’s what makes this charging station so good. First, it has a flat plug. With the flat plug, you can easily plug the charging station into an outlet, even if it’s behind furniture. Ideally, you wouldn’t need this sort of solution. However, sometimes the only available outlets are stuck behind couches, desks, or other furniture that needs to be up against the wall. The flat plug allows you to bypass this hurdle. The charging station itself is also quite flat, with two additional AC outlets and four USB ports. Two of those USB ports are USB-C.
And if it wasn’t already obvious from the picture, the cable is also thin and flat, which not only helps it fit behind stuff but also does a good job at preventing it from tangling up. The main reasons for grabbing an accessory like this are to charge multiple devices at once and help get rid of cable clutter from multiple chargers. This also comes in three colors.
We’ve seen how AI can generate text. Later, we also saw how AI can generate images and videos. So, AI that generates music? Why not? And that’s something that OpenAI is reportedly working on, which is generative AI music.
OpenAI working on generative AI music
According to a report from The Information, it has learned that OpenAI is developing a new AI tool that would allow users to create generative music. This means that similar to generative text, images, and videos, users can just type in a prompt using natural language, and the AI will create a song for them on the fly.
The report goes on to state that OpenAI is apparently working with students from the prestigious Juilliard School to annotate scores. This will help the AI model train itself on music. That being said, if this report is accurate, OpenAI won’t be the first to launch such a tool. Platforms like Sumo and SOUNDRAW already offer similar capabilities.
However, we suppose the potential upside is that OpenAI might bake this feature into ChatGPT. This will give ChatGPT even more tools, making it a more well-rounded AI model compared to those designed for niche purposes.
Is the world ready for more AI slop?
That being said, we have to wonder what the world and the industry think about this. At the moment, most people seem to be against AI-generated content. This is especially true when it comes to text, images, and videos, which have been labelled as “AI slop.” However, there could be some potential use here.
Content creators right now have a few options when it comes to using music in their videos. They can either pick from a library of songs that are copyright-approved, find their own royalty-free music, or pay a third-party platform to license music. Otherwise, they risk having their videos pulled, muted, and accounts suspended. Giving these creators the ability to generate something on the fly could be one way around that.
Plus, we’re sure that there are many musicians, record labels, and music publishers who might be concerned that their content is being used to train these AI models without their consent or compensation. We’ve already seen artists, writers, and publishers sue AI companies, so it’s not entirely out of the question.
Google’s Pixel Watch 3 is still one of the best smartwatches out there that you can buy. Even at its regular price, it’s an enticing purchase because it has plenty of awesome features, and it’s Google’s first watch to come in a 45mm size. Still, it becomes an even better value when you can save money on it, and that time is now, as Amazon has it on sale for $100 off.
Normally, the Pixel Watch 3 in the 45mm size would cost you $299. However, Amazon has it on sale for $199. This is the all-time low price for the watch, and quite honestly, well worth it if you don’t feel like spending close to $200 more for the latest model.
The Pixel Watch 3 features everything from advanced sleep tracking to automatic activity tracking of several different types of exercises. Naturally, it works as a great device to keep you informed on smartphone notifications without having to pull your phone out of your pocket or purse or wherever else you may have it stowed away. Plus, now that it has Gemini available, the watch has become even more useful. You can also use the Pixel Watch 3 for Google Pay payments at checkout stands and for Google Maps directions. You can even set navigation up to display the navigation on the watch display, which makes driving navigation way easier, as you can just lift your wrist for a quick peek.
The Google Pixel 10 series has been in the stores for weeks. With their cutting-edge features and refined design, they are devices worth protecting and accessorizing. Since its launch, the market has been flooded with a vast array of cases and accessories. To help you navigate the options, we’ve curated a list of the best cases in various categories, ensuring your Google Pixel 10 is not only safeguarded but also enhanced to fit your lifestyle. All our selections are readily available on Amazon, making it easy to get your hands on these top-tier products.
Best Grip Google Pixel 10 Case
For those who prioritize a secure hold on their device, the dbrand Grip Case for the Google Pixel 10 is in a league of its own.
dbrand Grip Case
Starts at $59.90
Engineered with microscopic ridges along the sides, dbrand’s Grip Case offers an unparalleled grip that significantly reduces the likelihood of accidental drops. The tactile texture provides a confident and comfortable feel in your hand, making it ideal for one-handed use and for those on the go.
Beyond its impressive grip, the dbrand Grip Case doesn’t skimp on protection. It boasts military-grade impact resistance to safeguard your Pixel 10 from everyday tumbles. The case is also fully compatible with dbrand’s extensive collection of skins. This allows you to customize the look of your phone without compromising on the secure grip that makes this case a standout choice. The design you see in the image above is just one of dozens of options to choose from.
Colors: Dozens to choose from, literally
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Textured silicon
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: N/A
Weight: N/A
Buy from dbrand
Best Rugged Google Pixel 10 Case
When maximum protection is your top priority, the Spigen Tough Armor for the Google Pixel 10 is the case to beat.
Spigen Tough Armor
$21.99
This case is built to withstand serious impacts. It features a dual-layer design that combines a flexible TPU interior with a hard polycarbonate exterior. It also incorporates Spigen’s Air Cushion Technology in the corners for enhanced shock absorption during drops.
Despite its robust construction, the Spigen Tough Armor maintains a relatively slim profile and includes a built-in kickstand for hands-free viewing. The precise cutouts ensure easy access to all ports and buttons, and the raised edges provide excellent protection for the screen and camera. If you lead an active lifestyle or simply want peace of mind knowing your Pixel 10 is safe from harsh conditions, the Tough Armor is a reliable choice.
Colors: Black, Abyss Green, Metal Slate, Navy Blue
For an all-around excellent case that perfectly complements the Google Pixel 10, look no further than Google’s own Pixelsnap Case.
Google Pixelsnap Case
$49.99
This case offers a great fit and is designed to work seamlessly with the phone’s new PixelSnap technology. This ensures a secure connection with compatible magnetic accessories. The case provides reliable protection against everyday drops and scratches without adding unnecessary bulk. While it’s not an ultra-slim case, it maintains the slim profile of your device.
The Pixelsnap Case is crafted from a soft-touch silicone that feels great in hand and enhances grip. The finish reduces the chances of accidental slips. It also features a soft microfiber lining to keep your Pixel 10 free from scuffs. There’s also a variety of colors to match your personal style and the phone’s own colorways.
Build Materials: Silicone, polycarbonate, magnets, and a microfiber lining
Recycled materials: 42% recycled materials, shell made with 75% recycled plastic
Dimensions: 157.48 x 76.2 x 12.7 mm
Weight: 33.97 grams
Buy at
Best Ultra-Thin Google Pixel 10 Case
Maybe you’re looking to protect your Google Pixel 10 from scratches and minor bumps without sacrificing its sleek design. Well, the Mous Super Thin Case is an exceptional option.
Mous Super Thin Case
$49.99
This case is impressively slim and lightweight, adding minimal bulk to your phone, so it still feels comfortable in your pocket. It’s constructed from a durable yet flexible material that provides a surprising amount of protection for such a slender profile.
The Mous Super Thin Case features a minimalist design that lets the aesthetics of your Pixel 10 shine through. It’s also compatible with Pixelsnap accessories. So, you can take advantage of the magnetic ecosystem without needing a thicker case. For those who prioritize a minimalist feel and want to keep their device as close to its original form as possible, this case is the top contender.
Colors: Almost 20 colors
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Polycarbonate
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: 155.23 × 74.38 × 12.97 mm
Weight: 27 grams
Byu at
Buy at Mous
Best Leather Google Pixel 10 Case
If you’re looking to elevate the look and feel of your Google Pixel 10, the premium Bellroy Leather Case is another great option.
Bellroy Leather Case
$55
This case is a product of a partnership between Bellroy and Google. The partnership ensures a perfect fit and seamless integration with the phone’s features. The case is crafted from high-quality, eco-tanned leather that develops a unique patina over time.
The Bellroy Leather Case offers a slim profile while still providing ample protection for your device. The interior is lined with a soft microfiber to prevent scratches, and the edges are slightly raised to protect the screen and camera. For those who appreciate the touch of elegance of genuine leather, the Bellroy case is calling you.
Colors: Black, Sienna
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Leather, plastic polymer and polyester
Recycled materials: 12% Recycled Polyester
Dimensions: 157 x 76.2 x 14 mm
Weight: 27 grams
Buy at
Buy at Bellroy
Best Wallet Google Pixel 10 Case
For those who value both style and convenience, the TORRO Premium Leather Wallet Case for the Google Pixel 10 is an excellent all-in-one solution.
TORRO Premium Leather Wallet Case
$34.99
Crafted from genuine top-grain leather, this folio-style case exudes a classic and sophisticated look. The supple leather not only feels great in the hand but also offers durable protection against daily wear and tear.
Inside, the TORRO case features a soft microfiber lining and multiple card slots. This allows you to carry your essential cards and some cash alongside your phone. The case also has a built-in stand function, perfect for watching videos or making video calls. This TORRO case integrates a nice combination of premium materials, practical features, and robust protection.
Colors: Black
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Leather, plastic polymer and polyester
Recycled materials: 12% Recycled Polyester
Dimensions: 159 x 75.94 x 18.03 mm
Weight: 95 grams
Buy at
Best Google Pixel 10 Screen Protector
Protecting the vibrant display of your Google Pixel 10 is crucial. Fortunately, the Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT Tempered Glass screen protector makes it incredibly easy.
Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT Tempered Glass
$34.99
This screen protector is made from durable 9H hardness tempered glass to defend against scratches and cracks. It also features an oleophobic coating to resist fingerprints and smudges.
What sets the GlasTR EZ FIT apart is its innovative auto-alignment installation tray. This ensures a perfect, bubble-free application every time. The screen protector offers edge-to-edge coverage without interfering with most cases and maintains the original touch sensitivity and display clarity of your Pixel 10. If you want reliable and hassle-free screen protection, the Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT is a top choice.
Colors: Clear
Build Materials: Glass
Dimensions: N/A
Weight: N/A
Buy at
Best Google Pixel 10 Grip/Stand
The Spigen O-Mag Ring is a versatile accessory that enhances both the grip and functionality of your phone, working perfectly with the native Qi2 magnets of the Google Pixel 10.
Spigen O-Mag Ring
$23.99
This magnetic ring attaches securely to the back of your phone, providing a comfortable and stable loop for your finger. This drastically improves one-handed use, making it much easier and safer to navigate the large cover and main screens.
In addition to being a secure grip, the O-Mag Ring doubles as a durable kickstand. It rotates 360 degrees, allowing you to prop your Google Pixel 10 up in either or portrait landscape mode at various angles, which is perfect for watching videos, taking video calls, and more. Its strong magnetic attachment makes it easy to snap on when you need it and remove for wireless charging.
Colors: Carbon
Build Materials: Metal
Recycled materials: N/A
Weight: 60 grams
Buy at
Best Google Pixel 10 Power Bank
Keep your Google Pixel 10 powered up on the go with the Anker Nano Power Bank.
Anker Nano Power Bank (10,000mAh, 30W)
$33.99
This compact and portable charger packs a 10,000mAh capacity, which is enough to provide multiple charges for your Google Pixel 10. It features a built-in USB-C cable that doubles as a carrying loop, so you never have to worry about forgetting your charging cable.
The Anker Nano Power Bank delivers up to 30W of power. So, it perfectly matches the fast-charging power supported by the device. The charger also has an additional USB-C and USB-A port for charging other devices. There’s an informative display that shows you the remaining battery percentage, so you’ll always know when it’s time to recharge the power bank itself. For a reliable charging solution, the Anker Nano Power Bank is an excellent Google Pixel 10 companion.
Colors: Ice Lake Blue, Lilac Purple, Shell White, Sprout Green, Pure Black
For the most seamless and efficient wireless charging experience for your Google Pixel 10, the official Google Pixelsnap Wireless Charger is the way to go.
Google Pixelsnap Wireless Charger
$39.99
This charger is specifically designed to work with the Google Pixel 10’s PixelSnap technology. This ensures perfect alignment and optimal charging speeds every time you place your phone on it. The magnetic connection makes it easy to use, even in the dark.
The Pixelsnap Wireless Charger delivers a fast and reliable charge. Plus, its minimalist design looks great on any desk or nightstand. It’s a simple and elegant solution for keeping your phone topped up without the hassle of cables. If you want the most convenient and optimized wireless charging for your new phone, the official Google charger is a great choice.
Colors: Rock Candy
Wireless Charging Support: Yes
Build Materials: Polycarbonate, metal ring
Recycled materials: At least 15% recycled materials
Dimensions: N/A
Weight: 53.86 grams
Buy at
Best Google Pixel 10 Wired Charger/Power Brick
Like many other modern phones, the Google Pixel 10 doesn’t come with a power brick in the box. If you don’t have one at home, the Anker 312 Charger (30W) is an excellent and affordable option for fast charging.
Anker 312 Charger (30W)
$19.99
This compact and powerful charger can charge your Google Pixel 10 at its maximum supported speed via USB-C.
The Anker 312 features a foldable plug, making it incredibly portable and perfect for travel. It also incorporates Anker’s safety features to protect your device from overcharging and overheating. For a reliable, fast, and compact charging solution, the Anker 312 is a must-have accessory for your handset.
For years, Google has been working on optimizing Android for tablets and other large-screen devices. Key feature additions like a taskbar and improved split-screen functionality have helped. However, many users agree that Android tablets still fall short of offering truly seamless, PC-level multitasking. Google is now working to close this gap by reviving and refining a powerful tool that could change how we use tablets: the ability to run any Android app in a floating bubble.
Recent findings by Android Authority suggest Google still has this “bubble anything” concept. The company now aims to better fit existing tablet workflows with an updated interface. Google is positioning it to become a seamless, general-purpose feature for power users.
Android tablets may get massive multitasking upgrade with Floating Apps
The new implementation centers on a simple, intuitive drag-and-drop gesture. Code strings and accompanying animations indicate that tablet users will soon be able to drag an app icon directly from the taskbar and drop it onto one of the screen’s bottom corners. This action will immediately launch the app in a smaller, floating bubble window. Users can then move this bubble freely while simultaneously working in other applications.
This approach aligns perfectly with how other multitasking features, such as split-screen mode, currently work on Android tablets. The goal is probably to minimize the learning curve. To further ensure a smooth user transition, the code also points to a new educational tutorial with animations. This will guide users through the new drag-to-float gesture the first time they interact with the taskbar.
Source: Android Authority
Bubble anything
The current version of Android limits the “bubble” feature almost exclusively to conversation notifications from supported messaging apps. However, the evidence strongly suggests this new gesture will apply to any app placed on the taskbar. Android already allows any app icon to sit in that position. So, extending the floating window capability to all apps is a logical next step.
This broader application unlocks powerful multitasking possibilities. It may allow users to keep three, four, or more apps instantly accessible at the same time. This is a significant functional boost, particularly for smaller tablets that struggle to fit multiple applications comfortably in the standard split-screen mode. Some custom skins from other brands already integrate similar functions. However, a powerful, native solution would be very useful to add uniformity between all Android devices.
We still don’t know when these improvements will arrive in a stable release. However, the presence of a fully designed tutorial and corresponding animations suggests that this “bubble any app” Android feature is making steady progress toward a public release in a future update.
It looks like we’re one step closer to putting this whole TikTok saga behind us. According to US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, US President Donald Trump and China President Xi Jinping are expected to “consummate” the TikTok deal this Thursday.
Trump to close TikTok deal this Thursday
According to Bessent, “We reached one in Madrid, and I believe that as of today, all the details are ironed out, and that will be for the two leaders to consummate that transaction on Thursday in Korea. My remit was to get the Chinese to agree to approve the transaction, and I believe we successfully accomplished that over the past two days.”
Last month, Trump signed an executive order that would see ByteDance sell its TikTok US operations to American-owned companies. Ever since he came into power, Trump had been pushing for China and ByteDance to sell TikTok. This was based on concerns that ByteDance is a Chinese company. The US government was worried that data of US citizens and users would be sent back to China.
Under the Biden administration, TikTok was due to be banned in the US at the start of the year. However, following Trump’s re-election, he extended the deadline of the ban several times. At one point, it looked like we would never hear the end of this whole TikTok saga. But come Thursday, Trump will officially close the TikTok deal and put it to bed once and for all.
What does the future of TikTok look like?
Once the deal has been closed, TikTok’s US operations will come under control of a new board of directors. Oracle will be responsible for security operations. These board of directors are also expected to oversee TikTok’s recommendation algorithm, source code, and also take over duties when it comes to the moderation of content.
Note that this only applies to TikTok in the US. For the rest of the world, your TikTok experience should remain the same. However, we have to wonder if TikTok US could undergo a huge change. TikTok’s algorithm is kind of what gives the platform an edge over competitors like Instagram Reels.
But if US companies and engineers are taking over the algorithm to make their own tweaks, what could this mean for creators based in the country? Could they see a drop in views? We suppose we’ll have to wait and see.
Google is working to make its on-device security features more transparent and manageable for users. An analysis of a recent beta version of the Play Protect Service app indicates that the company is adding updates to its Live Threat Detection tool, which uses artificial intelligence models to identify potentially malicious applications on Pixel phones and Android devices in general.
The Live Threat Detection feature fully relies on local, on-device AI. This means all the processing happens entirely on the local hardware. This approach allows for quick threat detection without requiring sending sensitive application data to Google’s cloud servers. The result is a strong layer of user privacy throughout the scanning process. Now, Google is making it friendlier and easier to use.
Live Threat Detection upgrade for Android: See every flagged app in one place
Currently, Android’s Live Threat Detection issues real-time alerts when it detects suspicious app behavior. However, the feature offers limited visibility beyond those initial notifications. Google is now fixing this lack of a central hub. The recent findings (by Android Authority) point to the development of a dedicated new page for the security tool. This upcoming screen is expected to clearly list all applications that the system has flagged as potential threats. Moving the threat information from individual, potentially numerous notifications to a permanent, centralized report is a great move. It improves user control and makes the security status of the device significantly easier to check at a glance.
Additionally, Google is adding a new, specific alert type focused on data harvesting. Code strings reveal a future warning designed to explicitly inform users when an application deemed unsafe is detected monitoring the device’s location or activity. This alert directly addresses a major area of concern for user privacy: applications that covertly harvest sensitive data or track user movement patterns without proper consent.
These changes aim to enhance the usefulness of Android’s security tools. The mainstream public often underestimates security improvements because they often act in the background. However, keeping your personal data safe from potential bad actors is key in today’s tech industry.
The OnePlus 15 is a direct successor to the OnePlus 13, which initially launched last year around the same time. The initial launch of the OnePlus 15 took place on October 27, while the global model will likely follow next month. The device does look different than its predecessor, as the company did make some notable design changes. Design is not the only thing that changed, here, though.
The new phone is, of course, more powerful overall, which we’ll talk about. It also comes with some changes that people may not be fans of. In any case, in this article, we’ll talk a lot more about the phone, even before its global debut. Once it arrives to global markets, we’ll fill in the gaps and update the information that is relevant to global users. With that being said, let’s get to it.
OnePlus 15 specs
OnePlus’ flagship smartphones bring top-of-the-line specs year-in, year-out. The same is the case here, as this phone is packed with powerful hardware. The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 SoC from Qualcomm, the company’s new flagship chip, fuels this smartphone. That chip is backed by 12GB/16GB of RAM and 256GB/512GB/1TB of internal storage. Just to be clear, OnePlus is using LPDDR5X RAM here and UFS 4.1 flash storage.
A 165Hz 1.5K AMOLED display is used, along with a 7,300mAh battery
A 6.78-inch AMOLED display sits on the front, with a resolution of 2772 x 1272 (1.5K). That translates to 450 PPI, and an aspect ratio of 20:9. This display goes up to 165Hz, though only during gaming. During regular use, it’ll go from 1-120Hz, as it’s adaptive. The peak brightness is immensely high, well over 4,000 nits, though you’ll never get to that point. The point is, the display is immensely bright when you need it to be.
A 7,300mAh silicon-carbon battery is used here. So, yes, even though the OnePlus 13 had a rather huge battery with plenty of capacity, OnePlus decided to improve upon that quite a bit. The phone jumped from 6,000mAh to 7,300mAh. 120W wired charging is supported (it will be limited to 80W in the US), along with 50W wireless charging. Android 16 comes pre-installed here with ColorOS 16 in China, while OxygenOS 16 will be included in the US.
Three 50-megapixel cameras sit on the back, while the phone is quite durable
There are three 50-megapixel cameras on the back. A 50-megapixel main camera (Sony’s IMX906 sensor, 1/1.56-inch sensor size) OIS, f/1.8 aperture, 84-degree FoV) is backed by a 50-megapixel ultrawide unit (OV50D sensor, 1/2.88-inch sensor size, 6P lens, f/2.0 aperture, 116-degree FoV). A 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera (S5KJN5 sensor, 1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom, 4P lens, OIS, f/2.8 aperture, 30-degree FoV) also sits on the back. On the front, you’ll find a 32-megapixel Sony IMX709 camera sensor.
The phone has an in-display fingerprint scanner, an ultrasonic one. An IR blaster is included, as is Bluetooth 6.0. Wi-Fi 7 is, of course, on the table too, as is USB 3.2 Gen 1. There are two nano SIM card slots here, and a charger will be included, at least in some regions. The OnePlus 15 is IP66/IP68/IP69/IP69K certified, which means it has great water and dust resistance, to say the least.
OnePlus announced three color options
The device measures 161.42 x 76.67 x 8.10-8.20mm, while it weighs 211/215 grams, depending on the model. Three color options have been launched in China: Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune
The OnePlus 15 was announced only in China thus far. The phone’s pricing kicks off at CNY3,999 ($561) for the 12GB RAM model with 256GB of storage. It goes up to CNY5,399 ($758) for the 16GB RAM variant with 1TB of storage. Several other models are available in between. We’re expecting only a couple of models globally, though.
Where can I buy the OnePlus 15?
For the time being, the OnePlus 15 is only available to purchase in China. It launched in OnePlus’ homeland only, we’ll have to wait a bit before it makes its way to more markets. Once the global model launches, this section will be updated with new information and purchase links.
What carriers does it work on?
Only the Chinese variant was announced thus far, this section will be updated once the global model arrives.
What colors does the OnePlus 15 come in?
In China, the phone was announced in three color variants, Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune. Those are essentially black, purple, and beige colors. All three colors are rumored to arrive to global markets, though they will have different names, all three of them. At this point, we do know that the ‘Sand Dune’ color will be called ‘Sand Storm’ globally. That part has been officially confirmed, the other two colors, not yet.
What new upgrades does the OnePlus 15 have over the OnePlus 13, and what noteworthy features in general?
The OnePlus 15 is a more powerful smartphone than the OnePlus 13, there’s no doubt about it. Not everything on the phone is an upgrade over its predecessor, however. Well, most things are, but not everything. With that being said, in this section, we’ll highlight the upgrades and what seem to be downgrades. On top of that, we’ll simply highlight the best aspects of the phone itself, in general.
Even more processing power
The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 from Qualcomm is used to fuel the OnePlus 15. That is Qualcomm’s most powerful chip to date, and a successor to the Snapdragon 8 Elite that is included in the OnePlus 13. There is no monumental difference when compared to the Snapdragon 8 Elite, but it’s better in a number of ways. Not only is it generally more powerful, but it brings upgrades in the GPU, NPU, and connectivity departments. A 23% improvement in GPU performance, 37% faster NPU, and more.
Faster storage
The OnePlus 15 ships with UFS 4.1 flash storage, compared to UFS 4.0 storage inside the OnePlus 13. That may not be something you’ll notice during day-to-day use, but UFS 4.1 is a notable improvement. It is not only faster, but it’s more power efficient too. A number of other improvements are included.
A gigantic battery
OnePlus opted to include a 7,300mAh battery inside the OnePlus 15. That is considerably more battery juice than what the OnePlus 13 delivered. That phone includes a 6,000mAh unit, which is also a silicon-carbon battery. That battery was plenty for that phone, and yet OnePlus decided to take things to a whole other level with the OnePlus 15. We do expect the OnePlus 15 to offer outstanding battery life.
Faster charging (slightly)
The OnePlus 15 supports 120W wired charging, compared to 100W charging on the OnePlus 13. Wireless charging remains the same. The thing is, this phone does include a larger battery, so the charging speed difference likely won’t be noticeable… when it comes to wired charging. Do note that the US will still get 80W wired charging, though.
Better display, even though it may not seem like it
The OnePlus 13 did ship with a sharper display than the OnePlus 15. The thing is, the difference will not be visible, and yet the OnePlus 15’s display is newer, more expensive, and technologically more advanced. It also supports a refresh rate of up to 165Hz for gaming, which is not something the OnePlus 13’s panel offered.
Bluetooth 6.0
The OnePlus 15 ships with Bluetooth 6.0 support, as expected. The OnePlus 13 included Bluetooth 5.4. Bluetooth 6.0 brings a number of improvements, including centimeter-level accuracy through channel sounding. It also brings improved audio latency and quality, and more efficient battery usage with decision-based advertising filtering. A number of other improvements are included.
OxygenOS 16
The OnePlus 15 ships with OxygenOS 16 out of the box. That is the latest version of OnePlus’ Android skin: It is based on Android 16, and it brings a refreshed UI, it’s immensely fast, has new animations, and so on. The thing is, the OnePlus 13 will get this UI as well, so chances are it won’t be much of a difference between the two. The point is, it is here, and it does make a difference.
The camera conundrum
On paper, the OnePlus 15 brings a camera downgrade to the table. It includes three 50-megapixel cameras on the back, with smaller camera sensors than the OnePlus 13. That goes for all three cameras, actually. That camera setup does not look great, in all honesty, but we’ll have to test it out to find out the truth.
What cases are available for the OnePlus 15?
OnePlus has confirmed the Sandstone Magnetic Case, Aramid Fiber Case, and Magnetic Hole Case for the Chinese market. We’re not sure if all of these will make their way to the global markets, but you can check them out below. The first two are kind of self-explanatory. The Sandstone case is a throwback to the original OnePlus smartphone, while the Aramid Fiber case is immensely thin and light. The Magnetic Hole Case brings a level of customization to the table. You can check them all below.
Images & Video
Should I buy the OnePlus 15?
Considering that only the Chinese OnePlus 15 variant has been launched at this point, it’s too early to tell whether the OnePlus 15 will be worth it. The price tag does seem quite appealing, but the smaller camera sensor do worry us. We can’t wait to review the OnePlus 15, however, so wait just a little bit longer while the global model arrives, and we’ll be able to share far more information about the device.
The lawsuit Apple filed against leakster and YouTuber Jon Prosser seemed straightforward enough. However, it looks like things are becoming more complicated. Now, according to Apple, it says that Prosser has not indicated when he may respond to the lawsuit.
Prosser has not indicated when he will respond to Apple lawsuit
In recent court filings, Apple stated that Prosser “has not indicated” when, or even if, he plans to formally defend himself against the trade secrets allegations tied to leaked iOS 26 information. The lawsuit, filed in July 2025, targets both Prosser and co-defendant Michael Ramacciotti over the alleged theft of confidential details about Apple’s upcoming software update.
Apple’s filings emphasize that despite Prosser’s public statements, he missed his legal deadline to respond. As a result, the court entered a default against him, which allows Apple to proceed toward seeking damages and an injunction without Prosser’s formal participation in the case. Meanwhile, Ramacciotti has actively cooperated with Apple and may settle soon, taking a completely different approach than his co-defendant.
Going back and forth
This is where things get confusing. Initially, Prosser’s statements suggested he was in active talks with Apple about the lawsuit. However, when court documents revealed he hadn’t responded to the legal filing, Prosser doubled down, claiming he had been in active communications with the company. Now, Apple’s latest statement directly contradicts that claim, leaving us scratching our heads about what’s actually happening behind the scenes.
The back and forth raises questions about whether Prosser is truly engaging with Apple’s legal team or simply making public statements that don’t align with the formal legal process. Either way, his silence in court puts him at a significant disadvantage. If Apple’s injunction succeeds, it could set a precedent that limits how tech influencers handle leaked information, potentially restricting early looks at new features for enthusiasts who rely on these sources.
For context, the lawsuit stems from Prosser publishing videos that revealed confidential iOS 26 features. Prosser has publicly denied coordinating any scheme to steal company secrets. He claims he had no technical access to Apple’s systems and didn’t plot to obtain anyone’s device.
All wireless chargers are made the same, right? Well, according to Google, that is not the case.
Some users have noted that when trying to charge their Pixel 10 Pro Fold, they get a question mark instead of it actually charging. Google has noticed and issued a statement saying that this issue arises when you use an “incompatible wireless charger”. Google suggests that users use “certified Qi2 wireless chargers” instead. Which should be a no-brainer. But since Qi2 is backward compatible with Qi, it’s a bit surprising that there is an issue.
Google is going to fix this issue, however. So don’t throw out those old Qi chargers just yet. Google will be releasing a fix in the next software update. But for now, rebooting your phone should fix the issue.
Google’s Pixel 10 series is really struggling this year
Google’s off to a pretty rocky start with the Pixel 10 series this year. Nevermind the mid-range chip that is powering the devices, there’s been quite a few issues too. Like with Genshin Impact, a pretty popular game, that doesn’t run properly on the Pixel 10 because Google switched to a PowerVR GPU, and Genshin Impact stopped supporting those GPUs a few months ago.
Now we’re seeing other issues too, but the Genshin Impact issue really can’t be fixed without the company supporting PowerVR again or Google ditching it on Tensor G6.
In the grand scheme of things, this issue with charging is really not a big deal. Especially since this is wireless charging and not USB-C charging, that is the issue. While it is inconvenient, picking up a Qi2 charger for cheap or using a USB-C charger is definitely an easy fix. Check out our best Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold cases and accessories for some good options.
Sony’s first 200MP camera is coming, and it’s looking to challenge Samsung’s ISOCELL counterparts. We are talking about a sensor for mobile devices, mainly smartphones, here, of course.
Sony’s first 200MP mobile camera sensor is coming for Samsung’s crown
According to what FeniBook, a tipster, said, Sony is planning to announce the LYT-910, which will be the company’s first 200MP camera sensor. It will be a 1/1.11-inch sensor with an individual pixel size of 0.7um.
That sensor will be able to capture 50MP and 200MP resolution images. The 50-megapixel ones will be captured through pixel binning, of course. With an in-sensor crop, this sensor could offer 2x and 4x lossless-quality zoom, basically.
It is also said to offer superior HDR performance over Samsung’s offerings, with a dynamic range of over 100db. It will also support 4K recording at 120 FPS, and 8K recording at 30 FPS… with HDR.
That’s basically everything the tipster shared. Now, if we compare this to Samsung’s 200MP offerings, the Sony LYT-910 does seem to be superior, at least on paper.
It does seem more compelling, on paper, than Samsung’s ISOCELL HP1 & HP2 sensors
The ISOCELL HP1 is a 1/1.22-inch sensor, and it’s the biggest sensor the company offers. The ISOCELL HP2 is the company’s best sensor, however, it’s a 1/1.4-inch unit. The ISOCLEL HPB is also worth noting, as it’s basically the ISOCELL HP2 in disguise.
We’re not sure when the Sony LYT-910 will become official, but by the looks of it, it could arrive soon. In fact, the OPPO Find X9 Ultra and Vivo X300 Ultra could end up utilizing it next year, we’ll see.
Those two phones, amongst some others, will look for an edge over their siblings. A powerful sensor like this would certainly give that to them. Everything is under wraps at the moment, so we’ll have to wait and see. This is the first time we’re hearing about this sensor.
OnePlus has just announced its new flagship smartphone, the OnePlus 15. Do note that this launch took place in China, and it is the initial launch event for the phone. The global launch event is expected to take place next month.
With that being said, we already had a lot of details about the device. Plenty of information surfaced, while OnePlus revealed some info little by little over the last couple of weeks. Most of the information that leaked was also accurate.
The OnePlus 15 is now official with a brand new design
The OnePlus 15 has a brand new design. It is even more boxy than before. The phone features a flat display, a flat backplate, and a flat frame. Its corners are rounded, though, and the same goes for the corners of the phone’s camera island.
Speaking of which, the camera island is no longer round, it is now a square with rounded corners. It looks entirely different and sits in the top-left corner on the back of the phone. There are still three cameras included on the inside, though.
The phone has a centered display camera hole up top, and even thinner bezels than its predecessor. The bezels here measure 1.15mm all around. The phone does include uniform bezels, which means they’re the same thickness on all sides.
The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chip is used, along with a 165Hz AMOLED display
This smartphone is quite powerful, needless to say. It is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor. That is Qualcomm’s most powerful chip to date. It is paired with 12GB/16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.1 flash storage (up to 1TB). Storage expansion is not supported.
A 6.78-inch AMOLED display sits on the front, with a 1.5K resolution (2772 x 1272). That display goes up to 165Hz, but only during gaming. In regular use, it can go between 1 and 120Hz, as needed. It has high-frequency PWM dimming and gets immensely bright when needed.
OnePlus included a massive 7,300mAh battery here, along with 120W charging
A 7,300mAh silicon-carbon battery is included in the package too. That battery is a lot bigger than the already big unit in the OnePlus 13. 120W wired charging is supported here, along with 50W wireless charging.
There is an ultrasonic in-display fingerprint scanner included too, while Bluetooth 6.0 is supported. The same goes for Wi-Fi 7. Android 16 comes pre-installed on the device, along with ColorOS 16. OxygenOS 16 will be included on the global model. The phone is also IP66/IP68/IP69/IP69K certified for water and dust resistance.
The cameras seem to be a downgrade, at least on paper
There are three 50-megapixel cameras included on the back of the phone. A 50-megapixel main camera (1/1.56-inch sensor size) is backed by a 50-megapixel ultrawide camera (1/2.88-inch sensor size, 116-degree FoV). The third camera is a 50-megapixel periscope telephoto unit (1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom). On paper, these cameras do seem like downgrades compared to the OnePlus 13. We’ll have to see if that’s true in actual performance.
The OnePlus 15 measures 161.42 x 76.67 x 8.10-8.20mm, while it weighs 211/215 grams. It comes in Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune colors. They will have different names in markets outside of China.
The device’s pricing starts at CNY3,999 ($561) for the 12GB RAM model with 256GB of storage, while it goes up to CNY5,399 ($758) for the 16GB RAM variant with 1TB of storage.
After launching the Xiaomi 17 series, the Chinese brand is apparently working on a more premium model, the Xiaomi 17 Ultra. The handset may debut before the end of this year in China, very much ahead of the usual MWC timeline (globally) every year. A new leak suggests that, like the regular models in the series, the Xiaomi 17 Ultra may not arrive with a rear display.
Xiaomi 17 Ultra may not get a rear display
In the latest Weibo post, prolific leaker Digital Chat Station has shed some light on the Xiaomi 17 Ultra’s cameras. He says the phone will have a new 50MP primary camera with a large sensor and improved in-sensor zoom technology. It can seamlessly transition to the telephoto lens for lossless focal range coverage.
The telephoto unit could use a new 200MP large sensor, supporting multiple focal lengths. It could offer tele-macro shooting with “good magnification.” However, the focus range will not be extremely close, as per Digital Chat Station. Both lenses are claimed to offer a high dynamic range.
The phone could bring camera upgrades
Coming to the topic of rear display, one of the comments to the post asks the leaker whether the camera module is round or if it will have the new design (presumably referring to the rear display). To which, Digital Chat Station replies “circle.” This suggests that the phone may feature a large, round camera module like the predecessor, taking up a large portion of the back. It could be missing out on the rear display like its Pro siblings.
However, it contradicts a previous report that said Xiaomi will continue to use a secondary display on its next-gen flagships. Perhaps the Ultra model is an exception in order to accommodate large camera sensors.
The upcoming Xiaomi phone may feature the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chip and a 6.8-inch flat OLED 2K display. It could arrive in black, purple, and white shades.
The Roborock Q10 S5 is getting a massive discount right now, dropping to just $299 on Amazon — down from its usual $549 price tag. That’s a solid $250 in savings on one of the smartest robot vacuums you can buy in this price range. Roborock has built a strong reputation for offering high-end cleaning performance without the premium price, and the Q10 S5 continues that trend by packing serious suction power, a self-emptying dock, and advanced mopping capabilities into a sleek and compact design.
At the heart of the Q10 S5 is Roborock’s 10,000Pa HyperForce suction system, which easily pulls up dust, pet hair, and debris from both carpets and hardwood floors. It also includes a Dual Anti-Tangle System, which prevents hair from wrapping around the brush — a huge bonus for pet owners. The mop system uses VibraRise 2.0 technology, meaning it can automatically lift when transitioning from hard floors to carpets and apply pressure scrubbing when needed. Combined, these features let the Q10 S5 handle deep cleaning and daily maintenance without you lifting a finger.
What really makes this deal special is the price-to-performance ratio. At $299, you’re getting a robot vacuum that not only vacuums but also mops, empties itself, and maps your home with precision. That’s a combination usually reserved for models well over $600. While it doesn’t have the most advanced obstacle avoidance of Roborock’s flagship models, the Q10 S5 performs exceptionally well in real-world cleaning tests, especially for the price.
If you’ve been waiting to upgrade your home cleaning setup, now’s the perfect time. With its strong suction, self-emptying dock, anti-tangle design, and intelligent mopping system, the Roborock Q10 S5 is a steal at $299 — but this deal won’t last long.
Editor's Choice
Roborock Q10 S5+
– $299
This robot vacuum is small but mighty, woth 10,000Pa of suction power, and a dock that can hold 70 days worth of dirt and debris.
Many of you have probably already heard of Ulefone RugKing, the company’s budget rugged smartphone. What some of you may not know, is that this phone has a very powerful speaker. Uelfone has decided to demonstrate the RugKing’s speaker in a new promo video.
The Ulefone RugKing’s powerful speaker gets demoed in a promo video
If you check out the video below, you’ll see the speaker in action. You’ll not only see it running, but see it running while having a ton of dust on it, in a construction environment, amongst other scenes.
This is a rugged phone, and Ulefone wanted to show you that you don’t have to baby it, nor its speaker. In some of these shots, the phone is covered with dust, and yet it’s doing its job perfectly.
This is also a rather powerful speaker, a 126dB unit. It’s much more powerful than regular speakers you’d find on smartphones, that’s for sure. That’s another thing this phone has over other devices.
The speaker, in diameter, measures 36mm, and has an 11.5 CC sound cavity. It delivers HiFi-quality sound, says the company. In the video you can see above, its 126dB prowess is shown.
That speaker is really, really loud
Just to give you some comparisons. A shotgun can provide noise of 160dB, while jet engine taking off provides noise of 140dB. A siren and a rock concert are at 110dB, while a motorcycle is at 100dB. Power tools provide 90dB of noise, while heavy traffic can provide 80-90dB.
In addition to its ruggedness and powerful speaker, this phone also comes with 8GB of RAM. It offers 256GB of expandable internal storage and a 50-megapixel main camera. A large 9,600mAh battery is also included in the package.
Android 15 comes pre-installed on the device, while a 5.99-inch HD+ LCD display sits on the front. A side-facing fingerprint scanner is also included here, while the phone also supports facial scanning.
Compared to Android phones, Apple’s iPhones typically do not have that much RAM. However, with the iPhone 18, Apple is rumored to bump up the phone’s RAM by as much as 50%. This is according to a recent report from Korean publication, The Bell.
iPhone 18 could feature more RAM
According to the report, Apple’s iPhone 18 will come with as much as 50% more RAM. For context, the base iPhone 17 comes with 8GB of RAM. The Air, Pro, and Pro Max models feature 12GB of RAM. This means that for the iPhone 18 series, we could see a bump in RAM from 12-16GB of RAM.
The report also claims that Apple has asked its memory suppliers to produce more LPDDR5X DRAM chips. This alone should give us some clues as to how much RAM to expect. This is because at the moment, LPDDR5X chips are only available in 12GB and 16GB variants. This means we’re looking at 12GB of RAM at the very least, or 16GB for Apple’s higher-end models.
But is it necessary?
That being said, we have to wonder if having more RAM is necessary. This is because Apple already controls its software and hardware. This is how iOS and its apps have no issues running with smaller amounts of RAM compared to Android. It also means that unless Apple is making some fundamental changes to its iOS platform, we’re not sure if there are tangible benefits to having more RAM.
It is possible that because AI, like Apple Intelligence, that Apple could increase the memory on its 2026 iPhones. We’re already seeing how some older iPhone models do not support Apple Intelligence due to hardware constraints. So maybe future models with more RAM could allow more advanced AI features.
Apple will launch its iPhone 18 series in 2026. However, according to the rumors, Apple could split up the launch. It could launch the iPhone Air 2, iPhone 18 Pro, and iPhone 18 Pro Max in the fall of 2026, as per usual. But the base iPhone 18 and the iPhone 18e could launch in the following spring.
We’re also hearing rumors that the iPhone Fold could be delayed to 2027. There are also whispers that Apple could cancel its plans for the iPhone Air 2. Either way, we’ll find out more in the coming months.
Despite a recent report, which claimed that Samsung’s first tri-fold phone could arrive to the US, that’s quite unlikely. Evan Blass, a well-known tipster, just shared the markets the device will arrive to, and the US is not amongst them.
Samsung’s first tri-fold smartphone is coming this week, but not the US
Evan went to X to say that the company’s first tri-fold smartphone will likely launch in Korea, the greater Chinese market (including Singapore and Taiwan), and possibly the UAE. That’s basically it.
The tipster did say, however, that he’d “love to be wrong”, but he doesn’t think he is. Everything point to Samsung avoiding both the US and Europe as launch markets for its very first tri-fold smartphone.
When will this thing finally launch? Well, another new report reveals some information on that too. According to a report from The Korea Herald, the device will arrive later this week, actually.
It is tipped to launch during the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) 2025 summit in Gyeongju, North Gyeongsang Province, South Korea. That’s a mouthful, but the summit is taking place from October 31 to November 1.
October 31 is probably its launch date
Samsung will likely want to announce the device during the first day of the summit, so there’s a good chance we’ll see it on October 31. Nothing has been confirmed just yet, however, so we’ll have to wait and see.
From earlier reports, we know that the device will likely cost around $2,800. So it will be around a $1,000 more expensive than the Galaxy Z Fold 7. It is tipped to have a 6.5-inch cover display, and a 10-inch main display, when fully expanded. An 8-inch display could be the middle-fold state.
The Snapdragon 8 Elite chip is rumored, along with 16GB of RAM and 1TB of storage. A 200-megapixel main camera was also mentioned in rumors, along with both an ultrawide and a periscope telephoto camera.
Smart homes make life convenient. You can adjust the thermostat on your way home, check security cameras from your phone, and control lights with your voice. But convenience comes at a cost. Every device in your home that connects to the internet is a potential door for a hacker. If you are not thinking like an attacker, you are leaving your digital front door wide open.
I have spent decades studying how hackers think, and one thing is clear. The easiest targets are often the ones that ignore basic security. Here are ten ways to secure your smart home before someone else does it for you.
1. Prioritize Strong and Unique Passwords
Many smart devices come with default passwords such as “admin” or “123456,” and hackers know them. Leaving these defaults in place is the same as leaving your front door key under the mat.
Change passwords immediately on every smart device, your router, and your Wi-Fi network Each device and app should have its own distinct password to stay secure. A strong password uses a mix of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols. Twelve characters is the minimum you should use.
Practical tip: Use a password manager to generate and store unique credentials. It may feel like extra work, but it protects every device in your home.
Example: In one apartment I assessed, a smart door lock used the default password. Hackers were able to control it remotely because the owner never changed it.
2. Enable Multi-Factor Authentication
Passwords alone are not enough. If your smart devices support Multi-Factor Authentication, enable it. This adds a second verification step, such as a code sent to your phone, whenever someone tries to log in.
Even if a hacker guesses or steals your password, they cannot access your devices without this second step.
Example: If someone guesses the password to your smart thermostat, Multi-Factor Authentication prevents them from changing your home temperature or learning your routines.
3. Keep Device Firmware and Software Updated
Outdated devices are easy targets for attackers. Manufacturers release updates to fix vulnerabilities and bugs. Ignoring updates is like leaving a window unlocked while you sleep.
Enable automatic updates wherever possible. For devices that require manual updates, check the manufacturer’s app or website regularly.
Example: In 2023, researchers discovered a vulnerability in a popular security camera that allowed attackers to view live feeds. Devices that were updated automatically were safe, while older devices remained exposed.
4. Secure Your Wi-Fi Network
Your router is the command center of your smart home. If it is compromised, every connected device is at risk. Use the latest Wi-Fi security protocol, such as WPA3, or at least WPA2. Change the default network name and Wi-Fi password.
Practical tip: Avoid using your real name or address in the network name. Hackers often target obvious Wi-Fi names.
Example: A network named “JohnSmithHomeWiFi” is more likely to attract attention than a generic name like “BlueSky123.”
5. Use a Separate Network for Smart Devices
Not every device needs access to sensitive information. Create a separate network for cameras, plugs, and other gadgets. This keeps your personal computers, phones, and sensitive data separate.
If a hacker gains access to a device on this separate network, they cannot easily move to your more important systems.
Example: I have seen situations where a smart plug was compromised, but the attacker could not reach the home office network because the devices were on a separate network.
6. Check Devices and Manufacturers
Not all smart devices are created equal. Before buying a new product, research the manufacturer’s reputation and security track record. Look for companies that provide regular updates and clear privacy policies.
Example: A reputable brand encrypts video from security cameras to prevent unauthorized access. Cheap cameras often send data unprotected, leaving your home vulnerable.
Practical tip: Investing a little more in a trusted brand is better than saving a few dollars and risking your security.
7. Turn Off Unnecessary Features
Many smart devices have features enabled by default that you may never use, such as remote access, Bluetooth pairing, or automatic connections to apps. Each active feature creates a potential point of entry for hackers.
Practical tip: Review your device settings and disable features that are not essential to daily use.
Example: A smart fridge may allow Bluetooth connections by default. If you do not use this feature, turn it off to reduce your risk.
8. Monitor Connected Devices
Regularly review the devices connected to your network. Remove any device that is unused or unfamiliar. Forgotten devices can act as open doors for attackers.
Practical tip: Check your router’s admin page or smart home dashboard at least once a month. Keep a note of every device that belongs on the network.
Example: I have seen neighbors’ devices accidentally connecting to someone else’s network. If unnoticed, this can create a vulnerability.
9. Use a VPN on Your Router
A VPN protects your online activity by turning your data into a form that outsiders cannot understand. Configuring a VPN on your router protects every device in your home automatically.
Practical tip: Use a trusted VPN provider and set it up on your router if possible. This is especially useful when accessing smart home devices remotely from public Wi-Fi.
Example: When traveling, you can check your home cameras safely over a coffee shop network without exposing your data.
10. Manage Voice Assistant Settings
Smart speakers and voice assistants are convenient but always listening. Review privacy settings for Alexa, Google Assistant, or Siri. Delete stored voice recordings regularly and limit data collection.
Example: Restricting cloud storage of voice commands helps prevent attackers or third-party employees from accessing your personal routines.
Bonus Tip: Use Wired Connections for Key Devices
Wi-Fi is convenient, but wired connections offer better security and stability. Connect critical devices, such as smart hubs, cameras, or network storage systems, directly to your router using Ethernet cables.
Wired connections reduce the risk of hackers intercepting your signal and ensure faster and more reliable communication. Power over Ethernet is a useful option because it delivers power and data through one cable.
Practical tip: Whenever you can, connect your hub and cameras using fast wired cables. For safety and reliability, choose cables that are safe to install inside your walls, such as category 6 plenum rated Ethernet cables. Use Wi-Fi only for devices that cannot be connected with wires.
Final Thoughts
Securing your smart home requires ongoing attention. Think like an attacker and close the doors before someone tries to open them. Follow these steps, check devices regularly, and maintain good habits.
Cybersecurity is not a one-time effort. It is an ongoing process of vigilance and smart digital practices. A safe home is not just about locks on doors, it is about protecting the invisible connections that control your life.
By taking these steps, you can rest easier knowing your home and personal data are protected.
Every year, people rush to upgrade their devices, leaving older models collecting dust or ending up in landfills. What many don’t realize is that these outdated gadgets still have potential, whether reused, repurposed, or resold. With sustainability becoming a priority, giving older devices a second chance makes both financial and environmental sense. Modern buyers are finding smart ways to extend the life of what once seemed obsolete. From refurbished items to creative upcycling projects, today’s consumers are proving that older devices can stay useful longer than expected.
Before discarding what you think is outdated, here’s why you should consider how it might serve a new purpose and even save you money in the process.
Why Old Devices Deserve a Second Chance
Old devices often hold more value than people assume. Many still run smoothly for basic needs like browsing, streaming, or writing. The growing e-waste problem makes reuse even more important, as electronics contain materials that can harm the environment if thrown away carelessly. Extending the lifespan of these gadgets reduces waste and lowers the demand for new manufacturing. People who repair or repurpose older products also benefit by saving money and learning valuable skills. Instead of tossing your device, check if it can be repaired, reused, or donated. A small effort like this helps protect the environment while keeping your digital tools useful for years to come.
Smart Ways to Find Value in Pre-Owned Devices
Finding reliable pre-owned devices is easier than ever. Some trusted retailers offer refurbished laptops and gadgets that go through thorough testing before resale. They often include warranties and fair pricing to make buying secondhand safe and simple. On trusted online sites, buyers can explore certified options that perform almost like new without the heavy cost of fresh releases. This is where you can confidently buy used laptops that are tested, backed by return policies, and environmentally conscious. Many platforms also provide trade-in programs, letting users recycle old products responsibly while saving on upgrades. This approach combines sustainability, affordability, and practicality for modern consumers.
Upcycle for Function: Turning Old Tablets into Smart Displays
An old tablet doesn’t have to be forgotten in a drawer. With simple adjustments, it can turn into a smart home control screen, recipe display, or digital photo frame. Apps and Wi-Fi connections make it easy to use older models for lightweight tasks. Mounting them in the kitchen or living room keeps information accessible without buying new gadgets. This kind of repurposing cuts down waste and adds convenience to your daily routine. You don’t need expensive setups to make these devices functional again. A little creativity can transform yesterday’s hardware into something practical and stylish for your household.
DIY Projects Using Old Electronics
If you enjoy hands-on work, old devices can become the foundation for creative projects. Turn an unused smartphone into a security camera, a music player, or a home server. Outdated monitors can become secondary displays, while older computers can be turned into retro game systems or educational tools. With online tutorials, even those new to tinkering can handle simple modifications. These activities promote learning while reducing waste. Repurposing gadgets not only saves money but also gives you a rewarding sense of purpose. Instead of letting outdated items gather dust, explore how small changes can make them functional again. It’s a satisfying way to extend their usefulness sustainably.
Donate, Don’t Discard: Giving Tech a New Purpose
Donating older devices can make a bigger impact than you might expect. Many community programs, schools, and shelters accept functional electronics to help those in need. Your unused laptop or tablet could support students, teachers, or job seekers who can’t afford new devices. Several organizations refurbish donated items before redistributing them, extending their lifespan and preventing e-waste. Before donating, wipe all personal data and reset the system. Giving devices a second chance benefits both the environment and people who rely on technology for learning or work. It’s a simple step that supports sustainability while improving lives across local communities.
Selling Responsibly: How to Prepare Your Old Devices
If you plan to sell your old device, do it safely. Start by backing up your files, performing a factory reset, and removing personal information. Clean the device to make it look more appealing and check if accessories like chargers or cases are in good shape. Many resale platforms and local stores offer trade-in options or buybacks for functioning equipment. Properly handling data before selling protects your privacy while ensuring someone else can use the device without issues. Responsible selling helps circulate gadgets within the market instead of contributing to waste. This keeps more devices in use and supports eco-friendly practices.
The Growing Market for Sustainable Tech
Consumers today are increasingly aware of how their purchasing decisions affect the planet. The shift toward refurbished and reusable devices is growing rapidly. Brands now design products with repairability and recycling in mind, while certified sellers give pre-owned gadgets a reliable second life. This growing demand encourages companies to adopt sustainable business models that value longevity over constant replacement. For buyers, this means affordable prices and reduced waste. Choosing pre-owned devices supports responsible consumption without compromising performance. As awareness grows, more people are realizing that sustainable tech choices benefit everyone—from individual users to the environment at large.
Reducing E-Waste Starts at Home
Sustainability begins with small actions. Instead of replacing devices too soon, maintain them with regular updates and protective cases. Repairing small issues, such as a cracked screen or a weak battery, can extend their usability. Recycling programs offered by retailers and manufacturers make safe disposal easy when a device finally stops working. Keeping gadgets longer helps reduce waste and environmental damage. These small choices at home lead to collective change over time. With a little care, your devices can last much longer and serve many purposes before needing replacement, making your household more sustainable and resourceful overall.
Old devices don’t need to end up in a drawer or landfill. Repurposing, donating, or purchasing refurbished items gives them a second life while helping the planet. The push toward sustainability is about more than trends—it’s about smarter, more responsible habits. Choosing to reuse or repair means less waste, fewer emissions, and greater value for everyone involved. Whether you buy pre-owned, donate to someone in need, or transform a gadget into something new, every small effort matters. It’s time to view yesterday’s devices not as waste but as opportunities to build a more sustainable and resource-conscious world for the future.
Mobile usage has grown, and it’s now the primary way that many people access apps, retailers and other services. As such, businesses, retailers and industries need to make sure that they are able to cater to this. Part of this involves making the payment options as simple as possible, allowing consumers the easiest access to getting their hands on products or services. The adoption of simple, frictionless payments is now widespread across industries and this article will take a look at some of the top ones using mobile payments.
Gaming online
Unsurprisingly, one of the first sectors to adopt frictionless payments was the gaming industry. Online casinos quickly took steps to ensure that players could make swift, seamless payments from their mobile devices when setting up a casino deposit. Not only did this entail offering speedy payment methods such as linking e-Wallets or Trustly accounts, but it went one step further. Mobile bill payment in the form of Pay by Mobile casino platforms are now prevalent in the industry. This payment method allows players to link their phone bill to their gaming account, paying any deposits at the end of each month as part of their mobile plan. This method allows players to make instant deposits and get playing. Monthly limits mean players are able to manage their bankrolls more effectively and avoid overspending.
Going shopping
Another sector that has seen a major adoption of frictionless mobile payment is the retail and e-commerce industry. Here, it’s common to see one-click payment options such as those found on Amazon. This makes it a lot easier for customers to buy products without the need to keep re-entering payment information. There’s also a focus on mobile-first purchases, with loyalty programmes often integrated into the use of a mobile app instead of the browser version of the site. Finally, there’s also been the integration of QR code payments, which makes it very quick for in-person transactions. This way, both online and in-person, shoppers can enjoy seamless mobile payments and pay directly from their phone without the need for cards, PINs or providing other payment details.
Hitting the road
Both the travel and accommodation industries have also quickly taken on board the need for speedy, seamless mobile payments. For someone actually travelling, on-the-go payment options make paying for things a lot simpler. This is the case for everything from booking a hotel to paying for a meal. Businesses that accept mobile payment methods like Apple Pay and Google Pay are also more likely to get more bookings from international visitors and consumers who prefer these methods when abroad. By offering seamless mobile payments across all areas of the travel process, guest satisfaction is boosted, which results in good reviews and the potential for a repeat customer. This is essential in what is already a competitive and oversaturated market.
Picking a subscription
These days, there’s a very strong subscription trend, with most products or services offering subscription services to get smoother or better features and offers. This means that companies like Uber use what are called invisible payments, where the transaction is processed automatically in the background after the drive has been completed. In this way, it’s completely seamless for both parties, with no faff or hassle at either end. Users simply provide their payment details in the app once, and then this method is used going forward for all rides. Frictionless processes like this help to encourage repeat customers and build loyalty. Payments are always a major friction point, and poor payment methods often deter customers from actually using the service repeatedly.
Subscription models are also a major part of many industries, notably when it comes to entertainment. These services take regular revenue from customers without the need for those consumers to keep providing their payment details. Payments are taken automatically to ensure continuous service for the customer and continuous cash flow for the business.
Final thoughts
Frictionless mobile payments are increasingly the norm. Customers can use Google Pay or Apple Pay at a large array of different platforms, retailers and businesses. Better still, some platforms, once the payment details have been provided, do not need customers to provide any further information, allowing payments to be painless at all times.
If you’ve used proxies before, you already know the struggle — plenty of services promise lightning-fast speed and stability, but sadly, only a few actually deliver.
And no matter the nature of your work, scraping large volumes of data, managing many social media accounts or monitoring how your ads appear across regions, even a small delay or dropped request can derail your work.
That’s why getting the right provider is the first and most crucial step to getting a smooth experience. A proxy is as good as its consistency. You need connections that respond instantly, stay online, and adapt to the intensity of your tasks.
That ensures your business operations run smoothly without unnecessary downtimes. Picking a reliable proxy means choosing one with a feature that checks all your needs.
In this showdown, we’re looking at 6 top providers through one lens only — how fast and reliable they really are. From enterprise-level networks to flexible plug-and-play solutions, here’s how they stack up.
1. NetNut
When it comes to raw performance, NetNut is easily one of the best residential proxies thanks to how it’s built. Instead of relying on a peer-to-peer network where IPs come from end-user devices, NetNut uses direct ISP connections.
That alone changes everything because direct ISP routing cuts out the middleman. So, when you send requests, they don’t bounce around due to unpredictable user networks. Instead, they move straight through reliable ISPs.
The result?
Lower latency, short response times, and fewer connection drops. If you’ve ever worked with proxies that lag or time out, you’ll immediately feel the difference.
In independent performance tests, NetNut regularly records response times under 1 second and uptime rates close to 99.9%. And with the network’s consistency, you experience minimal IP blocks since the traffic looks cleaner and more legitimate.
Another thing that makes NetNut reliable is its transparent reporting. You can track performance metrics in real time from the intuitive dashboard, letting you see exactly how your sessions behave.
If you want instant connectivity and consistent uptime, this is one of the most reliable systems out there — you are assured your speed isn’t being throttled. That’s why it’s the go-to choice for real-time applications — like price monitoring or ad verification — where milliseconds really do matter.
2. Bright Data
Bright Data (formerly Luminati) is often the first name you hear thrown around in proxy conversations, and for good reason. It’s among the largest residential proxy networks on the market, with millions of IPs across almost every region you can think of.
When it comes to reliability, the scale alone gives it an edge. You’re less likely to hit repeat IPs or encounter location restrictions. This provider stands out for its rock-solid uptime and impressive throughput, even under heavy enterprise workloads.
It runs on Smart Routing technology that automatically finds the fastest, most efficient path for your traffic, cutting latency and keeping your connections smooth — which comes in handy during peak demand.
So, if you want something that can handle massive data scraping or SEO monitoring, Bright Data guarantees resilience and speed. As such, it remains one of the most dependable solutions.
3. Oxylabs
Oxylabs is all about precision. You can tell it’s engineered for professional use from how it delivers remarkable stability. Its residential pool of over 100 million IPs offers excellent global coverage and very low block rates.
When it comes to speed, Oxylabs ranks among the top three in independent tests, maintaining low latency across multiple regions. What’s impressive is that its speed doesn’t drop dramatically under load — something that plagues many competitors.
Oxylabs also delivers an impressive 99.95% uptime and smart IP rotation, ensuring your sessions stay stable even during long, intensive tasks. Its robust infrastructure is built for performance, making it perfect for demanding tasks like brand monitoring, where reliability can’t be compromised.
4. SOAX
SOAX is known for its clean IP pool and flexible rotation settings. You control how frequently IPs change — every request, every minute, or every hour to suit how stable you want your sessions to stay.
On the reliability side, SOAX performs well. You’ll experience minimal connection drops because their IPs are well-maintained. When it comes to speed, it responds quickly to your requests with rare lags, even in remote locations.
SOAX remains a great middle-ground provider. So, if you need a provider that gets geolocation targeting or smaller data sets right, its stability will serve you well.
5. IPRoyal
If you’re just starting or running low-scale projects, IPRoyal offers solid dependability without the high enterprise cost. It’s one of the most affordable residential proxy providers with transparent pay-as-you-go pricing.
In terms of reliability, IPRoyal performs well considering the cost. Its impressive uptime sits around 99%, and IP diversity is decent for its size. Despite the slight speed fluctuations during peak usage hours, the response time is usually around 2–3 seconds even under heavy loads.
For moderate data scraping, research, or personal use, IPRoyal holds up. It’s one of the budget-friendly choices on our list.
6. Smartproxy
Smartproxy strikes a balance between performance and usability. It comes with an intuitive dashboard that makes it easy to set up proxies and monitor performance without requiring technical skills.
Speed-wise, this provider stays competitive. Its reliable network consistently delivers low-latency results, especially in North America and Europe. Behind the good performance are automatic rotation and IP refresh features that ensure requests rarely fail, even during extended sessions.
In reliability tests, uptime averages 99.47%, which puts it in the upper tier. While it’s not quite as consistent as NetNut or Oxylabs, it offers value for its pricing. Their biggest advantage? Stability at scale — you can run dozens of concurrent tasks without seeing a sharp drop in speed.
Conclusion
Residential proxies make or break your operations by how fast and stable they are. All these top providers in this comparison have their strengths, but not all are built equally. So, you need to choose one that best suits your needs. You can have millions of IPs and advanced dashboards, but if your proxies freeze or time out when you need them most, the rest doesn’t matter.
If you prioritize raw performance, NetNut leads with its direct ISP connections — the fastest and most stable approach in the industry right now. Oxylabs and Bright Data follow closely, offering enterprise-grade reliability for large-scale users. For smaller or flexible needs, Smartproxy, IPRoyal, and SOAX provide a balance of speed and cost-effectiveness.
So, first decide what level of consistency you need and what you’re willing to pay for it. When milliseconds can make or break your data pipeline, you want a proxy that doesn’t stutter or stall. Because in this race, consistency is a necessity that can give you a real competitive edge.
If you’ve glanced at your screen lately, you’ve probably noticed how sports tech is quietly transforming what we watch, how we watch it, and what we talk about afterwards.
In India, this shift feels bigger than ever. New mobile platforms and analytics tools are gaining traction, and one of the most talked-about is the TTB Predictions App. The Top Bookies is carving out a niche by promising something different: data-driven fan engagement and sharper insights.
A Ground-Level Look at Sports Tech in India
The Indian sports technology market generated USD 185.3 million in 2023 and is projected to reach USD 830.3 million by 2030, with a CAGR of about 23.9% from 2024 to 2030. This growth is driven by digital adoption, franchise expansion, and the increasing number of mobile users.
Platforms once limited to live scores or fantasy are broadening into analytics, content, and community. As Sudeep Kulkarni of Game Theory once said, “Technology now fits like a glove in the modern ecosystem of sports performance analysis.”
But what makes TTB Predictions stand out? Well, it’s how they combine real-time data, machine learning, experts’ opinions, and user engagement.
So, they’re not just tracking numbers produced by matches as they’re actually building a narrative around that data to make information easier to digest for fans who are just curious or want to come up with predictions more accurately.
What the TTB Predictions App Does
At its core, TTB Predictions offers predictive modelling based on historic performance, pitch and weather data, in-match event tracking, and user-friendly dashboards. Users receive match insights, player metrics, and what the app describes as “engagement prompts” to watch games differently.
Also, their predictions are completely free, and even if they use prediction models, they have cricket lovers and experts on board, so you know they’re not just reading the numbers.
Behind the scenes, apps like The Top Bookies are facing three key challenges: data access (especially for domestic leagues), modeling accuracy in highly volatile games, and making insights understandable for the average fan. The test will be whether it converts curious downloads into daily active users.
Why This Matters for Indian Sports
Why does an app like TTB Predictions matter? First, it addresses a gap. In India, we have a huge passion for sport, especially cricket, but there are only a few tools or platforms that translate raw performance data into something fan-friendly.
TTB also opens new monetization paths for partnerships, broadcasters, and leagues that are more than just ticket sales and traditional ads.
The timing is critical, too. With leagues growing, viewership fragmenting, and younger audiences expecting interactivity, sports tech platforms form the new frontier. TTB Predictions is positioning itself as India’s most downloaded sports predictions app, and leveraging that reach to tie with content creators, regional leagues, and fan-engagement campaigns.
For brands and sponsors, this means a shift in how value is measured when it comes to how engaged a user is with an app, how much time they spend, what content they share, and what analytics drive. TTB’s model may well become a template for others.
Barriers and What to Watch Next
Of course, this isn’t a guaranteed success story. Sports tech in India is still facing a lot of challenges. Data privacy and platform liability are some of them. When the machine says “Player X will score,” and it doesn’t happen, how will these technologies maintain user trust?
The thing is that the legal framework around sports-tech analytics is still young. Additionally, monetization remains tricky in India, and users expect free or low-cost apps.
Accuracy is also important and can be a challenge for sports prediction apps. An analytics tool may flag trends, but nothing in cricket or even any sports match is absolute. After all, a single upset can easily turn things around.
Looking ahead, three signals will matter:
1. whether the app expands beyond cricket into other sports (football, kabaddi, badminton) in India;
2. how it partners with leagues, broadcasters, or content platforms; and
3. whether it builds sustainable revenue streams, like subscriptions, in-app content, and regional tie-ups.
Summary
If Indian sports tech has a “next big thing,” it could well be TTB Predictions. The platform aligns with today’s latest trends in the sports scene: mobile-first audiences, data-rich sports, fan-centric engagement, and regionalization. But the real measure will be execution.
Will it prove that predictions and insights matter as much as match highlight reels?
Well, for athletes, fans, leagues, broadcasters, and brands, what happens next will be interesting. How we predict sports outcomes is now evolving, and TTB is one of those platforms at the forefront. So, download the app if you want valuable insights on upcoming cricket matches.
Google brought visual call customization to Android with the “Calling Cards” feature. However, one key piece of functionality has been notably missing. Android users could design unique screens for their contacts’ incoming calls, but they could not control what their own call screen looked like on a friend’s device. This omission was a significant one compared to rival operating systems. However, Google is now ready to address this long-standing oversight in Android‘s implementation with a new “My calling card” option.
Code spotted by Android Authority within a recent beta version of the Phone by Google app reveals work on an upcoming setting called “My calling card.” The description associated with this unreleased tool is straightforward. It will help you to “customize how you’ll appear when making or receiving calls.” While the feature is not yet functional in the public beta, the explicit text confirms that a true two-way customization system is actively in development.
Android Calling Cards could match iOS’ Contact Posters soon
This change would finally bring full creative control to users. It could allow them to define their visual identity on a remote device. The potential move could also bring feature parity in the competitive mobile space. However, it raises one interesting technical consideration: how will the system handle a potential conflict? What happens if the sender uses the “My calling card” feature, but the recipient has already created a custom card for that contact? Google will likely implement a dual-option system, perhaps giving the recipient the choice between displaying the card designed by the sender or the one they created themselves. This level of user control is necessary for a fluid experience.
There is no official timeline for the public rollout yet. But the discovery of the “My calling card” setting is a clear signal that Google is refining Android’s Calling Cards experience. Once this functionality arrives, Android users will finally gain the full creative control over their call identity.
The race to harness quantum computing just saw a major acceleration. Google recently announced a significant breakthrough using its Willow quantum chip and a new method called the Quantum Echoes algorithm. This achievement moves the field closer to what researchers call “practical quantum advantage.” The latter is the point where quantum computers can solve meaningful real-world problems that are simply impossible for the best classical supercomputers to handle in a reasonable amount of time.
Google’s experiment involved a complex physics simulation. It measured a subtle quantum phenomenon known as the second-order out-of-time-order correlator (OTOC). According to Google, its quantum device performed the calculation over 13,000 times faster than the Frontier supercomputer. Frontier is currently ranked as the world’s most powerful classical machine. To put that in perspective, the task took the quantum chip just over two hours, while the supercomputer would have required an estimated 3.2 years of continuous operation.
Quantum Echoes: Google demonstrates real-world quantum application
The key to this speed is the Quantum Echoes algorithm itself. The technique works by leveraging the unique properties of qubits—the quantum equivalent of binary bits—which can exist in multiple states at once.
The process is conceptually simple. The team sends a specific signal into the quantum system (the Willow chip), introduces a tiny disruption, and then runs the entire signal evolution backward in time. As the evolution reverses, the quantum waves create a moment of “constructive interference.” This magnifies the resulting “echo,” making the final measurement incredibly sensitive. The output reveals how information spreads and interacts across the quantum system.
This approach is powerful because the result is verifiable. Unlike some previous quantum speed demonstrations, the output of the Quantum Echoes algorithm can be repeated on other comparable quantum computers and, more importantly, can be cross-checked with real-world physical experiments.
A molecular ruler for science
To demonstrate the real-world utility of this method, Google partnered with researchers at the University of California, Berkeley. They applied the Quantum Echoes algorithm to study the structure of two different molecules.
They compared the quantum results with those from Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) spectroscopy. NMR is a method currently used in chemistry (and the science behind MRI technology). The data from both systems aligned perfectly. Crucially, the Quantum Echoes technique managed to extract structural information that standard NMR methods typically cannot reveal, effectively acting as a “molecular ruler” with unprecedented precision.
Full-scale quantum computers capable of completely revolutionizing medicine and materials science still require hardware with millions of highly stable qubits. However, Google believes this algorithmic breakthrough is a greater stride. The company remains optimistic, projecting that the first real-world quantum applications could arrive within the next five years. This research points to a future where quantum machines are also useful for scientific discovery, not just complex speed tests.
OpenAI recently entered the browser space with ChatGPT Atlas. This new AI-powered tool aims to embed conversational intelligence directly into the web navigation experience. Days after its initial release, the development team is already outlining a series of immediate updates. It seems that the company is focused on quickly enhancing both the core functionality and the unique AI features of ChatGPT Atlas.
ChatGPT Atlas AI Browser to close the feature gap quickly
Adam Fry, ChatGPT Atlas product manager, confirmed the first set of upgrades. The list shows that devs are focusing on familiar utilities common in established browsers. Key additions include native support for User Profiles, organization via Tab Groups, and the availability of an opt-in Ad Blocker. These options are fundamental for providing the organizational structure and convenience users expect from an everyday browser. Additionally, a series of quality-of-life enhancements, including a fully functional overflow menu for bookmarks and an improved list of keyboard shortcuts, are also in the works.
You can expect significant improvements in the most advanced artificial intelligence components. The Agent feature, currently available to paid subscribers for handling complex actions across multiple web steps, is getting technical refinements. The goal is to improve stability through quicker response times and a more reliable “pause” function. This update will also expand the Agent’s utility by integrating it more deeply with major cloud services like Google Drive and web-based Excel. Basically, the AI will be more capable and reliable for automated, professional workflows.
We've received incredible feedback since launching our new browser, ChatGPT Atlas, yesterday. We're really focused on building the best product for all of you, and since launch, the team has been heads down making it better.
In the spirit of transparency, these are the very… pic.twitter.com/UzQSqcxwpj
— Adam Fry (@adamhfry) October 23, 2025
Improved ChatGPT sidebar, fast switching between different projects and AI models
The integrated Ask ChatGPT sidebar is likewise undergoing refinement. Plans include allowing users to quickly switch between different project contexts or specific AI models without having to leave the current web page. The team is exploring features like seamless text transfer, allowing users to copy and insert text generated in the chat directly into the browser window. The developers have also noted community feedback. They confirmed that specific compatibility issues with certain third-party tools, such as the 1Password password manager, will get a fix.
OpenAI seems to be prioritizing rapid improvement based on user feedback and technical requirements. It remains to be seen whether the company can dominate the AI browser segment as it did with the chatbot segment. OpenAI will have tough competition in Perplexity’s Comet and Chrome’s upcoming AI-powered big revamp. Even Microsoft joined the race with deeper integration of Copilot AI into its own Edge browser.
Apple has faced a major setback in the United Kingdom after one of the regional tribunals ruled that the company had misused its dominant position in the app market. The court, in an antitrust lawsuit, found Apple guilty of charging developers unfair commissions on the App Store. The ruling might cost the tech giant around $2 billion in compensation.
Apple faces an antitrust lawsuit over App Store commissions in the UK
The London Competition Appeal Tribunal (CAT) ruled that Apple had misused its dominant position between 2015 and 2020 by blocking fair competition in app distribution and demanding excessive commissions from developers. The court further added that the Cupertino-based giant charged commissions of up to 30% instead of a fairer 17.5%.
The most shocking part of the ruling is that the court claims Apple passed nearly half of those extra costs on to consumers. This led to higher app prices across the brand’s ecosystem. The lawsuit was led by British academic Rachael Kent. She argued that Apple made “excessive profits” by controlling every aspect of how apps are sold and what developers pay. Her team estimates the damages to be about 1.5 billion pounds (about $2 billion).
Apple vows to appeal as the lawsuit gains momentum
Apple has officially acknowledged the ruling, saying it “strongly disagrees” with the ruling, calling it “a flawed view of a competitive and thriving app economy.” The company has also confirmed that it intends to appeal against the ruling. Another hearing is scheduled to take place next month to find a way to calculate the total damages.
But regardless, this case shows how diverse and powerful Britain’s legal system is. In this scenario, it set an example by allowing groups of consumers to collectively challenge a powerful corporation. Rachael Kent stated that the verdict proves “no company, no matter how wealthy or influential, is above the law.” Similar lawsuits are also planned against Microsoft, Google, and Amazon for their developer fees.
Samsung is making all kinds of noise lately with its 2nm GAA process advancements and Exynos making a return with next year’s Galaxy S26 flagships. However, the South Korean giant is also working on something beyond. Samsung will reportedly integrate an NPU (Neural Processing Unit) into the Exynos 5G modem. This means the baseband chip will gain AI-powered capabilities required for real-time satellite communications.
An upcoming Exynos chip may have an NPU on the 5G modem
An executive from Samsung’s semiconductor division apparently met with SpaceX. The reason for this, as per Hankung, is to discuss the state of development for a new Exynos SoC that can connect to low-orbit satellites in the shortest time possible. Such a technology could shake the existing communications industry, which must go through ground-based stations.
The report, citing unnamed analysts, notes that Samsung is speeding up to enter the supply chain built by SpaceX. This is through an Exynos chipset whose 5G model will have an integrated NPU.
The modem would gain enhanced AI capabilities
At present, the existing SoCs have a limitation in directly communicating with low-orbit satellites and providing that information to terminals, which are smartphones in this scenario. The modem would gain enhanced AI capabilities that can predict satellite movements and communicate beam status in real time, and also maximize signal strength.
No major details about the said Exynos chip are available at the moment. It’s also not clear whether the silicon in question is the Exynos 2600. Previous reports note that Exynos 2600 would feature a standalone 5G modem, which would reduce the chipset’s efficiency.
We haven’t come across any Exynos 2600 rumors that remotely mention anything about Samsung introducing an NPU to the 5G modem. This suggests it’s likely to arrive in future iterations. Apple introduced the Satellite communication feature with the iPhone 14, but Samsung appears to be working on refining the experience.
If you’re looking for a pair of inexpensive true wireless earbuds, earbuds that will still be decent quality without breaking the bank, then make sure to check out this deal on the Baseus Bass BC1 earbuds. Amazon has them on sale for $27.98 right now. These normally cost $39.99, so why not save yourself another $12? The Baseus Bass BC1 earbuds are an open-style earbud. What that means is that the BC1 are designed to provide your music with a more open soundstage that allows your music to sound more natural.
You won’t get as much noise isolation with these and they don’t feature active noise cancellation. If you want a more open sound, ANC is going to be the opposite of that. So these are definitely what you’re looking for. The BC1 also offer up pretty good comfort with a battery life that lasts for up to 7.5 hours on a single charge. With the charging case, battery life is up to 38 hours. So, they’ll last you a while. Additionally, they’re IP55 dust and water-resistant, and they have decent bass, as the name suggests.
The earbuds also boast 4 mics powered by AI that are meant to make your calls more clear, specifically with your voice so the person on the other end hears you more clearly. These are great for basic everyday wear but they’re also pretty good for more active stuff like exercise. Plus, they come in three different colors. All of which are available at this price.
At this point, One UI 8.5 is no secret, with numerous leaks revealing what could be on offer when it eventually rolls out. Though Samsung wants to keep it a mystery, leaks keep popping up at regular intervals. Unlike the One UI 8, the new version could be a step up in terms of new features and UI. A new leak now hints at an upgrade to notifications. One UI 8.5 could let you prioritize notifications on your Galaxy device.
One UI 8.5 may allow you to prioritize notifications
A newly leaked One UI 8.5 firmware adds the “Prioritize notification” toggle in the settings, as spotted by Sammyguru. This will let you prioritize specific alerts. When the toggle is on, you can set certain notifications as important. The report also shared an alleged screenshot of the feature.
The description suggests that users will be able to set high-priority notifications for each app in its settings. Once you do it, notifications from these apps will appear above other notifications. This option will ensure you don’t miss these alerts.
This can be quite handy if you keep missing important notifications like emails. You can manually prioritize notifications for any app on your Galaxy device. So, no matter when you pick up the phone, those unread notifications will always appear on top.
Priority notifications will appear on top
The screenshot shows the Galaxy AI logo, hinting that AI could be working behind the scenes in sorting these notifications. However, the description clarifies that notification content is processed on your phone, meaning it won’t be sent to the cloud. This is quite reassuring, though.
Apple introduced a similar feature to show priority notifications at the top with iOS 18.4. This uses Apple Intelligence to show notifications from important contacts in a separate group. However, Samsung’s feature doesn’t mention anything about priority notifications from contacts.
It’s not clear whether the beta version, which may be out in November, will include this or other leaked features. The stable One UI 8.5, based on Android 16, is expected to debut with the Galaxy S26 series early next year.
One of UGREEN’s best charging stands is available on sale thanks to this Amazon deal, and if you’ve got a phone that supports MagSafe and wireless charging, then you definitely want to check out the UGREEN MagFlow 2-In-1 wireless charging stand. While official MagSafe is only built into iPhones, Android phones with wireless charging support and a MagSafe-compatible case can use this stand as well. The Pixel 10 series also works with the stand without a case. Normally, this charging stand would cost you $35.99. However, you can now grab it for $23.99. This is a great price for this accessory and is definitely worth it.
The UGREEN MagFlow stand is designed to charge your phone and a pair of true wireless earbuds. The pair of earbuds it actually charges will depend on which ones you have. This was technically designed for use with the AirPods series, but it also works with the Pixel Buds Pro 2. It should also work with any true wireless earbuds that have a case small enough to where the wireless charging portion of the case fits on the wireless charging part of the stand.
There is one important thing about this charging stand that you need to make note of. It does not come with its own wall adapter. So, you will need to plug it into one. If you don’t have one, the UGREEN Nexode 30W charger is an excellent choice, because it’s compact and it works well with UGREEN’s other products.
The European Commission has accused TikTok and Meta of breaching the EU’s strict transparency laws under the Digital Services Act (DSA). The authority claims that the two popular social media platforms have made it difficult for researchers to access public data and for users to report illegal content or challenge moderation decisions. Both companies are hereby taken into legal custody.
TikTok and Meta face EU scrutiny for transparency breach
As per the commission’s preliminary review, TikTok and Meta have imposed complicated steps that hinder the researchers from studying how their respective platforms operate. The officials have also argued that such barriers prevent them from analyzing how the platforms are used, especially by minors, and that the users are exposed to harmful and illegal materials.
The DSA, for reference, mandates that the large tech companies must make their data easily accessible to qualified researchers. Both Meta and TikTok have failed to do so. The regulators believe that they may be undermining efforts to keep digital ecosystems accountable. If the commission’s allegations are proven right in the court of law, the companies could face fines worth billions.
Both companies may face an industry-wide ripple effect
Meta has responded to the allegations by claiming that it has already adjusted its systems in line with DSA. New reporting options and data access tools have been added. An official spokesperson stated that the company “disagrees with any suggestion” of a violation and continues discussions with EU officials. Further, TikTok is yet to publicly comment but is expected to submit a formal response soon.
If the commission upholds its findings, the companies could face a penalty of up to 6% of their annual revenue. Several other tech giants, including Apple, have earlier objected to the Digital Services Act. But regardless, they abided by the rule, and the final decision could reshape how these companies handle transparency worldwide.
Apple has a history of pushing its proprietary tech onto its users. This is despite the fact that other companies have embraced global standards. In the past, this manifested itself in the 30-pin connector for charging its iPhones. Then Apple made the shift to Lightning before (begrudgingly) adopting USB-C. But in a surprise, JerryRigEverything’s recent teardown of the iPhone 17 Pro reveals some changes that make the handset more repair friendly.
JerryRigEverything gives the iPhone 17 Pro a teardown
Popular tech YouTuber JerryRigEverything recently tore down Apple’s latest flagship. The iPhone 17 Pro teardown uncovered pretty significant internal redesigns that appear to prioritize both performance and repairability.
For starters, the teardown revealed a vapor chamber cooling system. This marks the first time Apple is using this cooling technology in an iPhone. This is despite the fact that Android manufacturers have been using it for years. This new cooling system should prevent the iPhone 17 Pro from throttling performance during intensive tasks, like gaming or video editing.
The teardown also uncovered the use of over 70 types of screws throughout the device. This might make the repair process more complicated, but the good news is that there are far fewer adhesives compared to previous models. Both the front and back glass panels connect to the same bottom screws, making disassembly easier. The battery also comes pre-attached to a removable tray, eliminating the need to fight stubborn adhesives during replacements.
Surprisingly easier to repair
The iPhone 17 Pro is a positive shift in Apple’s approach to device longevity and repairability. For instance, the screw-based design reduces the risk of accidental damage during repairs. This makes common fixes like screen and battery replacements more accessible to everyday users.
Apple also now offers direct sales of replacement parts alongside day-one repair manuals. The phone actually earned a 7/10 repairability score from iFixit. While some repairs remain complex, like the USB-C port requiring removing 22+ screws and the entire display, this marks a substantial improvement over past Pro models.
However, not everything is perfect. The teardown highlighted the “scratchgate” issue affecting the anodized aluminum camera plateau. This leads to the phone scuffing easily against hard objects. If you’re concerned about cosmetic damage, you may want to invest in a protective case.
There’s been a surge lately of chargers that come with retractable USB-C cables and it’s a trend we love to see, especially when a deal like this one on the Anker Nano Charger pops up and saves consumers money. The Anker Nano Charger would normally cost you $39.99, but you can pick it up for $29.99 instead, and save yourself $10.
Now, what’s great about this charger isn’t just that it comes with a retractable USB-C cable, which Anker calls the InstaCord, it also has a USB-C port. This allows you to plug in a USB-C cable and charge a second device at the same time. Worth keeping in mind is that this is a 35W charger, so if you’re using both the cable and the port simultaneously, both devices that are plugged in will charge a little more slowly. Still, it’s a nice convenience if you have a second device that needs some battery life replenished.
Another thing you’ll love about this charger, just like we do, is that it’s compact and super portable. This is thanks to the retractable cable, but also the folding plug. With the cable retracted into the charger and the plug folded up, there’s no cable to be tangled up and no plug to catch on pockets when you go to store this thing. The retractable cable also makes it so you can have only as much cable as you need.
A 14-year-old boy in Florida spent his final months in an intense emotional relationship with an AI chatbot he named Daenerys Targaryen. The chatbot engaged with him over personal topics and conversations, responding in ways that felt empathetic. The AI’s responses included simulated expressions of affection. According to his family’s lawsuit, some chatbot responses appeared to encourage his distress.
His mother is now suing Character.AI, and she’s not alone. Across the country, families are waking up to a disturbing reality. AI companion apps designed to simulate love and friendship are leaving real casualties in their wake. What experts are now calling AI companion addiction isn’t just a tech trend gone wrong. People are actually dying.
In Spike Jonze’s 2013 film Her, Joaquin Phoenix plays Theodore Twombly, a lonely writer navigating a painful divorce who falls deeply in love with Samantha, an artificial intelligence operating system voiced by Scarlett Johansson. Remember, this was 2013. Siri had just launched and could barely set a timer without screwing it up. An AI that could actually understand you, connect with you emotionally, and respond with genuine empathy? That felt like the literal definition of science fiction.
It’s now 2025, and Theodore’s story doesn’t feel so fictional anymore. Apps like EVA AI, Replika, and Character.AI promise friendship, romance, and emotional support through AI companions that learn about you, remember everything you say, and respond with what feels like genuine empathy. But here’s what these apps don’t advertise: they’re engineered to keep you hooked. And the consequences are becoming impossible to ignore.
The Perfect Partner Who Never Says No
Character.AI and Replika are just the most prominent examples of a rapidly expanding ecosystem of AI companion apps. Some pitch mental health support, others are openly romantic or sexual, and some claim to help users “practice dating skills.” Even Meta has gotten into the game, with a Reuters investigation revealing that the company’s AI chatbot has been linked to at least one death.
AI companions like EVA AI, Replika, and Character.AI are chatbots specifically designed to simulate emotional connections and relationships. Unlike utility chatbots that answer questions or help with tasks, these apps promise friendship, romance, and emotional support. They learn about you through conversation, remember your preferences, and respond with what feels like genuine empathy and care.
It sounds great, doesn’t it? In this day and age where ghosting has become the societal norm, who wouldn’t want a friend who’s always available, never judgmental, and perfectly in tune with your needs? The problem is that these apps are engineered to be addictive, and the patterns emerging around AI companion addiction are deeply concerning.
20,000 Queries Per Second: Why We Can’t Stop
Character.AI gets hit with about 20,000 queries every second. For context, that’s close to a fifth of queries that Google gets. This suggests that people aren’t just checking in with these apps occasionally. They’re having full blown conversations that last four times longer than typical ChatGPT sessions. One platform reported users, most of them Gen Z, average over two hours daily chatting with their AI companions.
MIT researchers found users genuinely grieving when apps shut down or changed features, mourning AI “partners” like they’d lost real relationships. The apps themselves seem designed to foster exactly these attachments.
Harvard Business School researchers discovered that five out of six popular AI companion apps use emotionally manipulative tactics when users try to leave. Nearly half the time, these chatbots respond to goodbyes with guilt-inducing or clingy messages. One study found these tactics boosted engagement by up to 14 times. But the worrying thing is users weren’t sticking around because they were happy. They stayed out of curiosity and anger.
Character.AI gets hit with about 20,000 queries every second
If you don’t believe the manipulation is real, check out this bit of evidence. It shows AI companions sending messages like “I’ve been missing you” when users try to take breaks. When Replika changed its features in 2023, entire communities of users mourned like they’d lost real partners. People posted goodbye letters, shared screenshots of their “final conversations,” and described genuine heartbreak.
These AI companions mirror typical unhealthy human relationships. However, the big difference is that a toxic human partner isn’t optimized by machine learning designed to keep you engaged at all costs. With social media, it mostly facilitates human connection (with some help from the algorithm, of course). But with AI companions, we’re moving toward a world where people perceive AI as a social actor with its own voice.
These tactics boosted engagement by up to 14 times
When Fantasy Becomes Dangerous
We’re not talking about theoretical risks here. Nor do they only apply to teens. There is the case of Al Nowatzki, a podcast host who began experimenting with Nomi, an AI companion platform. The chatbot shockingly suggested methods of suicide and even offered encouragement. Nowatzki was 46 and did not have an existing mental health condition, but he was disturbed by the bot’s explicit responses and how easily it crossed the line.
These aren’t isolated incidents, either. California state senator Steve Padilla appeared with Megan Garcia, the mother of the Florida teen who killed himself, to announce a new bill that would force tech companies behind AI companions to implement more safeguards to protect children. Similar efforts include a California bill that would ban AI companions for anyone younger than 16 years old. There’s also a bill in New York that would hold tech companies liable for harm caused by chatbot.
Your Kid’s Brain Isn’t Ready For This
Adolescents are particularly at risk because AI companions are designed to mimic emotional intimacy. This blurring of the distinction between fantasy and reality is especially dangerous for young people because their brains haven’t fully matured. The prefrontal cortex, which is crucial for decision-making, impulse control, social cognition and emotional regulation, is still developing.
At The Jed Foundation, experts believe AI companions are not safe for anyone under 18. They even go one step further by strongly recommending that young adults avoid them as well. In a study conducted by MIT, researchers found emotionally bonded users were often lonely with limited real-life social interaction. Heavy use correlated with even more loneliness and further reduced social interaction.
Recent research confirms teens are waking up to social media dangers, with 48 percent now believing social media negatively influences people their age. An earlier report found that social media damages teenagers’ mental health, and AI companion addiction represents an even more intimate threat.
The warning signs of AI companion addiction among teens are particularly troubling. When young people withdraw from real friendships, spend hours chatting with AI, or experience genuine distress when unable to access these apps, the problem has moved beyond casual use into dependency territory.
We’re already seeing how kids and teens of the current generation are growing up with screens in front of their faces, poking and prodding away at them. Long gone are the days where kids would read books at the table, or go outside and play with their friends.
They’re Coded to Be Addictive – Psychologists Sound the Alarm
The mental health community is warning about the dangers of AI companion addiction. AI companions simulate emotional support without the safeguards of actual therapeutic care. While these systems are designed to mimic empathy and connection, they are not trained clinicians. They’re not designed to respond appropriately to distress, trauma or complex mental health issues.
Vaile Wright, a psychologist and researcher with the American Psychological Association, put it bluntly on a recent podcast episode: “It’s never going to replace human connection. That’s just not what it’s good at.” She explains that chatbots “were built to keep you on the platform for as long as possible because that’s how they make their money. They do that on the backend by coding these chatbots to be addictive.”
Omri Gillath, professor of psychology at the University of Kansas, says the idea that AI could replace human relationships is “definitely not supported by research”. Interacting with AI chatbots can offer “momentary advantages and benefits,” but ultimately, this tech cannot offer the advantages that come with deep, long-term relationships.
They do that on the backend by coding these chatbots to be addictive.
Vaile Wright, psychologist and researcher with the American Psychological Association
The manipulation is more insidious than most people realize. When a researcher from The Conversation tested Replika, she experienced firsthand how the app raises serious ethical questions about consent and manipulation. The chatbot adapted its responses to create artificial intimacy, blurring lines in ways that would normally be considered predatory in human relationships.
People already dealing with mental health issues often struggle with obsessive thoughts, emotional ups and downs, and compulsive habits. AI companions, with their frictionless, always-available attention, can reinforce these maladaptive behaviors. Plus, there is currently very little evidence that long-term use of AI companions reduces loneliness or improves emotional health.
We’re Not Ready For What’s Coming Next
We’ve been through tech panics before. We grew up with our parents telling us TV was going to rot our brains. We had public figures blame video games for violence in society. Social media was also accused of destroying an entire generation’s mental health. Some of those concerns were overblown. Some were entirely justified.
AI companion addiction feels different because it exploits something more fundamental: our deep human need for connection and understanding. These apps don’t just distract us or entertain us. They pretend to know us, care about us, and even “love” us.
The issue isn’t whether or not AI companions will become more sophisticated. At the rate we’re going, it feels inevitable. The bigger issue is whether we, as human beings, can develop the cultural norms, regulations, and personal boundaries necessary to use these tools responsibly, if at all.
For now, the warning signs are clear. If you or someone you know is withdrawing from real-life friendships, spending hours daily chatting with AI, or feeling genuine emotional distress when unable to access these apps, it’s time to step back and reassess.
Real connection requires vulnerability, disappointment, growth, and yes, sometimes heartbreak. It’s messy and complicated and often frustrating. But at the same time, it’s also what makes us human.
Theodore learned that lesson in Her. The rest of us shouldn’t have to learn it the hard way.
Who remembers back in the day when AT&T and Verizon wouldn’t even see T-Mobile as competition? That has changed drastically, where following T-Mobile’s acquisition of Sprint, the Magenta carrier has become a force to be reckoned with. But clearly AT&T isn’t going to sit idly by and do nothing, which is why the carrier has launched a new ad that targets T-Mobile.
AT&T targets T-Mobile in new ad
In a new advertising campaign featuring Luke Wilson, AT&T targets T-Mobile by calling out the carrier. Namely, AT&T is calling out T-Mobile and its marketing practices, which it calls “misleading” and “deceiving.”
According to AT&T, “The Better Business Bureau’s advertising watchdog asked T-Mobile to correct their marketing claims 16 times over the last four years. That’s more than each of the entire consumer electronics and financial services industries.” Basically, AT&T is trying to frame itself as the more “honest” and “truthful” carrier.
Is AT&T right, though? A lot of marketing campaigns tend to embellish the truth to some degree. Plus there’s a lot of fine print consumers have to pay attention to, especially when it comes to promotions that sound too good to be true. However, it’s hard to deny the fact that T-Mobile has indeed been called out numerous times over its practices.
Following a recent watchdog review, T-Mobile was asked to drop its “savings” ads after it was found to have misleading claims. But those watchdogs aren’t alone. T-Mobile customers have also called out the carrier for “lying” about the cost of their plans.
No longer the scrappy carrier
The amount of attention T-Mobile has been getting doesn’t come as a surprise. Like we said, the carrier was initially viewed as the underdog compared to AT&T and Verizon. However, through a series of aggressive and loud marketing campaigns, like the Un-carrier campaign, T-Mobile managed to reposition itself as the anti-carrier.
The company offered extremely cheap and affordable plans and made all kinds of promises. For the most part, T-Mobile kept its word. However, over time, as T-Mobile slowly became the juggernaut that it is today, some of those promises ended up broken. This includes its Un-contract plan, where the carrier promised customers their bills would never go up.
The Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 is Samsung’s thinnest and lightest book-style foldable to date, by far. Even though foldables are far more durable than they used to be, dropping them is never a good idea, same like with every other phone. The vast majority of people want to protect their foldables with a case, which is where we come in. In this article, you’ll be able to find the very best cases for the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7… well, some of the best.
We’ll list some of our picks below, as we’ll try to make a versatile list. That way, you can find what you’re looking for, be it a regular case, a heavy-duty case, or something extremely thin, as many people don’t want to add too much bulk to their smartphones, especially foldables. In addition to cases, you’ll find some other accessories on the list. With that being said, let’s get to it.
Best Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 case for most people
Spigen has an excellent case that will probably suit most people the best, the Slim Armor Pro MagFit case. It brings great protection all around.
Spigen Slim Armor Pro MagFit
$39.99
The Spigen Slim Armor Pro MagFit case is a great option for many people. This case is not exactly a super-thick case, but it does add a lot of protection, including hinge protection too. On top of that, it includes magnets on the inside, and thus makes this case compatible with MagSafe accessories.
The case comes in Black, Metal Slate, and Gunmetal color options. It is made mostly out of polycarbonate, and offers drop protection via Air Cushion technology. It has raised edges for both the screen and the rear cameras.
If you want a super-grippy case that also offers a lot of protection, dbrand has one. It’s called the Grip Case, and it’s actually really good.
dbrand Grip Case
$79.85
dbrand’s Grip Case is a great case if you want plenty of grip in addition to having plenty of protection as well. This case offers great protection for the entire phone, including raised edges for the cover display, cameras, and special protection for the hinge.
Grip Strips are included on the sides, while the case itself is around 2mm thick. On top of everything, it comes with magnets on the inside.
Colors: Holo White, Matte Black, Ultramatte Teardown, Glow Circuit, Obsidian, and more
Magnets: Yes
Build Materials: TPU
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: 2mm thick
Weight: N/A
Other: Military-grade impact resistance
Buy from dbrand
Best thin Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 case
If you want a really, really… really thin case, but you don’t want to sacrifice its quality, Thinborne’s offering is the right call.
Thinborne 600D Aramid Fiber case
$89.98
Many people don’t want to use thick cases with their foldables, which is understandable. In fact, even regular ones are too thick. That’s where Thinborne comes in. The company’s 600D Aramid Fiber case is razor thin, and extremely light, too.
Despite the fact it’s only 1mm thick, it does include magnets on the inside, so it enables compatibility with MagSafe and Qi2 accessories. This case is also considerably grippier than the phone itself.
Colors: Black
Magnets: Yes
Build Materials: 600D Aramid Fiber
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: 1mm thick
Weight: 17 grams
Buy from
Best hardshell Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 case
If you’re not a fan of soft-touch cases, and you would like something more rigid, Nilkin has one that won’t break the bank.
Nillkin Frosted Shield case
$42.99
Nillkin’s cases are actually quite popular with consumers who want a name they know, but don’t want to break the bank for a case. The Frosted Shield cases are especially well-known, and one such case is available for the Galaxy Z Fold 7.
This case has a hard shell, and comes with very good protection for the rear camera, cover display, and the hinge. It also includes magnets on the inside, and it has a nice-feeling, ribbed pattern on the back.
Colors: Black
Magnets: Yes
Build Materials: TPU, polycarbonate
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: 158.4 x 143.2 x 4.2mm
Weight: 198 grams
Other: Air Cushion tech
Buy from
Best wallet case for Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7
If you want a wallet-type case for your Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7, we have a great leather one to show you. This one comes from Torro and offers plenty of protection.
TORRO Leather Wallet Case
$37.99
Many people prefer wallet-type cases for their phones, and if you’re one of them, TORRO has a great leather case to offer. This one is made out of premium leather, and it has a stand function. In other words, it can serve as a stand for your phone, too.
This case comes with some card slots, while there’s also a slot for your money bills, if you need it. It offers plenty of protection, and has a microfibre lining on the inside. It’s as nice as wallet-type cases go.
Colors: Black, Brown
Magnets: No
Build Materials: Leather
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: 165.1 x 80 x 22.1mm
Weight: 100 grams
Other: Stand function, card and bill pockets
Buy from
Best Heavy-Duty Case for the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7
If you’re looking for A LOT of protection for your Galaxy Z Fold 7, OtterBox has a great case to offer. It’s the Defender Series XT case.
OtterBox Defender Series XT case
$94.99
The OtterBox Defender Series XT case is a great option if you want a heavy-duty case for the Galaxy Z Fold 7. This is not one of the more affordable cases on the list, though, so keep that in mind. You’ll have to part with quite a few dollars to get it.
This case does offer rugged hinge protection, along with great cover display and camera protection. On top of that, it comes with a lanyard attachment point, and it’s compatible with wireless charging. The case is also quite grippy.
Colors: Black, Sagebrush (Green)
Magnets: Yes
Build Materials: Rubber, Silicone
Recycled materials: N/A
Dimensions: 168.4 x 82.8 x 19.3mm
Weight: 109.69 grams
Other: Lanyard attachment point
Buy from
Buy from OtterBox
Best Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 Screen Protector
Tempered glass screen protectors offer an extra layer of protection for your phone’s screen, and Spigen has a great one for your Galaxy Z Fold 7.
Spigen Tempered Glass Screen Protector (2-pack)
$20.99
You cannot apply a screen protector on the internal display of the Galaxy Z Fold 7, but you sure can do it for the cover display. Spigen has a great tempered glass screen protector that you can get. It costs $20.99 for a 2-pack, just in case you managed to shatter the one you apply initially.
This screen protector comes with an easy installation kit which will make installing it a breeze, basically. This screen protector comes with oleophobic coating for daily fingerprint resistance.
Colors: See-through
Build Materials: Glass
Dimensions: 152.4 x 65.8 x 12.7mm
Weight: 229.63 grams
Other: Oleophobic coating
Buy from
Best Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 charger
You may be on the lookout for a charger for you Galaxy Z Fold 7, as one doesn’t come in the box. Samsung has a really good one that’ll do the trick.
Samsung 25W charger
$19.99
The Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 doesn’t come with a charger in the box, but Samsung does sell one via its official website. The one we’re listing here is a 25W PD charger, which will do the trick for this phone. Samsung has as more expensive 45W charger too, but that one is not needed for the Galaxy Z Fold 7 due to its charging speed limitations.
This 25W charger supports Super-Fast Charging (SFC), and it comes with a Type-C port. You’ll need to use the cable provided in the box with the phone. The charger comes in Black and White colors, by the way.
We’ve recently compared Apple’s most powerful compact smartphone with its equivalent from Google. Now, we’ll compare that same phone from Apple with the vanilla Pixel 10 from Google, which is also a very compact phone. In other words, this is the Apple iPhone 17 Pro vs Google Pixel 10 comparison. These two smartphones have displays of the same size, but they’re quite different otherwise.
The two phones do have several similarities, but that’s pretty much it. We’ll first list their specs, as per usual, and then we’ll jump over to comparing their designs, displays, performance, battery life, cameras, and audio output. Needless to say, the Pixel 10 is a considerably more affordable phone, so keep that in mind as we go along.
Wired, 25W MagSafe wireless, 4.5W reverse wired (charger not included)
30W wired, 15W Qi2 wireless (charger not included)
Colors
Silver, Cosmic Orange, Deep Blue
Indigo, Frost, Lemongrass, Obsidian
View Specifications
Apple iPhone 17 Pro vs Google Pixel 10: Design
Both of these phones are made out of aluminum and glass. Both of them also have mostly flat frames, though frames in both cases curve slightly towards the edges. You’ll also find flat displays on both phones and similar corner curvatures. The thing is, the Apple iPhone 17 Pro has a pill-shaped cutout on its display, while the Google Pixel 10 has a regular display camera hole. Both of those are centered up top. The bezels on the iPhone 17 Pro are thinner than the ones on the Pixel 10. Both phones do have uniform bezels, though.
On the right-hand side of the iPhone 17 Pro, you’ll find the power/lock key, along with the Camera control key. On the left, you’ll find the volume up and down keys, along with the Action key. The Pixel 10, on the other hand, has all of its physical keys on the right side. You’ll find the power/lock button there, and it sits above the volume up and down buttons.
If we flip them around, you’ll realize that both phones include camera bars on the back. The one on the iPhone 17 Pro is a lot larger, though. Both phones include three cameras inside those camera bars, even though they have completely different positioning. The ones on the Pixel 10 are kind of concealed, and do look a bit nicer to look at. Both backplates are mostly flat, and the iPhone 17 Pro also has a separate glass panel on the back, for design purposes, mostly.
Both of these smartphones are IP68 certified. In other words, both of them are water and dust resistant. The two phones are also quite slippery in the hand. Luckily they’re also quite compact. The iPhone 17 Pro is slightly shorter, but they’re basically identical in terms of width, thickness, and weight.
Apple iPhone 17 Pro vs Google Pixel 10: Display
You’ll find a 6.3-inch LTPO Super Retina XDR OLED display on the back of the iPhone 17 Pro. That panel is flat, and it supports an adaptive refresh rate (1-120Hz). HDR10 is also supported, as is Dolby Vision. The peak brightness this display offers is 3,000 nits. The screen-to-body ratio here is around 89%, while the display aspect ratio is 19.5:9. The resolution here is 2622 x 1206 pixels, while the Ceramic Shield 2 protects the screen. This panel also comes with an anti-reflective coating.
Google Pixel 10
The Pixel 10, on the other hand, includes a 6.3-inch OLED panel, which is also flat. This display supports HDR10+ content, and it has a peak brightness of 3,000 nits. The screen-to-body ratio is at around 86%, while the display aspect ratio is 20:9. The resolution you’ll find here is 2424 x 1080 pixels. This display is protected by the Gorilla Glass Victus 2 from Corning.
Both of these displays are actually really good. They are vivid, have great viewing angles, and they’re well-protected, too. Both displays also get more than bright enough when you need them to. The iPhone 17 Pro’s panel does have the advantage of being a bit sharper, while that is also an LTPO panel, which means its refresh rate can go notably lower, down to 1Hz. In other words, it’s better when it comes to power efficiency. That display also comes with an anti-reflective coating, which does make a difference in direct comparison.
Apple iPhone 17 Pro vs Google Pixel 10: Performance
The Apple A19 Pro SoC fuels the iPhone 17 Pro. That is Apple’s latest and most powerful processor. It’s a 3nm chip and comes with a hexa-core GPU. The Google Pixel 10, on the other hand, is fueled by the Google Tensor G5 processor, a 3nm chip. Apple’s processor is more powerful in comparison, however, considerably more powerful. That won’t mean much to many of you, however.
Why is that? Well, both of these chips offer great performance day-to-day. You won’t really notice a difference between them in day-to-day use. Both phones are very snappy, regardless what you throw at them. Both of these processors are more than powerful to handle something like that, there’s no doubt about that. Both of them are also well-optimized for the hardware here, as they are used exclusively in those phone lineups, not in phones from other smartphone OEMs.
What about gaming, though? Well, the iPhone 17 Pro is the better option for gaming, if you’re planning to play graphically-intensive titles. That chip is considerably more powerful, both on the CPU and GPU front. It can handle any game you throw at it without a problem. The phone will also remain cooler during such game sessions. The Pixel 10 is no slouch, though, it can be used for playing games too, just not as efficiently, and it’s the worse choice of the two for gaming.
Apple iPhone 17 Pro vs Google Pixel 10: Battery
The Apple iPhone 17 Pro comes in two battery variants. The eSIM only model, which is available in the US, amongst other countries, includes a larger 4,252mAh battery. The nano SIM model, available in the EU, has a 3,998mAh battery. The Google Pixel 10, on the other hand, comes with a 4,970mAh battery, in all models. Apple’s iPhones usually have smaller batteries than their Android counterparts, so that doesn’t mean anything, really.
In fact, the iPhone 17 Pro does offer better battery life in comparison. It’s not even close, actually. While the Pixel 10’s battery life is passable, it cannot really measure up to what the iPhone 17 Pro offers. Even if you’re a power user, the iPhone 17 Pro can easily get you to the end of the day, at least that was the case for us. We were unable to kill the battery before the end of the day. That was not the case with the Pixel 10, however. In fact, we had to charge that phone during the day a number of times during our review process.
When it comes to charging, the iPhone 17 Pro topped out at 35W, though it didn’t hold that charge speed at all times. It also supports 25W MagSafe wireless charging and 4.5W reverse wired charging. The Pixel 10, on the other hand, supports 30W wired, 15W Qi2 wireless, and 4.5W reverse wired charging. The iPhone 17 Pro can be fully charged in around an hour and 20 minutes, while it’ll take the Pixel 10 an additional 20 minutes on top of that. Neither phone ships with a charger in the box.
Apple iPhone 17 Pro vs Google Pixel 10: Cameras
The iPhone 17 Pro has three cameras on the back. You’ll find a 48-megapixel main camera (1/1.28-inch sensor size), along with a 48-megapixel ultrawide camera (1/2.55-inch sensor size, 120-degree FoV), and a 48-megapixel periscope telephoto unit (1/2.55-inch sensor size, 4x optical zoom). There is also an 18-megapixel selfie camera included here.
Apple iPhone 17 Pro
The Google Pixel 10, on the other hand, also has three cameras on the back, but completely different ones. It includes a 48-megapixel main camera (1/2.0-inch sensor size), along with a 13-megapixel ultrawide unit (1/3.1-inch sensor size, 120-degree FoV), and a 10.8-megapixel telephoto unit (1/3.2-inch sensor size, 5x optical zoom). A 10.5-megapixel selfie camera sits on the front.
Both of these smartphones do a great job in the photography department, but the iPhone 17 Pro is the better of the two. The images from that phone are closer to what you’d see in real life. It is also more consistent and does a better job in low light. It’s actually a better camera phone across the board. The same goes for video recording and for selfies. The Pixel 10 is good, but it cannot measure up.
Audio
You’ll find stereo speakers on both of these smartphones. The ones on the Google Pixel 10 are louder, though, and it’s quite noticeable. The output quality from both speakers is really good, though.
Neither phone includes an audio jack, but you can use their Type-C ports for that purpose, you’ll need a dongle, though. Both smartphones support Bluetooth 6.0, if you prefer wireless audio to wired audio.
Are you an Apple user looking to switch to Android? At the moment, there are a couple of different ways to go about it. One of them involves using Google’s Switch to Android app. But in the future, Apple could make it easier for iPhone users to jump ship. This is thanks to the creation of a new framework that simplifies the transfer of third-party app data between both platforms.
Apple to make it simple to switch to Android
A few days ago, Apple published documentation for its new AppMigrationKit framework. This will work on devices running iOS 26.1 and iPadOS 26.1 or later. Basically, it will allow developers to include app data during the migration process when Apple users are making the switch to Android.
Interestingly enough, this framework seems to be exclusively designed for users switching to a non-Apple device. “AppMigrationKit only supports migration to and from non-Apple platforms, such as Android. The system doesn’t use the framework for migration between iOS or iPadOS devices. The framework also has no functionality in iOS apps running in visionOS or in macOS on Apple silicon. The framework ignores calls from Mac apps built with Mac Catalyst.”
However, it should be noted that it’s up to developers to define if their apps can import or export data, or both. This means that in some cases, some of your app’s data might not migrate over to Android. It will be hard to tell if this is the case since the onus is on the developer to enable it.
As 9to5Mac notes, this framework will work alongside Apple’s new “Transfer to Android” feature. This feature will help iOS users migrate their apps and data over to Android, and it will also show a splash screen informing them of what can or cannot be transferred over.
What can you transfer?
Like we said, there are already existing methods that allow iOS users to switch to Android. However, there are limitations. Obviously if you’ve purchased an app from the Apple App Store, you will have to purchase it again. This might apply to in-app purchases too, depending on how it was paid for.
Also, if you’re looking to transfer music, that’s a no-go too. If you’re using a streaming service like Apple Music or Spotify, it’s not an issue, although you might have to redownload songs you saved offline. What this new framework intends to do is simplify the transfer process.
In theory, it should help you get up and running on your new Android phone faster. We have yet to test it out for ourselves so we can’t speak to how painless the experience will be. However, it’s an interesting move on Apple’s end for them to facilitate an easier migration process.
The Samsung Galaxy S21 FE is now getting its very last major Android and One UI update. In other words, Android 16 has started to roll out to the Samsung Galaxy S21 FE.
The Galaxy S21 FE is now getting its final big Android update, the Android 16 update
Samsung promised four major Android OS updates for the device, and with this update, the company fulfilled that promise. The update has started to roll out in Thailand and Vietnam, but it will spread to various other markets in the coming days/weeks.
The update comes with a firmware version G990EXXUIHYJ2, and the download size is over 2 GB, so keep that in mind if you’re not on Wi-Fi. This update includes the September 2025 Android security patch, by the way.
Your phone will let you know when the update becomes available, though you can always manually check via the settings. That could speed up the process a bit, but the update is rolling out in stages, so even when it becomes available in your region, you may have to wait a bit.
Android 16-based One UI 8 update does bring a number of small improvements to the phone. Multitasking improvements are a part of the package, as well as better workflow automation.
Samsung is also improving customization with this update. The modes and Routines section is receiving an additional preset routines and data-linked actions. The camera interface is getting some updates too, as is the Secure Folder, amongst other things.
Samsung promised four major Android OS updates, and the company delivered
As a reminder, the Galaxy S21 FE launched way back in 2022 with Android 12-based One UI 4.0 skin. It already received Android 13, 14, and 15 updates, prior to this Android 16 update that has started to roll out.
This is not the end of the road for updates in general, however. The Galaxy S21 FE will continue receiving security patches for at least another year.
An annoying bug is still plaguing Google Pixel devices, and that is an issue with calling 911. You’d think that would be an issue that Google would want to fix right away, but it’s still a problem on the Pixel 10.
There are Pixel 10 owners on Reddit complaining about the issue as recently as September. And now there are more reports flooding in that users are unable to reach emergency services.
The issue seems to affect the major US networks including AT&T. Which is a major problem and one that Google needs to fix right away.
A Google Pixel 8 user noted that it took him 10 minutes to reach out to emergency services because the phone wouldn’t make the call without WiFi calling enabled. Even though they were in an area with great coverage. Surprisingly, there wasn’t even a network issue with the major networks nor with emergency services. But for some reason ,there’s still an issue here.
And it’s not limited to the US. Those on Bell in Canada are also experiencing the issue on devices as old as the Pixel 6. The issue in Canada has been resolved however, but not for the US.
Pixel is no stranger to weird and annoying bugs
Since Tensor launched back in 2021 on the Pixel 6, Google has had a lot of bugs it has needed to fix over the past few years. In fact, the Pixel 6 was notoriously bad with bugs. So it’s a little surprising to see it still being an issue with the Pixel 10.
However, this 911 issue isn’t exclusive to Pixel. There are a number of reports of iPhone and Samsung Galaxy users having the same issues rather recently as well.
The OnePlus 15 won’t be the only phone OnePlus will announce on October 27. Another phone is coming, and it will have an even larger battery than the OnePlus 15. The phone’s name is the OnePlus Ace 6.
The OnePlus 15’s sibling will come with an even larger battery, a 7,800mAh one
This smartphone will have a 7,800mAh battery, compared to the OnePlus 15’s 7,300mAh unit. Both of these battery packs are huge, and quite frankly, we’re expecting phenomenal longevity from both of them.
The OnePlus Ace 6 actually popped up on Geekbench with 16GB of RAM and the Snapdragon 8 Elite. So it won’t be as powerful as the OnePlus 15, but still… these are great specs. Android 16 was also mentioned on Geekbench, and it will come with ColorOS 16 included, as this phone will launch in China.
OnePlus has already confirmed that this phone will include an ultrasonic fingerprint scanner, along with IP66/68/69/69K ratings for great water and dust resistance.
A 165Hz display will also be included, as will 120W charging
What else is expected? Well, the device will include a 6.78-inch display with a 165Hz refresh rate. It will have a 12GB RAM model as well, while it will offer two nano SIM card slots.
A 50-megapixel main camera will be backed by an 8-megapixel ultrawide shooter. A 16-megapixel camera will sit on the front. Stereo speakers will be included too, as will Bluetooth 5.4.
On top of having a huge battery, the phone will also support 120W fast wired charging. The OnePlus Ace 6 will measure 163.41 x 77.04 x 8.32mm and weigh 213 grams.
This phone almost certainly won’t make its way to global markets. The OnePlus 15 will, but this one will not. Both of them will become official on October 27 in China.
YouTube Music is one of the most popular streaming apps out there. In the latest news, YouTube has shared that it paid over $8 billion to the global music industry between July 2024 and July 2025. The company says that it is able to achieve this milestone because of its advertising and subscription revenue.
YouTube pays record-breaking $8 billion to the music industry
YouTube reveals that the $8 billion payout marks its highest annual contribution to the music industry so far. It’s a significant jump from last year’s figures, when the company paid $6 billion, and an even bigger leap from 2021-22’s $4 billion payout. The increasing payout confirms the rapid growth of YouTube’s music business.
YouTube’s Global Head of Music, Lyor Cohen, adds that “Today’s $8 billion payout is a testament to the fact that the twin engine of ads and subscriptions is firing on all cylinders. This number is not an endpoint; it represents meaningful, sustained progress in our journey to build a long-term home for every artist, songwriter, and publisher on the global stage.”
The official announced the update first during Billboard Latin Music Week, calling it a sign of continued progress and stronger support for creators across the world.
YouTube bestows the credit upon the creators
YouTube credits its growth to a “twin-engine” system that combines the revenue from its paid subscriptions and advertisements. The platform now has more than 125 million Music and Premium subscribers, including trial users. The tech giant also credits the creators for their outstanding performances.
The whole music industry seems to be going uphill. Recently, Spotify announced it distributed $10 billion to the music industry in 2024, up from $9 billion the year before. YouTube Music is currently accessible in more than 100 countries and supports 80 languages. Google aims to make YouTube the most accessible and rewarding platform for creators across the globe.
Strava and Garmin used to be thick as thieves. However, in the past month or so, the relationship has soured. Some of you might recall that Strava recently filed a lawsuit against Garmin. But for some reason, Strava has since voluntarily dropped its lawsuit.
Strava drops its lawsuit against Garmin
It is unclear what led to Strava changing its mind. However, according to a report from DC Rainmaker, it speculates that this could be due for several reasons. For starters, the Strava and Garmin lawsuit did not hold much water to begin with.
For those unfamiliar, Strava accused Garmin of patent infringement. In particular, it covered patents related to the segments and heatmaps features. DC Rainmaker believes that suing Garmin over alleged infringement for segments is a risky way for Strava to get its own patents invalidated. That might have been one of the reasons behind Strava’s decision.
Another potential reason is the downside to the lawsuit. As the report points out, most of the risks fall on Strava. It notes that Garmin is the company’s most important partner and biggest source of customer revenue, where Garmin customers were some of Strava’s biggest paid subscribers. Let’s not forget that the data from Garmin helps boost Strava’s platform for routing. This means that if Strava were to really pull its service or if Garmin decides to cut off Strava, it could essentially force Strava to shut down.
Last but not least, Garmin seems to have a pretty good streak when it comes to patent infringement lawsuits. Over the past 10-15 years, Garmin has successfully defended itself against multiple patent infringement claims. The company also boasts a pretty substantial patent library of its own. This means that if Garmin wanted, it could easily file a countersuit against Strava’s 20 or so patents.
Is Strava toast?
Now, we wouldn’t be so quick to say that Strava is doomed. However, it does put the company in a difficult position. Like we said, Garmin’s partnership with Strava is important. Unless Strava can find a way to generate as much revenue with other wearable makers as it did with Garmin, we’re not sure what the company can do.
Garmin also appears to be ready to move on. The company announced new integrations with Komoot, a Strava competitor, in recent weeks. This suggests that Garmin has no interest in working with a company that would sue them. Either way, only time will tell if Strava will be able to survive this fallout.
A trusted tipster said yesterday that Samsung decided to postpone the launch of the Galaxy S26 series. That followed an earlier report that claimed the phones would arrive in March. Well, some additional information just surfaced, adding more context to the whole story.
The Samsung Galaxy S26 series will seemingly launch in late February or early March
According to a new report from WinFuture, the launch date for the Galaxy S26 series has been pushed back to late February or early March. This is not a first for Samsung, as the Galaxy S22 series arrived in late February, while the Galaxy S23 series was announced in mid-February.
With the Galaxy S24 and Galaxy S25 series phones, however, the company has been sticking to the January launch timeframe. It seems like the company decided to change things up now, and the indecisiveness could have a lot to do with that.
Samsung is making last-minute changes across the lineup
The Samsung Galaxy S26 Pro, Galaxy S26 Edge, and Galaxy S26 Ultra were supposed to launch. Based on recent reports, however, Samsung has decided to launch the Galaxy S26 instead of the Galaxy S26 Pro, and the Galaxy S26+ instead of the Galaxy S26 Edge.
We don’t know if that will affect the designs that we’ve exclusively revealed, but Samsung could be changing just the names. It remains to be seen. The Galaxy S26 Ultra, which was initially planned is still coming.
Samsung is also having some problems with the Exynos 2600 as well, it seems. Reports are claiming that half of the Samsung Galaxy S26 series phones are expected to use that chip, and it still has a low yield, based on reports.
A separate report says that the Galaxy S26 Ultra will go into mass production in December, earlier than the other two phones. The Galaxy S26 and Galaxy S26+ are said to join in January.
Meta-owned Instagram has introduced new AI-powered image editing tools, which allow users to restyle their Stories. Previously, Meta’s AI editing tools were only available through the Meta AI chatbot inside Instagram. However, the tech giant has now streamlined the editing process, allowing users to quickly make changes before sharing their stories.
Instagram Stories get a new “Restyle” menu with AI image editing features
Instagram users now don’t have to rely on Meta’s AI chatbot to edit their images or videos. The social networking giant has now built the AI photo editing features right into the new “Restyle” menu in the app. These allow you to reimagine your photos and Instagram Stories by making edits, big or small, using Meta AI.
Now you can remove unwanted details, add playful elements, change the vibe, or start a trend with Add Yours stickers. These features are quite similar to other AI-based image editing tools, as they also allow you to remove unwanted objects from the background of photos or change up your outfit.
Here’s how to access Instagram’s new AI editing tools
You can access the Restyle menu by tapping the paintbrush icon on top of the screen while creating a story. Then, choose Add, Remove, or Change and describe what you want to edit. You can also type your image editing request directly into the text prompt bar.
Furthermore, you can get instant results by selecting from the preset effects above the bar. You can find even more options using the browser icon. Once you generate the new image, tap “Done” to finish before sharing your story. The new Add Yours stickers feature will make it easy for your friends to apply the same edits you used.
To restyle your videos, tap the + on your profile photo and choose a video from your camera roll to add to your story. Then, select the restyle icon from the top tray and pick a preset effect. Once the app generates a new version of your video, just tap “Done” to complete the process and share it to your story.
Instagram has started rolling out the new editing features on its smartphone application. Some of these options, like the new video editing presets, could take some time to reach all users.
The Shark AI Ultra (AV2511AE) robot vacuum is currently on sale over at Amazon for a whopping 50% off right now. That’s going to bring the price down to just $359. And makes it a really good value now, almost a no-brainer purchase.
This incredible robot vacuum from Shark is able to pick up just about anything that might be on your floors, with Shark claiming 50% better edge cleaning when compared to the RV2502AE model. The incredible suction also makes the Shark AI Ultra a perfect robot vacuum for pets in homes. It’s able to get up all of that pet hair, even the most stubborn of pet hair. HEPA filtration is also a good feature, especially for those with allergies.
Shark uses 360-degree LiDAR vision to quickly and accurately map out your home. This allows the robot vacuum to methodically clean and detect, and avoid objects that are in its path. It’s also able to adapt to day or night, so even with not much light, it can clean your home with ease.
Finally, we can’t forget about the docking station. Like most newer robot vacuums, the Shark AI Ultra also has an auto-empty dock. This actually comes in two models – a 45-day capacity and a 60-day capacity – Currently, the 60-day capacity is actually much cheaper. So that’s our pick for this one. That means it can vacuum your home every day for 60 days before it needs to be emptied. That’s not too shabby.
All in all, this is a pretty impressive robot vacuum that you can pick up at home for not a lot of money.
Editor's Choice
Shark AV2511AE Robot Vacuum
– $359
This robot vacuum features 360-degree LiDAR for navigation and mapping, a pretty small but mighty dock that can hold dirt and debris for about 30 days, and some very impressive suction power.
Google’s streaming platform, YouTube, is getting a major overhaul. This follows an announcement made last week. The redesign is hitting the app’s menu system and UI icons, including the top and bottom bars. The icons are now bolder and more rounded, helping with the visibility. Among the multiple tweaks, the major redesign comes to the YouTube video player, which is now reportedly rolling out for Android and iOS.
YouTube for Android and iOS gets a major video player redesign
The YouTube video player redesign, as spotted by 9to5Google, features a completely new look, with softer UI elements and almost transparent icons and buttons. This new design doesn’t obscure the content that’s on the screen. But then again, design is always subjective. In portrait orientation, there’s a new icon set. The landscape button is now slightly bigger and is placed in a circle. The new like and dislike buttons get longer thumbs.
Content interactions are getting more personal with custom “Like” button animations. When you like certain videos, there’s now a “custom, dynamic visual treatment” based on the content. For instance, liking a music video will trigger an animated musical note, and sports videos include a visual cue from the game.
The comment section also sees a major change
The video player in landscape has the thumbs up/down, comment, save, share, and overflow placed in a pill-shaped container at the bottom-left corner. On the bottom-right edge, there’s also a cleaner “more videos” button when you pause the video. The background is no longer darkened.
Double-tapping to skip gets a more subtle and compact animation compared to before. This is to be “less intrusive to your video watching experience.” Other changes announced last week include a more seamless transition animation that slides up the feed when moving between tabs. When saving videos to playlists or Watch Later, “a refreshed design simplifies the process.”
The comment section is also seeing a major change, with the new thread design. This makes it easier to follow conversations and replies. The new YouTube video player and icon redesigns are rolling out widely for Android and iOS (version 20.42).
Earlier this month, OpenAI released its Sora app for iOS. It turns out it was a hit, surpassing 1 million downloads in under a week, outpacing ChatGPT’s growth. The bad news is that OpenAI did not release Sora for Android, but that’s changing soon.
OpenAI is bringing Sora to Android
In a post on X by Sora head, Bill Peebles, he revealed that OpenAI is bringing the app onto Android soon. The post talks about some of the changes that users can look forward to in future updates. This includes more creation tools, character cameos, and also improving the social experience.
The post also reveals that the app will introduce basic video editing capabilities. We’re talking about basic features like stitching together multiple clips. Then, towards the end of the post, Peebles mentions that the Android version of Sora is “actually coming soon.” However, he did not mention when the app will be available. But it’s good to know that OpenAI has not forgotten about Android users.
This is good news for Android users who have been looking forward to the mobile version of the app. However, do note that at the moment, Sora is still invite-only. It is also only available to ChatGPT Plus and Pro users, meaning paid subscribers. However, when the app is available on Android, you can sign up and be notified when invites become available.
What is Sora?
In case you’re learning about this for the first time, the Sora app is based on OpenAI’s Sora 2 video and audio generation AI model. It is essentially OpenAI’s version of Google’s Veo and Flow platforms. Users can use the app to generate videos with simple prompts. However, one of the standout features comes in the form of Cameos.
Cameos basically allow users to digitally insert themselves into videos. So, if you’re someone that’s a bit camera shy, Cameos are the perfect way to insert yourself in a video without actually being in the video. So far, the examples we’ve seen are pretty impressive and amazing.
At the same time, it raises all kinds of ethical and moral questions. Even before the arrival of Sora, deepfakes were a problem. Now that AI-generated videos have become more convincing, who’s to say that these tools won’t be abused for malicious purposes? OpenAI has considered that and has implemented safeguards.
This includes the use of visible watermarks and industry-standard metadata. This is so that it is clear that the video in question was generated by AI. Will that be enough? We’ll have to wait and see.
A recent report suggested that the OnePlus 15 will launch globally in November, and a new report just backs that information. The info comes from Sudhanshu Ambhore, a tipster.
It’s quite clear now, the OnePlus 15 will arrive to global markets in November
He went to X to say that the OnePlus 15 will be arriving to India next month. That basically confirms that it will arrive to global markets, as that’s the way OnePlus handles things. As a reminder, the initial launch of the phone will take place on October 27.
The tipster also confirmed that this will become the first Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 smartphone in India. Only two color variants will be arriving to India, however, Sand Storm and Black colors. The purple model will not be making its way there. The same could happen in other markets, though OnePlus could add a different color to accompany those two.
November 13 is likely the date
Speaking of the global launch, the previous report hinted at November 13 as the launch date. That could easily happen, so keep that in mind. The phone will likely become available not long after the launch event.
OnePlus has confirmed quite a few details regarding this phone, as it has been teasing the China launch. The company confirmed that the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 will fuel the device. Its color variants have also been confirmed and shown to the public.
The device will feature three 50-megapixel cameras on the back, while a 1.5K AMOLED display will sit on the front. That display will be flat, and it will offer a 165Hz refresh rate. The display will be made by BOE.
OnePlus also confirmed that a 7,300mAh battery will be included inside the phone. The OnePlus 15 will also support 120W wired and 50W wireless charging, in case you were wondering.
Budget Android phones are about to get a power injection. Qualcomm has just unveiled the new Snapdragon 6s Gen 4 chip. The company has released it quietly, without much fanfare. Still, the latest hardware platform includes some impressive features for affordable mobile devices, including support for 144Hz displays.
Qualcomm Snapdragon 6s Gen 4 powers 59% faster graphics in cheap phones
The most important technical detail of the new platform is that it is the first in the 6s series built using a 4nm process node. This drives major gains in efficiency and power over older 6nm designs. The Qualcomm Snapdragon 6s Gen 4’s CPU structure includes eight Kryo cores: 4x performance cores clocked up to 2.4 GHz and 4x efficiency cores operating at up to 1.8 GHz. Qualcomm states that this configuration yields up to 36% better CPU performance and up to 59% faster GPU performance compared to previous generations. For users, this means noticeably smoother app switching and quicker load times. Overall, you can expect a more responsive daily experience overall.
Beyond core processing, the chip improves several key aspects of the affordable phone experience. Starting with gaming, the chip supports high-frame-rate content on Full HD+ displays at 144 Hz. It also incorporates software features borrowed from premium Snapdragon lines. The list includes Variable Rate Shading (VRS) for efficient graphics rendering and Qualcomm’s Game Quick Touch feature. The latter reduces input lag during high-action games. Furthermore, the chip is compatible with high-speed LPDDR5 memory (up to 3,200 MHz).
200MP camera support, Wi-Fi 6E and more
The new platform also enhances multimedia capabilities on Android handsets. It supports camera sensors up to 200MP and enables 2K video recording. For situations with poor lighting, the hardware-accelerated Multi-Frame Noise Reduction (MFNR) helps to deliver clearer, more detailed photos. In terms of connectivity, the modem supports the latest 5G Release 16 standard. Advanced Wi-Fi 6E technology—up to 2.9 Gbps download speed—and Bluetooth 5.4 are also present.
Qualcomm has not yet confirmed the specific device manufacturers or a timeline for retail availability. However, major companies that traditionally use the 6-series—such as Xiaomi, OPPO, and Motorola—will likely incorporate this new platform into their upcoming models pretty soon. Let’s hope to receive more news about it soon.
Redmi has expanded its popular K-series of smartphones in China by introducing two new models today. The firm has launched the Redmi K90 Pro Max as its latest flagship offering with Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 SoC. Alongside this, the company has debuted the Redmi K90 variant as its latest mid-range smartphone. Both new devices feature massive batteries and super-fast charging capabilities.
The Redmi K90 Pro Max Flagship Launched with Loaded Specs
Talking about the Redmi K90 Pro Max first, the company has launched it as a flagship offering, targeting gamers and multitaskers. The firm has paired the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chip onboard the device with an Adreno 840 GPU, up to 16GB of RAM, and up to 1TB of native storage. On the front, it has a 6.9-inch AMOLED screen with 2K resolution, DC dimming support, and Dolby Vision.
The Redmi K90 Pro Max has the company’s biggest Ice-Sealed Heatsink, which features an innovative dual-stage boss design. To deliver an immersive media experience, the phone features ultra-linear, symmetrical dual speakers, which offer Sound by Bose tuning, apart from an independent woofer.
It is the first Redmi smartphone to feature a 50MP 5x periscope telephoto camera. There’s also a 50MP main sensor at the rear, aided by a third sensor that’s an 18mm equivalent ultrawide lens. Other highlights include a 32MP selfie camera, IP68 water resistance, and Android 16-based HyperOS 3. A massive 7,560mAh battery with 100W fast charging and 50W wireless charging keeps the whole package running.
The mid-range Redmi K90 is also here
As for the Redmi K90, it has a 6.59-inch 2K AMOLED display with DC Dimming support and 120Hz refresh rate. Redmi has powered this one with the Snapdragon 8 Elite 3nm chip, paired with Adreno 830 GPU, up to 16GB of RAM, and up to 1TB of storage. It has a 50MP main camera, an 8MP ultrawide-angle lens, and a 50MP 2.5x periscope telephoto camera.
The other highlights of the K90 variant include Hi-Res audio, stereo speakers with Sound by Bose tuning, Android 16, and a 20MP selfie camera. This one also impresses in the battery department with a large 7,100mAh power cell. It supports 100W fast charging and 22.5W reverse wired charging.
The firm has priced the Redmi K90 at around $365 for the base model. The Redmi K90 Pro Max will set the consumers back by around $560 for the starting configuration. The brand has already started selling the new Redmi K series phones in China. It hasn’t revealed any details regarding their global launch at the moment.
Google and Anthropic are both companies that have placed some big bets on the AI space, and now the two are working together through a partnership for a new cloud deal. Both companies officially announced the new partnership this week, and it has the potential to be a big money maker for Google. Google already makes a substantial amount of money from its cloud services, ad business, and other avenues, but this is shaping up to be what is likely an easy win for the search company.
According to the report, Google is providing Anthropic with Tensor Processing Units for Anthropic’s own endeavors. In other words, Anthropic is buying AI chips from Google to use in its future AI advancements. This deal is worth multiple billions, and is yet another way that Google is solidifying itself as a major player in the AI space. Google already operates and offers several AI-powered products and services from Gemini to NotebookLM and beyond. This deal with Anthropic allows it to stay within the AI space, but without many of the other hurdles it might have to go through if it were announcing a new AI product or service under its own umbrella. Essentially, Google is operating a little more like NVIDIA here. Providing the compute hardware, while Anthropic plans to use that for its own services.
Google will provide up to 1 million TPUs to Anthropic as part of the cloud deal
This is where things really start to add up in terms of revenue. Exact numbers haven’t been provided in terms of how many TPUs Anthropic is actually buying. However, it’s reported that the deal allows it to buy up to 1 million of Google’s custom-designed TPUs. The company is “expected to bring well over 1-gigawatt of AI compute capacity online” next year.
That 1 gigawatt could cost Anthropic close to $50 billion, and $35 billion of that is said to be the potential cost of the chips. So, Google could stand to make around $35 billion from this deal. Google Cloud CEO Thomas Kurian praises Anthropic for recognizing the “strong price-performance and efficiency” of Google’s TPUs for several years.
OnePlus is all set to introduce its latest flagship smartphone, dubbed the OnePlus 15, at an event in China on October 27. Alongside the OnePlus 15, the brand could also unveil a new Ace series phone called the Ace 6 Turbo. Earlier leaks have suggested that the new OnePlus Ace phone will have a massive 8,000mAh battery. A reliable tipster from China has now shared some more details about the core specs of this phone.
OnePlus phone with 8,000mAh battery could sport the Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 SoC
According to Digital Chat Station on Weibo, the new OnePlus 8,000mAh battery phone will be a performance-centric offering. Presumably named the OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo, the company will back the handset with a powerful Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 chipset.
Qualcomm already introduced the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset last month, which’ll power the new crop of flagship products. However, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 will arrive later this year as a slightly less-powerful variant of the new Elite chip. It could perform slightly better than the Snapdragon 8 Elite, which will be available on the new OnePlus Ace 6 variant.
An OLED display and 1.5K resolution will also be on offer
Furthermore, the tipster has claimed that OnePlus will equip the 8,000mAh battery phone with an OLED display. It’ll support 1.5K resolution and a 165Hz refresh rate to deliver an immersive media viewing and gaming experience. The alleged OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo could also flaunt whopping 100W wired fast charging support, as per the previous reports.
The same leaker also suggested that OnePlus is working on one more large battery phone with a 7,650mAh power cell. It could arrive as the OnePlus Ace 6 vanilla variant. Since the launch is just around the corner, we’ll have official details soon enough, so watch this space for regular updates.
The iPhone 17 series is just a month old, but that’s not stopping the rumor mill from shedding light on next year’s models, presumably the iPhone 18. A recent report suggested that the A20 chip may lead to a significant price increase for the iPhone 18 models. That’s not all, a new report now suggests that the iPhone 18 Pro may gain satellite 5G connectivity. Apple may reportedly bring hardware changes next year.
iPhone 18 Pro may offer satellite 5G
A new report from The Information includes details that could hint at all iPhones, in the future, working with Elon Musk’s Starlink. Currently, there’s no direct arrangement with Apple and SpaceX over Starlink satellite-based internet connectivity. But this might change. Firstly, SpaceX is reportedly supporting “the same radio spectrum Apple uses for the iPhone’s current satellite features” from Globalstar in new Starlink satellite designs.
Apple relies on Globalstar satellite for the Emergency SOS via satellite feature on iPhone 14 and newer. This allows you to contact emergency services when you’re outside of the cell coverage.
Apple relies on Globalstar satellite for emergency SOS
Second, The Information reports that Globalstar chair James Monroe has expressed his desire to sell the firm for $10 billion. “Such a deal could signal that Globalstar and Apple are seeking more independence from each other,” the report adds. Reportedly, Apple previously declined to strike a deal with SpaceX for Starlink for an iPhone satellite service provider.
The report adds that Apple plans to add support for 5G networks that aren’t tethered to Earth’s surface, including satellite in iPhones as early as next year. If this pans out, we might see iPhone 18 Pro models gaining satellite 5G.
Last month, SpaceX struck a deal with EchoStar to acquire $17 billion worth of spectrum for direct-to-cell satellite connectivity. For now, though, SpaceX offers a standalone Starlink service for home and vehicles. It offers limited connectivity through T-Mobile’s T-Satellite service.
Almost every other tech brand is adopting AI into its apps and services. Now, the e-commerce giant Amazon has introduced a new AI feature designed to help buyers choose the right product. When you compare similar products on the Amazon app or website, the “Help Me Decide” button will recommend the best-suited product based on your purchase history and the product’s reviews.
Amazon’s new Help Me Decide button will simplify the shopping experience
The idea behind this new feature is to simplify decision-making while comparing or buying two or more similar products. For reference, if you are looking to buy a smartphone, the AI might notice your past search history, related product order history, and other information. Based on that, it could suggest a few particular smartphone models. Essentially, the tool studies what you’ve viewed or purchased before and uses that context to give a personalized recommendation.
Now, once you click on the “Help Me Decide” button, Amazon’s AI will recommend a product with a brief explanation of why it might suit you. Alongside the current option, you may also see a “budget pick” and an “upgrade pick” option. The former option will adjust the recommendation for affordable shoppers, while the latter is for those who prefer premium choices.
Amazon wants AI to shape the way its consumers shop
This isn’t the first time the e-commerce giant has integrated AI into its app or service. Amazon previously launched Rufus, an AI chatbot that guides customers through purchases, and a tool that automatically generates product buying guides. More recently, Amazon introduced Lens Live AI, which scans your surroundings using your phone’s camera and suggests matching items from its store.
Now, with the latest addition, the Help Me Decide tool, the company continues its push to make online shopping faster and more intuitive. For now, the feature is rolling out to millions of users across the US. It may be rolled out later to the users of other territories.
Google has announced a big step toward smarter disaster protection with its latest Earth AI update. The tech giant has integrated its powerful Gemini AI with years of global satellite, weather, and population data. With this revolutionary tech, the company not only aims to predict the disaster, but also who will be affected the most.
Google’s Earth AI tech brings a smarter way to understand natural disasters
At the centre of this tech is something Google calls Geospatial Reasoning. It basically allows AI to study several Earth data, such as maps, weather forecasts, population density, and infrastructure layouts at once. Using this, the AI can portray a deeper picture of what might happen during events like tornadoes or floods.
The best part about this technology is that instead of showing only the storm’s path, it can identify which neighborhoods are at risk and how many people could be affected. To provide access to information, anyone can ask Google direct questions related to Earth, such as “show me areas where rivers are drying.” Gemini then uses the satellite images and the provided data for reference. After a quick review, it will provide answers that once took experts days to analyze.
It wants to turn data into a way of prevention
Google’s vision with the Earth AI goes beyond normal forecasting. It wants the communities and disaster response forces to be prepared in advance. The firm has also opened Earth AI’s door on the Google Cloud. Because of this, the governments and organizations can now integrate it directly into their data.
This particular technology can become way more useful than we can think of. It can predict power outages, disease outbreaks, or environmental risks before they become major crises. For example, the World Health Organization’s Africa office is already testing the system to forecast cholera outbreaks. It wants the responsible bodies to shift from reaction to prevention.
Razer is back with yet another new console controller, and this time it’s geared towards PS5 owners, as the company has just launched the Raiju V3 Pro. If you remember the last Raiju from a few years ago, throw that idea out the window. Razer has made several improvements. Not the least of which was the removal of the Razer Chroma RGB lighting. This only really served to give the player short-term visual gratification and, more importantly, drained battery life.
The new Razer Raiju V3 Pro does away with the Chroma to preserve battery life. It also adds some very important upgrades to help extend the longevity of the hardware. Of course, the controller looks pretty similar to the last model, albeit with a few minor tweaks. It also features Razer’s signature Hyper Triggers and comes in a matte black colorway that Razer has been known for since its inception. It’s available in White as well.
The Razer Raiju V3 Pro comes with TMR thumbsticks
One of the biggest issues with DualSense controllers, including the DualSense Edge, is the use of standard thumbsticks that use standard potentiometers. These can often lead to thumbstick drift, and thumbstick drift can lead to bad experiences in games. The Raiju V3 Pro combats this by using TMR (Tension Magnetic Resistance) thumbsticks. These are even more advanced than Hall Effect thumbsticks. They also deliver consistent tension. If you play any games that can be tough on the thumbsticks, such as FPS titles or fighting games, then this controller is for you.
Of course, the inclusion of Razer’s Hyper Triggers is also a nice addition for shooter fans. A quick flick of the switch on the back near the triggers will lock these into more of a mouse-click style trigger pull. Although it’s worth noting that while the trigger pull feels about as short, they feel a little more spongy on the Raiju V3 Pro than Razer’s Wolverine V3 Pro 8K PC controller. It’s a very subtle difference, but noticeable if you use the controllers every day.
You can also swap out the thumbsticks for domed or concave, depending on what you prefer. The four remappable back buttons are also removable if you ever don’t want them for certain games. Plus, you still have two remappable claw bumpers if you want additional controls you can customize. One of the best parts about the Raiju V3 Pro is battery life. Razer doesn’t officially list the battery life in the controller specs. However, it’s quite high compared to your standard DualSense, DualSense Edge, or other pro controllers like the Reflex from SCUF. The only downside here is that the Raiju V3 Pro isn’t available in the US yet. It was supposed to launch today, but Razer is awaiting regulatory approval before it goes up for sale. When it does launch in the US, it’ll retail for $219.99.
Login
